Profiler2_reference guide
4 likes6,094 views
This document is a reference guide for the PROFILER 2 software and device. It provides information on the latest firmware and software versions including new features such as data plotting, water tank file importing, smoothing algorithms, and analysis panel changes. It also includes instructions for setting up the USB and serial ports, installing firmware, launching the software, connecting devices, and removing the software. Safety instructions are provided.
![Theory of Calibration Using Wide Fields
Calibration values consist of sensitivity values for each detector that can be applied to the mea-
sured output of a detector in such a way that the corrected measurement of dose distribution is
independent of the detector sensitivity. Historical methods of calibration use a narrow field and a
device to move the detector array in steps such that each detector occupies the central axis posi-
tion while its response is measured. If the array detector’s response is energy and directional
dependent, then the calibration value is valid only at the beam energy and beam orientation used
during calibration. The severity of this limitation depends upon the magnitude of the energy
response. These problems are eliminated in the wide field calibration technique described below.
The linear array is positioned in the radiation field such that the field overlaps the end detectors.
For clarity, steps C and D of the calibration process will be discussed first.
Radiation is delivered to the array and the measurement of the detectors are saved in a data array
labeled as [C]. The array is then moved laterally along the array axis such that the detectors now
occupy positions in the fields formerly occupied by the adjacent detectors. Another dose is deliv-
ered and the measurement is saved in a data array [D].
In the simplest form, if the dose delivered is precisely the same for both [C] and [D], and if the
measurements have a very high precision, then the relative sensitivity of neighboring detectors
can be calculated because they both occupied the same location in the field.
For example, the array was shifted for [D] and #2 (detector number 2 in the array) occupies #1’s
former position during [C]. Then the sensitivity ratio of #2 to #1 is ‘D2’ / ‘C1.’ Likewise the sensi-
tivity ratio of #3 to #2 is ‘D3’ / ‘C2,’ and the sensitivity ratio of #3 to #1 is (‘D3’ / ‘C2’) * (‘D2’ / ‘C1’).
In like manner, the entire array sensitivity can be calculated with respect to detector #1.
The benefit of such a calibration is that the measured values for each detector’s calibration is
taken at or near the field location where it will be used to measure the field distribution. Any
change in energy (including that caused by scatter in a wide field) or angle of incidence at adjacent
regions in the field will be small which will minimize any error caused by an energy or directional
response. Furthermore, the relative sensitivity between neighbors will be known to a higher pre-
cision because it is a simple ratio between two measured values, at the spatial location where they
will be used. This will result in a higher precision in field profile measurement, which can reveal
significant profile shapes otherwise obscured by measurement artifacts.
However, such a simple calibration is not practical without further measurements. With the calcu-
lation described above in steps C and D, any error in measurement precision, dose delivery, or
minor sensitivity change in the array will propagate through the ratios and the end could have a
significant error which could have significant effects on symmetry calculations. For example, a
0.1% error bias in the dose delivery will cause a 4.6% sensitivity error on the 46th detector.
The error bias between data sets [C] and [D] can be corrected by rotating the array 180 degrees
and making a third measurement, saving it as data array [A]. With data set [A], the relative sensi-
tivity between the end detectors can now be calculated because they occupy each other’s former
positions. In fact, the relative sensitivity between all mirror detectors can be calculated. These true
relative sensitivity values can then be used to determine a correction to the error bias with a pre-
cision limited only by the measurement precision between a detector pair.
There are several requirements between these data sets:
1 The movement of the detector array should not change the scatter conditions to the detector
array.
2 The dose distribution profile from the machine should not change from one data set to the
next, i.e., the profile shape must stay constant. It is allowed that the actual dose or dose rate
change between data sets, these changes are compensated in the data analysis. However, if
the energy of the beam itself changes during or between data sets, then the profile shape will
change which will invalidate the calibration process.
3 The relative sensitivity of the detectors all change the same amount. This statement is in rec-
ognition of the equilibration of a detector’s response during radiation exposure. Typical
changes in response are small (0.1%) and can hardly be measured. Furthermore, the change
may be due to the measurement electronics.
158 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/profiler2-referenceguide-110630084605-phpapp02/85/Profiler2_reference-guide-170-320.jpg)
![The field size must overlap the end detectors sufficiently to allow the end detectors to be irradi-
ated without penumbra effects. Buildup over and around the detectors must be uniform and
extend beyond the field size. The field shape (i.e., dose distribution) can be irregular, however, high
gradient changes in intensity will require higher precision in array positioning than for low gradient
changes.
This concept can be expanded to off axis detectors with an intermediate rotation of the array such
that off axis detectors occupy detector locations formerly occupied by the linear array. Then rela-
tive sensitivities of the off axis detectors can be calculated with respect to the array sensitivity. In
the case of the PROFILER 2, there are off axis detectors located 8 cm from the center which
require a 90 degree rotation to be calculated, referred to as step [B].
Profile Storage And Data Format
Saving a Profile
After pressing the Stop button, you are prompted to save the file if ‘Auto Save Collected Data’ is
selected in ‘Setup Parameters’. If ‘Auto Save Collected Data’ is turned off, you can save the profile
by using the Save As command under the File menu. If AutoSave is off and Start is selected
before saving a profile, the data will be lost. If the PROFILER 2 program is closed before saving
the data, a warning message appears which gives an opportunity to save the data under the Save
As function, or Cancel and exit the program.
The file path will be C:SNCPROFILER2Data<serial number>filename. If the PROFILER 2
was installed under a different directory, then that path will be followed. During installation, a
‘Data’ directory was created for profile storage.
When Save As is selected, the ‘Edit’ screen appears, which provides a template to document the
parameters associated with the profile being saved.
PROFILER 2 File Formats
The following table lists the file formats for PROFILER 2.
Table 8-1. File Formats for PROFILER 2
File Name Extension Description
Single Profile .prs A single profile data set.
Concatenated Profile .prc A concatenation consisting of two separate profiles combined to
make a single profile. This type of file is used to save profiles wider
than 30 cm up to 60 cm.
Multi Frame Capture .prm A multi-frame file, consisting of multiple profile frames. This is a
sequence of profiles taken at regular intervals, allowing you to
record transients, such as warm-up.
Calibration .cal A standard array calibration file.
Note: File formats for the PROFILER 2 are the same as the file formats for the IC
PROFILER.
SRS Profiler File Formats
The following table lists the file format for the SRS PROFILER. Although this format can only be
created with the SRS PROFILER, it can be opened in the PROFILER software.
Table 8-2. File Format for SRS PROFILER
File Name Extension Description
Multi-frame file .snb A multi-frame file, consisting of multiple profile frames.
Profile Storage And Data Format 159](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/profiler2-referenceguide-110630084605-phpapp02/85/Profiler2_reference-guide-171-320.jpg)
![Figure 8-1. Characteristics of a Typical Profile
Subscripted indices refer to virtual detector locations, such as lFRGN, etc.
Variable definitions:
CM =
The virtual detector number associated with the calculated beam center position. The
subscript M refers to middle.
lh + rh
C M = --------------
-
2
DRj =
Dose rate of detector j during the profile interval.
FRGN =
The Field ReGioN over which flatness, area symmetry, and symmetry is calculated. It is
expressed as a percent of the Field Size (FS) and displayed in the box next to Flatness,
as a number in parentheses. The default value for this is 80%. You can adjust the value,
but it cannot exceed 100%.
l=
First detector j whose displayed array value is greater than 1/2 of the maximum array
value, searching from 1 to 83 for the Y axis and from 1 to 57 for the X axis.
Detector l is such that:
1 1
DR l – 1 ≤ -- MAX [ DR i ] , DR l > -- MAX [ DR i ]
- -
2 2
The variable “l” represents the left portion of the array as viewed on the graph.
If the value of l is not greater than or equal to 2, the software will display the error mes-
sage “Variable out of range.”
Analysis of a Profile 161](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/profiler2-referenceguide-110630084605-phpapp02/85/Profiler2_reference-guide-173-320.jpg)
![lh =
Virtual detector location for the left 50% (half) beam intensity point.
1
⎛ -- ( MAX [ DR j ] ) – DR l – 1⎞
-
2
⎜ ---------------------------------------------------------- ⎟
-
lh = l – 1 +
⎜ DR l – DR l – 1 ⎟
⎝ ⎠
lFRGN =
Virtual detector location for the left side of specified field region size, defined as FRGN%.
By definition, lFRGN ≥ lh.
FRGN
l FRGN = C M + ( l h – C M ) ⋅ ---------------
-
100
lf =
Integer detector index, corresponding to the first detector on the left side included in the
FRGN.
lf = int ( l FRGN ) + 1
r=
Last detector number (j) whose displayed array value (ADR if dose, DR if rate) is greater
than 1/2 of the maximum array value, searching from 1 to 83 for the Y axis or 1 to 57 for
the X axis. Detector r is such that:
1 1
DR r + 1 ≤ -- MAX [ DR i ] , DR r > -- MAX [ DR i ]
- -
2 2
The subscript “r” represents the right portion of the array as viewed on the graph.
The value of r must be less than or equal to 82 for the Y axis, or less than or equal to 56
for the X axis, or the software will display the error message “Variable out of range.”
rh =
Virtual detector location for the right 50% (half) beam intensity point.
1
⎛ DR r – -- MAX [ DR j ]⎞
-
2
⎜ ------------------------------------------------⎟
rh = r +
⎜ DR r – DR r + 1 ⎟
⎝ ⎠
rFRGN =
Virtual detector location for the right side of specified field region size, defined as
FRGN%. By definition, rFRGN is less than or equal to rh.
FRGN
r FRGN = C M + ( r h – C M ) ⋅ ---------------
-
100
rf =
integer detector index, corresponding to the last detector on the right side included in
the FRGN.
rf = int ( r FRGN )
Field Size
Field size, in cm, is calculated from the difference in the 50% virtual detector positions,
SSD -
FS = ------------------- ⋅ ( r h – l h ) ⋅ 0.40 cm
SSD + 1
where SSD is the distance to the PROFILER 2 surface in cm.
162 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/profiler2-referenceguide-110630084605-phpapp02/85/Profiler2_reference-guide-174-320.jpg)
![The numeric value is actually half of the maximum percent variation, i.e., it is expressed from the
average between the maximum and the minimum. For example, if FLAT = ±2.5%, then the range
from maximum to minimum is approximately 5%.
MX = Maximum value of a chamber in the specified field region
MN = Minimum value of a chamber in the specified field region
Ratio (IEC) Flatness Calculation
This method of calculation is according to IEC Standard 976. It determines the flatness of the radi-
ation profile, expressed as a ± percent value and calculated over a portion of the field size
The relevant field sizes (X and Y axes) for this calculation are:
5cm to 10cm: (the distance from 50% left of CAX to 50% right CAX) - 2cm
10cm to 30cm: (the distance from 50% left of CAX to 50% right of CAX) * 0.8
30cm to ? cm: (the distance from 50% left of CAX to 50% right of CAX) - 6cm
The Ratio (IEC) flatness calculation is
MX
FLAT = ± -------- ⋅ 100 ,
-
MN
where:
MX = Maximum value of a chamber in the specified field region
MN = Minimum value of a chamber in the specified field region
Varian Flatness Calculation
This method calculates the central axis normalized flatness.
MX – MN
FLAT = -----------------------
-
CAX
where:
MX = Maximum value of a chamber in the specified field region: [DRj], for lFRGN < j < rFRGN
MN = Minimum value of a chamber in the specified field region: [DRj], for lFRGN < j < rFRGN.
Symmetry
The software supports the following types of symmetry calculations:
• CAX Point Difference
• Local Point Difference
• Point Ratio (Ratio IEC)
• Varian Point Difference
• Area Average
• Area
The Symmetry calculation method and field region used to calculate symmetry can be selected in
the Configure Analysis dialog box (Setup > Analysis), or by right-clicking in the parameters area
of the Analysis panel and selecting Edit > Symmetry from the menu.
CAUTION: You can select different types of symmetry in the Analysis Panel and the
! Graph display. Verify that you have set them up correctly for your needs.
164 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/profiler2-referenceguide-110630084605-phpapp02/85/Profiler2_reference-guide-176-320.jpg)
![See also “Calculating Calibrated Detectors for Small Fields” on page 93.
Profile Comparison
The dosimetry of a linear accelerator includes a detailed 3-dimensional plot of the depth dose dis-
tribution in a water tank. This task is long and tedious and the resultant data is only valid for the
beam energy and intensity profile which existed during the measurement. Any changes in energy
or beam steering can invalidate the data; such changes can occur during routine maintenance or
from age of the accelerator components. It is very important, during such adjustments, to repli-
cate the same profile shape as existed during the 3-dimensional dosimetry measurements.
See also “Comparing Profiles” on page 115.
Percent Difference
Compare provides a graphical representation of the differences between two profiles. The com-
pare difference profile is calculated from the averaged profiles in the two profiles selected to be
compared. The variable CDPj represents the percent difference of the new profile shape at the
location of detector j with respect to the reference profile. The scale of the graph of CDPj is –10%
to +10%, with division lines set at 1% increments.
CDP j = ( NG1 j – NG2 j ) ⋅ 100
j: l+1 to r-1, using l and r from the selected profile.
The variables NG1 and NG2 refer to the normalized graphs 1 and 2. Each profile array element “j”
is normalized to the respective profile average, taken between the 50% intensity points.
DR j DR j
NG1 j = ⎛ ---------------------------⎞
- NG2 j = ⎛ ---------------------------⎞
-
⎝ AVG [ DR j ]⎠ GRAPH 1 ⎝ AVG [ DR j ]⎠ GRAPH 2
Active Profile Reference Profile
j: 1→83 for the Y axis and 1→57 for the X axis.
The average value of the array values is found from both the two compared graphs:
r
∑DRj
j=l
AVG [ DR j ] = ------------------
-
r–l+1
where r is the right 50% subscript and l is the left 50% subscript in each graph.
Compare Index
A compare index (CI) is calculated and displayed at the bottom the graph in the compare screen.
Compare Index reduces the graphical comparison of two profiles to one number which can be
used as an evaluation index. The index is the RMS value of the compare differences, divided by
the number of points. It is similar in meaning to the coefficient of variation. Graphs which do not
compare well will have a large compare index.
r(2)
r(2) 2
∑ ( CDP j – AVG [ CDP ] l ( 2 ) )
j = l(2)
CI = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
r( 2) – l( 2) + 1
The symbols r(2) and l(2) refer to the subscript variable r and l in the selected profile, the reference
profile.
170 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/profiler2-referenceguide-110630084605-phpapp02/85/Profiler2_reference-guide-182-320.jpg)
Profiler2_reference guide
- 1. PROFILER 2™ Reference Guide The Water Tank Alternative s u Your Most Valuable QA & Dosimetry Tools n
- 2. Reference Guide, PROFILER 2™ © Copyright 2005-2008 by Sun Nuclear Corporation. All rights reserved. The information contained in this technical manual and the accompanying software program is protected by copyright and all rights are reserved by Sun Nuclear Corporation. Copying, duplicat- ing, selling, or otherwise distributing any part of this product without the prior written consent of Sun Nuclear Corporation is prohibited. Sun Nuclear Corporation reserves the right to make periodic modifications of this product without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revision. This guide is written for: PC software: version 1.3 Firmware: version 1.2.4 PROFILER 2™, Profiler™, IC PROFILER™, SRS PROFILER™, Daily QA3™, and ATLAS QA™ are trademarks of Sun Nuclear Corporation. Other trademarks or trade names are the property of their respective owners. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Sun Nuclear Corporation could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Document 1174011, Rev F, 22 August 2008 Sun Nuclear Corporation 425A Pineda Court Melbourne, Florida 32940-7508 telephone + 1 321-259-6862 fax +1 321-259-7979 e-mail: contactus@sunnuclear.com http://www.sunnuclear.com Sun Nuclear Corporation is an ISO 13485:2003 registered company EMERGO EUROPE Molenstraat 15 2513 BH, The Hague The Netherlands Phone: +31.70.345.8570 Fax: +31.70.346.7299 ii
- 3. Preface This section provides information about the latest PROFILER 2 firmware version (1.2.4), lists the new features in PROFILER 2 software version 1.3, describes the conventions used in the PRO- FILER 2 documentation, and lists safety instructions for using the PROFILER 2. Firmware Version 1.2.4 Firmware version 1.2.4 or higher must be installed on the PROFILER 2 for proper operation with software release 1.3. If firmware version 1.2.4 or higher is not installed on the device, the user is prompted that a firmware update is required to save array calibrations or dose calibrations to flash memory. Firmware version 1.2.4 also allows the software to automatically read device information (such as hardware version, product ID, and serial number) without accessing the device memory directly. The latest PROFILER 2 firmware can be downloaded from the Sun Nuclear Corporation web site, www.sunnuclear.com. See “Installing Firmware” on page 19 for installation instructions. Software Version 1.3 Note: For software version 1.3 to operate properly, new firmware must be installed. See “Firmware Version 1.2.4” . Version 1.3 of PROFILER 2 software adds the following new features: Data Plot View The View panel has a new tab, Data Plot. The Data Plot view provides a visual display of beam analysis parameters over the duration of the measurement. It can be used with saved files or real- time. The plottable options are flatness, beam center, field size, point symmetry, dose per Pulse, pulses/sec, dose rate, reference value, sensor voltage (or distance), and TPR (dose at depth). The Data Plot view is only for multi-frame files, Import Water Tank Measured Files Water tank data can now be imported into the software. The imported data can be displayed, com- pared, and manipulated using any of the PROFILER 2 tools. The supported import filters include Pinnacle (Philips), Mephysto (PTW), and OmniPro (Welhoffer). Smoothing The Control > Smooth Data menu option invokes a gaussian smoothing algorithm which is applied to the data before display/analysis. The extent of the smoothing is selected in the ‘Setup Parameters’ dialog box. This option is disabled by default. Analysis Panel Changes • The analysis panel now provides a horns parameter for photon beams and 90% electron posi- tion parameter for electron beams. The horns parameter shows the percent difference between the left horn and CAX in one panel, and the percent difference between the right horn and CAX in another panel. The 90% electron parameter display shows the outermost position on the left and right of the value which is 90% of the maximum found within the profile. • The Varian acceptance formula for flatness has been added to the flatness options. Preface iii
- 4. Beam Edge Interpolation The default beam edge interpolation method has been improved. This arctangent method is more accurate than the previous linear penumbra interpolation method. The user can still select the lin- ear method in the Setup Parameters, if desired. Invert X and Y-Axes When ‘Invert’ is selected, the X-axis and Y-axis profiles of the selected file are inverted 180 degrees horizontally on the graph. In previous software releases only the Y profile was inverted. Top Plate Field Size Compensation A new option in the Configure Analysis dialog box allows the software to factor in the inherent buildup of the attached device when reporting the measured field size for calculating light/radia- tion field coincidence. If enabled, the software reports the field size at the detector plane; otherwise, it reports the field size at the overlay. Prompt to Resave if Files are Changed The software automatically detects if changes have been made to a file header, array calibration, or dose calibration, and when the user closes the window it prompts the user to “re-save”. Automatically Find Device When the software is launched it automatically searches all ports for an attached device. Zoom Options • A button has been added to the Data toolbar that allows the user to normalize all displayed graphs to physical center and zoom to the 85-110% view. • A new option in the ‘Setup Parameters’ dialog box allows the user to select if zoom will be permitted along the vertical and horizontal scales, or if only the vertical axis should be zoomed and the horizontal axis should remain fixed at the length of the array. File Name Suggestioning When saving data, the software will automatically suggest a file name based on the current date. The user can modify the file name, if desired. Set Energy Quicklist A ‘set energy’ option has been added to the Setup menu. The user can select an energy from the quick list, or choose the option to enter a custom value. The energy can also be selected using the Analysis panel context (right-click) menu. Array Calibration Improvements • The Array Calibration ‘Results’ window now displays a legend to identify the profile for each step of the calibration. • The on-screen array calibration instructions have been modified for clarity. • When calculating calibrated detectors by Field Size, the Array Calibration window displays the selected region with a blue box over the graphical template. • Array calibration files can be saved in a format that is compatible with older versions of ATLAS QA software. Default Mode and Data Type If the first file opened is a single file (*.prs) and it contains a dose calibration factor, the data type will default to Dose; otherwise the default data type is Normalized. If the first file opened is a multi- frame file (*.prm), the mode will default to Inst. Rate; otherwise the default mode is Total Dose. Orientation Offsets when Exporting in SNC ASCII When exporting data in SNC ASCII format, the export dialog now includes an option to apply ori- entation offsets to the data. If this option is selected, the orientation offsets specified in the file header are applied to the detector positions before the data is exported. iv Preface
- 5. User Definable Background Collection Time The background collection time is now user-configurable. The range is from 10 to 600 seconds, and the default is 20 seconds. User Definable Collection Interval The sampling time (time between updates) can now be defined in the Setup Parameters dialog box. There are separate settings for continuous radiation and pulsed radiation. On-Graph Display Toolbar • An On-Graph Display toolbar has been added to the left side of the view panel. This toolbar contains buttons with graphical representations of the axes display options, such as all four axes, primary axes only, diagonal profiles only, or an individual axis. • The On-Graph Display toolbar to the left of the view panel also provides a new drop down menu to select the type of analysis parameter that will be displayed in the Graph view and Data view. The options are: None, Beam Center, Point Values, CAX Point Difference, Local Point Difference, Point Ratio, Varian Point Difference, Area Average, and Area. The options in bold type are new in this software release. • The On-Graph Display toolbar has a Project to 100cm checkbox which adjusts all loaded pro- files to 100 SSD before analysis and display. Conventions Button Name or Entry Bold typeface indicates the following: • A button name (i.e.,”…click the Edit button”), OR • An entry that the user must type (i.e., “Enter the username ADMIN...”), OR • An item for which an entry must be selected and the entry itself (i.e., “...select Photon from the Type list box...” Manual Titles Italicized typeface indicates the title of a manual (i.e., “See the Reference Guide or Online Help...”). Menu Options Bold italicized typeface indicates a menu option (i.e., “...select Setup > Preferences from the menu”). User Messages/Cross References Text within double quotes indicates the following: • A message displayed to the user (i.e., “...the message “Your devices are ready to use” is dis- played in the taskbar.”), OR • A cross referenced subsection in this manual (i.e., “...see “Measurement Buttons” on page...” Window/Dialog Box Names Text within single quotes indicates a window or dialog box name (i.e., “...the ‘Program Prefer- ences’ dialog box is displayed.” Symbols The following symbols are used in this document and in Sun Nuclear Corporation’s product labels. ! WARNING: Possible impact to personal safety. Preface v
- 6. ! CAUTION: Important notation. Note: Important or supporting information. Go To: Provides guidance for which procedure to perform next. Manufacturer’s Identification (name and address). Date of Manufacture. Serial Number. Catalog Number. Consult instructions for use. Authorized representative in the European Community. Operating Information • Read the entire manual before using the product. • Use the product only within normal laboratory conditions maintained for human comfort: 18 to 30° C (64 to 86° F), 20 to 80% relative humidity. • This unit is not to be used as a standard during the calibration of a radiation source. However, the device can be calibrated to read absolute dose using data from a known source. • If the device cannot be calibrated to match the readings of a known standard, return it to the manufacturer for repair. • In this manual, CAUTIONS are used to indicate the possibility of damage to equipment. • Inspect cables periodically for damage. Return damaged cables to Sun Nuclear Corporation for repair or replacement if any mechanical or electrical degradation is suspected. vi Preface
- 7. Safety Instructions Read and follow the following common-sense safety instructions: • Do not use the equipment with any power that does not match the power ratings listed on the power supply. • Do not permit water or any other liquids to spill onto or into the instrument or associated equipment. • Do not permit any short circuit of AC power that may be hazardous to users. • Do not use any power cord or power supply that is damaged or has broken insulation. Replace them immediately. • To protect insulation, never pull on the cable to disconnect the power cord from a wall socket; always grasp the plug. • Do not open or disassemble any device. Access to the inside of the device is for trained per- sonnel only. There are no user-repairable parts inside. Return all devices to the factory for repair. • When connected to AC power, position the device so that the plug is easily disconnected and is not obstructed. Warnings and Cautions CAUTION: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Sun Nuclear Cor- ! poration could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Preface vii
- 8. This page is intentionally left blank. viii Preface
- 9. Contents Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Setting Up the USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Firmware Version 1.2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii USB Drivers for Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Software Version 1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii USB Drivers for Windows XP and 2000 . . . . . . 18 Data Plot View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Verifying Installation of USB Drivers. . . . . . . . . 19 Import Water Tank Measured Files . . . . . . . . . . iii Removing the USB Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Installing Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Analysis Panel Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Setting up the Serial Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Beam Edge Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Launching the Software and Connecting . . . . . . . 20 Invert X and Y-Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Launching Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Top Plate Field Size Compensation . . . . . . . . . . iv Finding the Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Prompt to Resave if Files are Changed . . . . . . . iv Find Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Automatically Find Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv To Select a Specific Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Zoom Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Connecting Multiple Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 File Name Suggestioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Set Energy Quicklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Removing PROFILER 2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Array Calibration Improvements. . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Software Removal (Windows Vista) . . . . . . . . . 21 Default Mode and Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Software Removal (Windows XP) . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Orientation Offsets when Exporting in SNC ASCII Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software . . . . 23 iv Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 User Definable Background Collection Time . . . v Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 User Definable Collection Interval . . . . . . . . . . . v File Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 On-Graph Display Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Import > Planned Dose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Options > Dose Map Orientation . . . . . . . . 27 Button Name or Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v File > Import >Watertank Measured. . . . . . . . 28 Manual Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Select a Profile to Display Dialog Box . . . . . 28 Menu Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v PT Data Offsets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 User Messages/Cross References. . . . . . . . . . . v File > Export > SNC ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Window/Dialog Box Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v File > Export> DQA Measurement . . . . . . . . . 30 Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v File > Export > ADAC ASCII. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Operating Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Edit > Edit Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Editing the File Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Using Default Header Entries . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Section 1. About the Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . 1 Tools > Collect Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Tools > Calibrate Array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Edit SSD and Field Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Array Calibration Dialog Box (During Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 More Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Tools > Calibrate Dose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Parts and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Tools > Download Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Tools > Save Calibration to Flash. . . . . . . . . . . 40 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Tools > Concatenate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Precision Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Setup > Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 End Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Setup > Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Power/Data Interface (P/DI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Setup > Set Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Setup > View Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Finding Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Setup > Electron Wedge Calibration . . . . . . . . 47 Using Online Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Setup > Wedge Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setup > Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Help > About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Section 2. Software Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Toolbar Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Single Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Acquisition Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Multiple Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Display Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 USB Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Dose Calibration Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Array Calibration Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Serial Connection with P/DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Data Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Serial Port Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Contents ix
- 10. Status Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Viewing a Saved Calibration File. . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Movie Player Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Calculating Calibrated Detectors for Small Fields On Graph Display Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 93 Legend Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Selecting Calibrated Detectors By Field Size . . 93 Legend Panel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Selecting Calibrated Detectors By Profile Shape . View Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 93 Graph View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Dose Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Graph View Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Dose Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Saving a Dose Calibration To Flash . . . . . . . . . 96 Graph Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Changing the Dose Calibration Factor . . . . . . . 96 Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Setting Up A Default Dose Calibration . . . . . . . 96 Hiding a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Removing A Dose Calibration Value . . . . . . . . . 96 Normalizing the Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Subtract Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 If Normalization Settings Do Not Match Data Recalibration Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Section 5. Measuring Radiation . . . . . . . . . . 99 On Graph Symmetry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Positioning PROFILER 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Graph View Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Loading Calibration References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Header View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Array Calibration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Copy and Paste Header Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Dose Calibration Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Header View Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Inherent Buildup and Physical Depth . . . . . . . . . 101 Data View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Measuring A Single Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Beam Tuning View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Starting the Profile Measurement . . . . . . . . . 101 Data Plot View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Checking the Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Plot Settings Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Saving the Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Analysis Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Multiple Frame Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Analysis Panel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Collecting Multiple Frame Data . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Changing the Analysis Panel Elements . . . . . . 72 Concatenating Two Measurements . . . . . . . . . . 103 Editing the Analysis Panel Parameters. . . . . . . 73 Concatenation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Edit Field Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Continuous Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Edit Penumbra Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Checking Electron Energy With a Wedge . . . . . . 106 Edit Light Field and SSD Parameters . . . . . 74 Electron Energy Wedge Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Edit Flatness Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Electron Energy Wedge Calibration . . . . . . . . 106 Edit Symmetry Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Collect Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Edit Energy Analysis Parameters. . . . . . . . . 75 Load Electron Energy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Edit Wedge Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 To Add a New Calibration Set . . . . . . . . . . 107 Edit Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . 76 Apply Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Setting the Machine Energy in the Header . . . 77 Taking a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Changing the Analysis Panel Position . . . . . . . 78 Photon Wedge Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Hiding Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Beam Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Drag and Drop Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Section 4. Calibrating the System. . . . . . . . . 81 Using the Beam Tuning Display . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Array Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Data Analysis Using the Data Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Array Calibration Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Background Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Using the Data Plot Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Automatic Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Data Interpretation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Manual Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Section 6. Viewing Files and Printing . . . . . 113 Array Calibration Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Opening and Saving Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Array Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Selecting File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Saving Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Calibration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Duplicating a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Re-Opening a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Step A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Closing a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Step B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Clearing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Step C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Hiding a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Step D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Changing Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Viewing the Array Calibration Results . . . . . . . 88 Comparing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Saving the Array Calibration File. . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Movie Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Saving Array Calibration to Flash Memory . . . . 89 Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Calibration with Saved Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Loading a Saved Calibration File . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 x Contents
- 11. Printing Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Import Filter Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Importing Water Tank Measured Files . . . . . . . . 150 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data. . . . . . 121 Water Tank File Import Procedure . . . . . . . . . 151 Importing Planned Dose Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Import Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 SNC ASCII Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 TPS Dose Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 From Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 About Dose Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 By Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Import Filter - Supported File Types. . . . . . . . 122 DQA3 Measurement Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 About EPIDose Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Pinnacle Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 About DICOM Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Header fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 PROFILER 2 Plan Grid Resolution . . . . . . . . . 122 Data Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Preparing Dose Maps for Import . . . . . . . . . . 123 Wedge and Circular Collimator . . . . . . . . . 155 Exporting 3D Line ERGO++ Files . . . . . . . . . 123 Export Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Exporting AccuKnife AccuSoft XL Files . . . . . 124 Exporting Pinnacle3 (Philips) Files . . . . . . . . . 124 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements . . . . 157 Exporting BrainLAB Brain Scan Files . . . . . . . 127 Assuring Accurate Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Exporting CMS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Focus and XIO files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Reporting Hardware or Software Faults . . . . . 157 Generate a General Dose Plan Export File 127 Calibration Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Generate a Beam Map File Using the Decimal Array Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Calibration Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Exporting Elekta Precise Plan Files . . . . . . . . 129 Theory of Calibration Using Wide Fields . . . . 158 Exporting Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Care Profile Storage And Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Saving a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Exporting MDS Nordion Helax TMS Files . . . 130 PROFILER 2 File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Overly Complex DICOM File Format . . . . . 130 SRS Profiler File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Exporting NOMOS CORVUS Files . . . . . . . . . 131 Profiler 1 File Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Exporting Nucletron Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Analysis of a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Nucletron PLATO File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Field Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Nucletron Oncentra TP File . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Beam Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Exporting PerMedics Odyssey Files . . . . . . . 133 Light/Radiation Field Coincidence . . . . . . . . . 163 Exporting Prowess Panther Files . . . . . . . . . . 134 Penumbra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Exporting Radionics XKnife Files . . . . . . . . . . 134 Flatness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Exporting RAHD Alpha 3D Pro Files. . . . . . . . 136 Flatness Calculation by Variance . . . . . . . . 163 Exporting Siemens KonRad Files . . . . . . . . . . 136 Ratio (IEC) Flatness Calculation . . . . . . . . . 164 Exporting TGM ARTP (Topslane) Files . . . . . . 137 Varian Flatness Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Exporting Varian Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 CadPlan File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 CAX Point Difference Symmetry . . . . . . . . 165 Eclipse File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Local Point Difference Symmetry . . . . . . . 165 Exporting Files in DICOM File Format . . . . . . 138 Point Ratio (Ratio IEC) Symmetry . . . . . . . 165 DICOM CR image file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Varian Point Difference Symmetry. . . . . . . 166 Exporting Files in SunCOM File Format . . . . . 139 Area Average Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 SunCOM File Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Area Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 SunCOM Optional Header Information . . . 140 Horn Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 SunCOM Required Keywords . . . . . . . . . . 140 90% Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Example SunCOM File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Beam Interpolated Flatness and Symmetry . . . . 168 Using the PROFILER 2 Import Filter. . . . . . . . 141 Beam Edge Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Aligning Plan Dose Maps to PROFILER 2 . . . 142 Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Beam Center Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Calculating Calibrated Detectors For Small Fields . . Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 169 Measuring an Equivalent Profile. . . . . . . . . . . 144 Profile Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Import Window Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Percent Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 TPS Import Window Menu Options . . . . . 145 Compare Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 TPS Import Window Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Data Type and Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Inverting Imported Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Check for Dose Map Inversion . . . . . . . . . 147 Normalized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Excluding Import Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Inst Rate and Avg Rate Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Importing a Slice Or Volume File . . . . . . . . . . 148 Concatenated And Double Profiles . . . . . . . . 172 TPS File Import - Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 149 Electron Energy Wedge Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Opening Plan Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Electron Energy Calculated by Slope Analysis 172 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Contents xi
- 12. Electron Energy Calculated by Intercept Analysis . Detector Layout and Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . 182 172 ATLAS QA Test Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Photon Energy Wedge Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Importing a PROFILER 2 Array Calibration File 183 Calculation 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Setting up the Scheme Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Calculation 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Setting Up the Template for Beam Tracking . 185 Calculation 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Calibrating the QA Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Real Time Studies During Accelerator Adjustment . . Measurement with ATLAS QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 174 Preparing for Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Compare in Accelerator QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Section 11. Maintaining Your System. . . . . 191 Fixed Wedge QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Maintaining Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Moving (Dynamic, Virtual) Wedge QA . . . . . . 175 Parts and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 About Profile Acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Radiation Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Section 9. PROFILER 2 Accessories . . . . . . 177 Disposal and Recycling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Isocentric Mounting Fixture (IMF). . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Maintaining Software and Firmware . . . . . . . . . . 191 Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Verify Software Version Number . . . . . . . . . . 191 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Updating Software and Firmware. . . . . . . . . . 192 IMF Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Installing Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Varian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Siemens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Elekta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 PROFILER 2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Minimizing Radiation Damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Contacting Client Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Section 10. Profiler 2 with ATLAS QA . . . . 181 About ATLAS QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 PROFILER 2 Display in ATLAS QA . . . . . . . . . . . 181 xii Contents
- 13. 1 About the Instrument Intended Use The Model 1174 Profiler 2 has two intended uses. Its primary intended use is QA measurement and analysis of the radiation output profile across the beam of an ionizing radiation treatment machine (LINAC or Cobalt 60). Its secondary intended use is the measurement of beam data in radiotherapy departments for dose modeling in the treatment planning computer. ! WARNING: This product is intended to be used under the direction of a quali- fied medical physicist. Description PROFILER 2 measures the radiation intensity along X and Y axes in a beam of ionizing radiation. The instrument is used to test the output of a radiation therapy device such as a linear accelerator (linac). PROFILER 2 is ideal for machine quality assurance, including beam modeling, verification of dose, beam shape measurement, beam steering adjustments, light-field coincidence, electron energy, and measurement of 30 cm dynamic wedges. Figure 1-1. PROFILER 2 instrument for accelerator beam QA The PROFILER 2 has 139 solid-state detectors at 4 mm spacing situated along X and Y axes to allow simultaneous measurement in two perpendicular planes. The Y-array with 83 detectors, has a maximum field of 30 cm at 100 cm SSD. The X-array, with 57 detectors, has a maximum field size of 20 cm at 100 SSD. If necessary, larger field sizes are possible by taking concatenated mea- surements at 100 cm SDD, or by taking a single measurement at a shorter SSD. PROFILER 2 uses the same 25 meter cable as other Sun Nuclear products. The cable connects the PROFILER 2 to a small power supply located outside the linac bunker. A computer is required to communicate with the PROFILER 2 and display the data. Intended Use 1
- 14. The PROFILER 2 software operates in Windows. Both rate and integrated profiles are measured and displayed. The rate profile is a real time update of the beam intensity; each update can be saved for later playback. There is no limit on the beam duration or integration. The data acquisition cycle may be set to be triggered by accelerator pulses such that data is transferred while the beam is off. Features • Simultaneous measurement on both X and Y axes • 4 mm detector spacing • Field sizes up to 20 x 30 cm • Measures each accelerator pulse (dose per pulse) • Trigger detectors that respond to the beam in microseconds • Frame capture (up to 14 frames per second) and play back • Measurement of dynamic wedges up to 30 cm • Real-time measurement - profile and analysis data displayed instantly • Beam tuning display shows dynamic changes in beam characteristics to see immediate results of adjustments to the linac • Data plot display provides a visual representation of the beam characteristics over time • Ability to save profiles to disk • On-screen comparison of saved profiles • Concatenation of two measurements to measure beams as wide as 60 cm • No limit on beam duration or integration • Import water tank measured files and TPS dose maps. • Export measurements to Pinnacle TPS. • Daily software trending using the ATLAS software (optional) • Optional Isocentric Mounting Fixture (IMF) places detectors at center of rotation and allows measurement at all gantry angles Applications Typical uses of the PROFILER 2 may include the following: • Commissioning—Before a TPS can be used to treat a patient, a series of tests must be per- formed to establish the dosimetric properties of the accelerator that the TPS will use to deliver its plan. PROFILER 2 accurately measures dosimetric information that can be exported to a Pinnacle TPS. • Periodic QA measurements—weekly, quarterly, or annual measurements can provide assur- ance that the beam and the MLC are functioning properly. Saved standard measurements can be compared to the periodic measurements to verify the exposure is the same. • IMRT validation—Treatment planning files can be imported and their profiles can be directly compared to the corresponding measured profiles. • Machine adjustment—The PROFILER 2 can be used to verify that adjustments to the equip- ment result in the desired beam shape, alignment, and dose. The machine can be checked and adjusted for flatness, symmetry, penumbra, light-radiation coincidence, and field size on either axis. The 4 mm spacing of PROFILER 2’s detectors lets you see flatness anomalies along the beam. In Beam Tuning view, the results of the adjustment are immediately dis- played, and you can quickly adjust the machine to specifications. More Applications In addition to simple profile measurements, you can use PROFILER 2 for additional applications: • Concatenated measurement—Profiles of large beams, up to 60 x 20 cm, can be graphed by making two separate measurements and concatenating the resulting data, creating a single graph. Using a PROFILER 2, offset the array to capture one half of the beam. Center the cross 2 Section 1. About the Instrument
- 15. hairs on an offset detector location, selected as the pivot point. Then make an exposure. When the data is received, select Concatenate from the menu, rotate the PROFILER 2 180 degrees around the selected offset pivot point, and make a second exposure. The second measurement is concatenated to the first by the software, and the two measurements are displayed as a single graph. • Multiple frame capture—Multiple frame capture is like a taking a “movie.” You collect a regular sequence of profiles over time. • The playback options let you play back the collected profiles at variable speeds, using the frame capture playback bar in the software. • Multiple frame capture lets you study the characteristics of transient events during warm-up, which may be important in IMRT applications. • Continuous radiation—PROFILER 2 measures continuous radiation beams as well as pulsed accelerator beams. This allows you to check machines such as cobalt-60 and certain X-ray sources. • Electron energy verification wedge—The electron energy verification wedge lets you verify electron energy with a wedge phantom. After calibration and exposure, the PC software cal- culates electron energy by slope or intercept analysis. • Photon wedge analysis—Dynamic and virtual wedge routines can be viewed during and after the wedge is formed. The measurement can be viewed, stored, and compared. • Beam data export—Beam data can be exported to a Pinnacle Treatment Planning Computer (TPC) for beam modelling. Parts and Accessories After unpacking, identify the following parts and accessories: 14 15 1 2 3 4 11 10 11 9 8 7 6 5 No. Part Number Qty Description 1 1174300 1 PROFILER 2 assembly 2 741008 1 Power converter, switching, 110-240 VAC, 1-phase, 50-60 Hz to 18 VDC 3 801008 1 Line power cord, IEC Plug to USA style 4 022230 1 Power/Data Interface (P/DI) Figure 1-2. Parts available with the PROFILER 2 Parts and Accessories 3
- 16. No. Part Number Qty Description 5 801038 1 Power/serial data cable, 8-pin DIN, 25 m 6 801037 1 Power/serial data test cable, 8-pin DIN, 1.2 m 7 801032 1 Serial cable, 9-pin D type, 2 m 8 801041 1 USB cable, 2 m 9 1174030 1 Software CD (including PDF copies of documentation) 10 1174350 1 Calibration fixture, clear Lucite 11 1174354 2 Extension rail, calibration fixture 12 1174012 1 Getting Started guide (not shown) 13 117081 - Electron energy verification wedge, aluminum (optional) (not shown) 14 1174101 1 Build-up plate, Virtual Water, 1 x 30 x 35 cm 15 1174102 1 Build-up plate, Virtual Water, 2 x 30 x 35 cm 16 1174103 - Build-up plate, Virtual Water, 5 cm thick (optional) (not shown) 17 1175000-1 - Isocentric mounting fixture (specify linac manufacturer when ordering) (optional) (not shown) 18 1174000-5 - Case, carrying (optional) (not shown) Figure 1-2. Parts available with the PROFILER 2 The optional buildup plates (numbers 14 & 15 in the above table) may be required if you calibrate at higher energies. Setup Overview The PROFILER 2 is quick and easy to use. To make a beam measurement, place the PROFILER 2 instrument on the treatment table and connect it to the computer. Then expose it to the beam. As PROFILER 2 is exposed to radiation, the software instantly displays the acquired dose on the monitor. • In the treatment room, place the PROFILER 2 on the couch aligned to the lasers and directly under the accelerator beam. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the electronics, do not directly irradiate the electron- ! ics section (raised area) of the instrument. • Connect the instrument to the P/DI unit in the control room with the 25-meter power/data cable (threaded permanently through the cable tray or temporarily under the door). • In the control room, install the PROFILER 2 software on a Windows computer. • Connect the P/DI power supply to the power outlet and then to the P/DI unit. • Connect the P/DI to the computer using a USB or serial cable. See “USB Connection” on page 14 or “Serial Connection” on page 14. • Launch the software and initiate communication with the instrument. See “Launching the Software and Connecting” on page 20. • Perform array and dose calibrations (if not already done). See “Calibrating the System” on page 81. • Collect a measurement. See “Measuring Radiation” on page 99. As dose is being delivered, radiation profiles are displayed graphically and numerically. • Review results, analyze measurements, compare exposures, and save files for later use. 4 Section 1. About the Instrument
- 17. Control Room Treatment Room Figure 1-3. Using PROFILER 2 Construction The instrument consists of a single flat housing with the detector arrays at one end and the elec- tronics section at the other end. • Array Section—The array section shows the location of the detectors mounted on the under- lying circuit board as well as field size marks for proper alignment. The array detectors, shown by small black dots, are spaced 4 mm apart. A precision alignment template is attached to the top of the array section. • Electronics Section—The analog and digital electronics are located inside the raised cover at one end of the instrument, below the line indicated with the text “KEEP THE DIRECT BEAM ABOVE THIS LINE. EXPOSURE MAY VOID WARRANTY.” The electronic components can be damaged by radiation if exposed to the direct beam.1 CAUTION: Keep the electronics section out of the direct beam. Do not allow the direct ! beam to fall outside of the detector area or you could damage the instrument. Pro- longed exposure of the electronics to direct radiation could void your warranty! 1. This device contains optichromic radiation dosimeters in the electronics area. To maintain warranty, direct irradiation to the electronics must be avoided. The dosimeters will be read if this device is returned for service. An indication of direct irradiation to the electronics will VOID the warranty. Construction 5
- 18. Precision Template The PROFILER 2 precision alignment template is shown below. Last detector in Y-axis array (83) Alignment grid Common center detector (Y=42, X=29) First detector in X-axis array (01) Last detector in X-axis array (57) Array section Build-up alignment hole First detector in Y-axis array (01) Bubble level Electronics section Figure 1-4. Detector Locations and Geometry • Alignment grid—The black rectangular alignment grids are for aligning the PROFILER 2 with the cross hairs and light field of the accelerator. Grids are provided for 10 x 10, 15 x 15, 20 x 20, and 20 x 30 cm. • Detector location marks—The small black dots show the physical location of the detectors in the X-Y plane. Each dot has a number which corresponds to the detector number in the display. • Alignment holes—There are two alignment holes in the bottom portion of the white area which provide key alignment for build-up plates. The build-up plates have matching pegs that fit into the holes. • Bubble level—A bubble level, mounted in the top surface, is used with the leveling feet on the bottom of the PROFILER 2 to adjust the array perpendicular to the beam axis. 6 Section 1. About the Instrument
- 19. End Panel The PROFILER 2 end panel has the following connectors and LEDs: Figure 1-5. End Panel Connections and Indicators • REF—Reference detector for future application. • PWR/DATA—Power input from the PROFILER 2 power supply and input/output of serial data. • A, B, C, D—LED status lights for troubleshooting by Sun Nuclear technicians. See “Trouble- shooting” on page 193. Power/Data Interface (P/DI) The P/DI (Figure 1-6) routes power to the instrument and translates communications between the instrument and a personal computer. An external power converter automatically adapts to any power source within the range of 100-240 VAC, 1 phase, 47-63 Hz. With the P/DI, two types of computer connection are possible: USB (Universal Serial Bus) and serial. Each type of connection takes a different cable. Both types of cables are shipped with PRO- FILER 2. Figure 1-6. Power/Data Interface (P/DI) End Panel 7
- 20. Cables The following cables are supplied: • Power cord—a standard 3-wire, grounded power cord; connects to wall socket. • Power/Data cable—25-meter round cable with two 8-pin DIN connectors. Connects the PRO- FILER 2 to the P/DI. The cable carries both power and data between the PROFILER 2 and the P/DI. The connector pins are 1:1 and may be connected to the PROFILER 2 and P/DI with either end. (A similar 1.2-meter cable is used as a test cable.) • Power converter—connects the power cord to the P/DI (power/data interface) located in the control room. Supplies 18 VDC to the P/DI. • USB cable—a standard Universal Serial Bus cable to connect the P/DI to your computer. • Serial cable—a standard PC serial cable (RS-232) with M/F, 9-pin D-connectors to connect the P/DI to your computer. Finding Additional Information The following information about PROFILER 2 is available: • Tool Tip Hints—If the cursor hovers over a button or a function tab, a message appears in an adjacent pop-up window. For example, if you hover the cursor over the controls on the toolbar, little windows appear that contain the name of the button or function. • Tip of the Day—The Tip of the Day box provides helpful tips and describes useful features to help you learn more about the instrument. The Tip of the Day box opens automatically when the program is launched (if enabled) or it can be opened from the Help menu. Click the arrow buttons to scroll through the tips. • Quick Start Guide—a single page document distributed with each new PROFILER 2. This doc- ument provides abbreviated instructions to help you set up the device quickly and easily. • User’s Guide —the brief, printed document distributed with each new PROFILER 2. This doc- ument is a shortened version of the Reference Guide. • Reference Guide—an electronic document (PDF) that is available on the distribution CD and the SNC web site, www.sunnuclear.com. The Reference Guide contains detailed information about PROFILER 2 including reference data, step-by-step operating procedures, and details of calculations. Using Acrobat Reader (www.adobe.com), you can open, view, and print the Reference Guide. When viewing the Reference Guide on your monitor, use hyperlinks to jump from the table of contents, index, cross-reference, or Acrobat bookmark directly to a topic. • Online Help—Windows Help that is available on the menu bar when the PROFILER 2 software is running. The Online Help contains most of the same information included in the Reference Guide. Using Online Help To get detailed help information, click Help > Contents on the menu. The Online Help opens in a viewer (Figure 1-7). Figure 1-7. Online Help 8 Section 1. About the Instrument
- 21. The left part of the window consists of four panes: Contents, Index, Search, and Favorites. Top- ics are organized sequentially in the Contents or alphabetically in the Index. You can also perform a full-text search and mark topics you use in Favorites. Double-clicking any item in the table of contents, alphabetical index, and search results will dis- play the topic you selected in the right side of the window. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the topic to advance to the next topic or return to the previous one. Click the hyperlinked (under- lined) text to jump to a related topic. Click the Back button on the toolbar to return to the start of the jump. Specifications Table 1-1. PROFILER 2 Specifications Category Characteristic PROFILER 2 Model 1174 Detector Array Quantity of detectors 139 solid state detectors Detector type Radiation-hardened silicon diodes Detector spacing 4 mm Array width, X axis 22.4 cm, 57 detectors Array height, Y axis 32.8 cm, 83 detectors Center detector The center detector is common to both X and Y axes Inherent buildup Water equivalent plastic, 1.00 cm Total buildup to detector 1.00 ± 0.1 g/cm2 junction Inherent backscatter Acrylic or polycarbonate,1.8 cm Buildup plates Water-equivalent plastic, 1, 2 (supplied), and 5 cm thick (optional) Radiation measured • Electrons, 6 MeV to 25 MeV • Photons, Co-60 to 25 MV Beam limits Maximum dose per pulse: 7 cGy/number of pulses/10 ms period Maximum pulse 600 pulses per second repetition Alignment Light field alignment 10x10 cm, 15x15 cm, 20x20 cm, 20x30 cm template Tolerance marks ± 2 mm at the light field corners Cross hair rotation 2 mm diameter circle at the center of light field boxes Array detectors Identified by number and located by black dot Detector location Actual detector position on pc board aligned within 0.25 mm of light field boxes Measurement Simultaneous detector Dedicated MOSFET operational amplifier, low leakage, low electronics measurement input offset bias Amplifier feedback Capacitor Trigger detectors One below each detector. Array acquisition time 1.7 milliseconds Array acquisition 15 per second frequency Automatic offset Net charge per pulse compensation Capacitor Reset FET switch Analog to digital four, bi-polar, 16 bit converters Gain selection Binary: 1, 2, 4, 8 (4 is default) Calibration Correction factors Relative correction factors for each array detector stored in PC calibration files. Array calibration Array is factory calibrated using patented wide field calibration, US Pat# 6,125,335. Absolute dose calibration Absolute dose calibration of center detector using PC algorithm Energies Electron beam energies can be calibrated with the electron wedge accessory and the calibrations can be stored in the software. Specifications 9
- 22. Table 1-1. PROFILER 2 Specifications (Continued) Category Characteristic PROFILER 2 Model 1174 Construction Circuit board Single circuit board for high reliability; mounted between water- equivalent plastic on top and acrylic or polycarbonate base, which provides an EMI shield Dimensions 25.6 x 52.0 x 6.0 cm (10.0 x 20.5 x 2.4 in.) Weight 5 kg (11 lb.) Top Durable alignment template Leveling Planar bubble level with three adjustment feet Buildup • 1 x 30 x 35.2 cm Virtual Water • 2 x 30 x 35.2 cm Virtual Water • 5 x 30 x 35 2.cm Virtual Water (optional) Connections and POWER/DATA 8 pin DIN, provides power to PROFILER 2 and bi-directional Accessory Ports serial data between PC and PROFILER 2 LED’s A, B, C, D: Status indicators EXT REF LEMO connector for external reference detector. Cables POWER/DATA 8-pin DIN, 25 m, connects PROFILER 2 to P/DI Serial 9-pin D, M/F, 2 m, connects P/DI to computer USB 4-pin A and B plugs, 2 m, connects P/DI to computer Power cord IEC straight plug line cord, 3 conductor, 2 m P/DI (Power/Data Voltage input + 18 VDC from power converter Interface) Voltage output + 18 VDC to PROFILER 2 via 8-pin DIN connector Data communication Bidirectional between PROFILER 2 and PC Indicator LEDs Power, Tx, Rx Connectors • 9-pin serial to PC • USB to PC • 5-mm socket for +18 VDC input • 8 pin DIN Size 7.0 x 12.3 x 3.5 cm (2.8 x 4.8 x 1.4 in) Weight 0.20 kg (0.44 lb.) Power Converter Converter type Switching, general purpose IEC 320, Class I power inlet for straight cable entry Supply voltage range 100 to 240 VAC, automatically switching; 48-62 Hz (mains) DC power output +18 VDC, 20 watts System Computer minimum Minimum: Pentium III, 128 MB RAM, 4 MB VGA video card requirements requirements capable of at least 1024 x 768 (16 MB video RAM recom- mended), minimum 16-bit color depth, free serial or USB port, 20 MB of free hard disk space available. Operating system Windows Vista (32-bit), XP (32-bit), and 2000 Environment Operating Normal laboratory conditions maintained for human comfort • 18 to 30° C (64 to 86° F) • 20 to 80% relative humidity Storage • –30 to 50° C (–22 to 122° F) • 10 to 90% relative humidity, non-condensing Firmware Operates from flash memory. Updates to firmware may be downloaded from PC when available. 10 Section 1. About the Instrument
- 23. Table 1-1. PROFILER 2 Specifications (Continued) Category Characteristic PROFILER 2 Model 1174 PC Software Distribution CD or download from web site Display format 3-panel display, simultaneously showing • Legend—list of currently open files • Data—graph, header data, numerical dose values, real-time beam tuning, or real-time data plots. • Analysis—calculated beam analysis values for selected file Data View Options Five data viewing options; selectable by tab: • Graph view—Displays profile graphs. • Header view—Displays header information for open files. • Data view—Provides a tabular data display (numerical val- ues). • Beam view—Displays real-time, immediate results of beam tuning adjustments. • Data Plot view—Provides a visual representation of beam analysis parameters over the duration of the measurement for detailed analysis. Can be used with saved files or real- time. See also “View Panel” on page 57. Profile Display (Graph • 2 panel—display profiles of both X and Y axes View) • 1 panel—display either X or Y axis. Files Opens and displays up to 10 files including files measured by the Profiler classic and Profiler 1. Analysis Values calculated using selectable definitions of parameter analysis • Flatness • Symmetry (point and area) • Output (units of cGy, dose and rate) • Field size • Beam center • Light/radiation field coincidence • Penumbra • Beam stabilization time • Dose per pulse • Photon energy • Electron energy • PDD (with water buildup reservoir accessory assuming feasi- bility) • Wedge angle analysis (fixed or dynamic) Calibration • Wide field calibration utility for array correction to common center detector • Dose calibration of center detector Rate/dose Measures inst. rate, avg rate, or total dose in terms of corrected counts, dose, or normalized values. Reports Produces detailed printed or PDF reports for all files. Data export • Export to SNC ASCII—Export of all files to clipboard (text for- mat) or spreadsheet • Export measurements from detectors in the equivalent loca- tion of Daily QA3 detectors. • Export to planning system—Exports beam dosimetry data to a Pinnacle planning system for beam modeling Data Import Treatment planning system files and water tank files can be imported. File Open PROFILER 2 files Imports, displays, and compares three types of PROFILER 2 files: single-frame file, multiple-frame file (movie), and concate- nated file. IC PROFILER files Imports, displays, and compares three types of IC PROFILER files: single-frame file, multiple-frame file (movie), and concate- nated file. Profiler1 files Imports, displays, and compares all original Profiler file formats except 3D Specifications 11
- 24. Table 1-1. PROFILER 2 Specifications (Continued) Category Characteristic PROFILER 2 Model 1174 File Import Water tank measured Supports the following: Pinnacle files (*.dat); Mephysto files files (*.exp); or OmniPro files (*.asc). Treatment planning sys- Imports, displays, and compares data from the following treat- tem dose maps ment planning systems: • 3Dline Ergo • AccuKnife: AccuSoft XL • Philips: Pinnacle3 • Brain Lab: Brain Scan • CMS: FOCUS or XIO • DICOM: RTDOSE, EPID (RTIMAGE), or CR (RTIMAGE) • Elekta: Precise Plan • EPIDose • MAPcalc • Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Care • MDS Nordion Helax TMS • Nomos: CORVUS • Nucletron: PLATO and OnCentra • PerMedics: Odyssey • Prowess: Panther • Radionics XKnife • RAHD: Alpha 3D Pro • Siemens: KonRad • TGM ARTP • TomoTherapy Hi Art • Varian: CadPlan and Eclipse • SunCOM Also allows import of Film. TPS Import rotation and Imported treatment planning system files can be rotated and offset offset to display off-axis profiles. Comparative measured pro- files of plans can be made by exposing PROFILER 2 with the same rotation and offset to planned dose. 12 Section 1. About the Instrument
- 25. 2 Software Setup Overview The PROFILER 2 application software collects the instrument measurements and displays graphs of the radiation measured by the detectors. The software is available on the CD that is furnished with the PROFILER 2, or it can be downloaded from the Sun Nuclear web site (http:// www.sunnuclear.com). Single Installation 1 Place the CD in the drive of the computer. A copyright notice screen appears. 2 Read the notice. If you agree, click Accept. A menu (Figure 2-1) appears. Figure 2-1. Installation Menu 3 On the menu, click Software. 4 Follow the on-screen directions to complete the installation. The program icon will appear on the desktop. 5 Click Exit to close the installation menu. Multiple Installations Only one copy of the PROFILER 2 Windows software is required per computer, regardless of the number of PROFILER 2s being used with that computer. If you are using two or more PROFILER 2s with the computer, the software keeps the calibration and data files separate for each PRO- FILER 2. When connecting to a PROFILER 2, the software identifies the serial number of the connected PROFILER 2 and creates a unique serial number directory for each PROFILER 2 instrument. During measurement, the setup template includes the serial number, which is validated against the PRO- FILER 2 instrument communicating data to the PC. Overview 13
- 26. If you have two or more computers, you are permitted to install the PROFILER 2 software on each one. USB Connection 1 Connect the cables as shown. Note: Do not plug the USB cable into the PC until after the software is installed. Figure 2-2. Typical USB Port Connection 2 Plug the power converter cord into a 110 to 240 VAC, 1-phase, 50-60 Hz power source. Note: If using the USB port and Windows Vista, XP, or 2000, Windows should detect the USB port automatically and install the drivers. For more information, see “Setting Up the USB Port” below. Serial Connection Serial Connection with P/DI 1 Connect the serial cable between the PC’s serial port and the COM port on the P/DI (Figure 2-3). 2 Connect the instrument to the P/DI with the power/data cable. 3 Plug the power converter into an outlet with 110 to 240 VAC, single phase, 50-60 Hz. 4 Connect the power converter to the P/DI. 14 Section 2. Software Setup
- 27. Figure 2-3. Typical Serial Port Connection Serial Port Alternatives If you want to use a serial connection and your computer does not have a serial port, several alter- native methods may allow you to connect to the instrument. You can obtain the necessary equipment from computer stores, catalogs, and on-line merchants. • Serial port card—If your computer is a desktop, you may be able to install a serial port card in an empty PCI slot. • PCMCIA card to serial port adapter—if your computer is a laptop, you may be able to install a PCMCIA card to serial port adapter in the card slot. To use these adapters, follow the manufacturer’s instructions and observe the following steps: 1 Set up the adapter per manufacturer’s instruction. 2 In the setup, identify the serial port as COM 1 through COM 10 (higher numbers are not supported). 3 Connect the serial cable between the PROFILER 2 and the serial port adapter. 4 Power up normally. Setting Up the USB Port USB Drivers for Windows Vista The following procedure is for Windows Vista. If you are using a different operating system see “USB Drivers for Windows XP and 2000” on page 18. 1 With PROFILER 2 software installed (but not launched) and the PROFILER 2 instrument con- nected and powered up, plug the USB cable into the control room computer. If you previously installed the drivers for this or another Sun Nuclear product, skip to Step 11 below. 2 If you are installing the drivers for the first time, the ‘Found New Hardware Wizard’ opens (Fig- ure 2-4). The wizard displays three option buttons: Locate and install driver software (recommended), Ask me again later, or Don’t show this message again for the device. Setting Up the USB Port 15
- 28. Figure 2-4. ‘Found New Hardware’ Wizard 3 Click the Locate and install driver software (recommended) button. 4 If Windows requests permission to continue, click Continue. • If your computer is connected to the Internet and the Windows Automatic Update feature is turned ON, Windows searches for drivers on the Internet, and installs them (if it finds them). Then skip to Step 11 below. • If Windows does not find the drivers on the Internet, or your computer is not connected to the Internet, or the Windows Automatic Update feature is turned off, continue with Step 5 below. ! CAUTION: There are TWO USB drivers to be installed. Install the first driver, then repeat the procedure for the second driver. See Step 10 below. 5 If the ‘Insert the disc…’ dialog box opens, click the I don’t have the disc. Show me other options. button (Figure 2-5). Figure 2-5. Click “I don’t have the disc, Show me other options.” 6 If the ‘Window couldn’t find driver software for your device’ dialog box is displayed, click the Browse my computer for driver software (advanced) button (Figure 2-6). 16 Section 2. Software Setup
- 29. Figure 2-6. Click ‘Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)’ 7 In the ‘Browse for driver software on your computer’ dialog box, select C:SNCPROFILER2USBDRIVER_PDI2 (or browse the files to find the driver) and check the Include subfolders check box (Figure 2-7). Figure 2-7. Select Driver Location Note: The two drivers were placed in the directory on your hard drive when you installed the PROFILER 2 software. 8 Click Next to install the driver. When the driver is installed, the dialog box displays the mes- sage “The software for this device has been successfully installed” (Figure 2-8). Setting Up the USB Port 17
- 30. Figure 2-8. Software Successfully Installed 9 Click the Close button. CAUTION: Be sure to install the second driver to make sure you can connect to the ! USB port. 10 The ‘Found New Hardware’ wizard opens again (there is another driver to install). Repeat the steps above to install the second driver. 11 When both drivers are installed, a pop-up flag on the task bar will say “Your devices are ready to use” (Figure 2-9). This completes installation of the drivers. Figure 2-9. Your devices are ready to use 12 Proceed to “Launching the Software and Connecting” on page 20. USB Drivers for Windows XP and 2000 Installation for Windows XP and 2000 is similar to Vista, except that the screens have a slightly different appearance, and you may have to manually enter the location of the drivers. Drivers are located in the following directory: • C:Program FilesSNCPROFILER2USBDriver_PDI2 Note: Select the “Include this location in the search” drop down list in the Found New Hardware Wizard to find the location of the drivers. 18 Section 2. Software Setup
- 31. Verifying Installation of USB Drivers To verify the USB drivers were installed properly, navigate to the Device Manager: • Vista - Control Panel > System and Maintenance > System > Device Manager • XP - Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device Manager > View > Devices by type In the Device Manager window, expand the Ports (COM/LPT) to show ‘USB Serial Port (COM n)’ where n is the port number assigned (Figure 2-10). Figure 2-10. USB Serial Port Listing in Device Manager Note: If the USB Serial port is listed under ‘Other Devices’ instead of under ‘Ports’ the drivers were not properly installed. If this occurs, you can do one of the following to fix the drivers. A) Remove the drivers as described in “Removing the USB Drivers” on page 19, then reload the drivers as described in “Setting Up the USB Port” on page 15, or B) Double-click on the failed USB serial device (the one under ‘Other Devices’), click on the ‘Driver’ tab, then click the Update Driver button and follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the USB Drivers Perform the following steps to remove the USB drivers: Vista 1 Click Start > Settings> Control Panel then double-click Programs. 2 In the next group of icons/options, select Installed Programs 3 In the list of installed programs, select FTDI USB Serial Converter Drivers then select File > Change/Remove. XP 1 Click Start > Settings> Control Panel then double-click Add/Remove Programs 2 In the Add/Remove Programs dialog box, select FTDI USB Serial Converter Drivers and click Change/Remove. Installing Firmware Firmware version 1.2.4 or higher must be installed on the PROFILER 2 for proper operation with software release 1.3. If firmware version 1.2.4 or higher is not installed on the device, the user is prompted that a firmware update is required to save array calibrations or dose calibrations to flash memory. To check the firmware on the instrument, select the Help > About menu option. A dialog box is displayed, and the Firmware Revision is displayed in the second line in the dialog box. Installing Firmware 19
- 32. If the firmware needs to be updated, select the Tools > Download Code menu option and follow the on-screen instructions. See “Installing Firmware” on page 192. Setting up the Serial Port Serial port setup is automatic, unless there is a hardware conflict. The PROFILER 2 software auto- matically connects to COM 1 when you launch the software. Sometimes the software does not detect the PROFILER 2 automatically. Then you may have to ‘find’ or select a specific serial port. Note: If any other SNC devices are connected to a serial port on this computer (for instance, an IVD system) make sure that the only SNC application running on this com- puter is the PROFILER 2 application software. Launching the Software and Connecting Launching Software 1 Launch the PROFILER 2 application software by double-clicking the PROFILER 2 desktop icon or clicking Start > Programs > SNC Group > PROFILER > PROFILER 2. 2 The software will automatically search for the attached device. When the device is found the software begins a background measurement. Note: The program automatically creates two folders: “Data” folder for measurement files and “Factors” folder for array calibration files. When a device is connected, the program also creates sub-folders under “Factors” named with the serial number of the device. • If the software does not automatically locate the device, a warning message appears. Click OK to continue, then proceed to the ‘Finding the Port’ procedure. Finding the Port When the software is launched it will scan through all the available ports and find the connected instrument automatically. However, if other devices are installed that also use the ports, conflicting device assignments may occur, and you may have to manually assign the COM port number. The computer sees both USB and serial connections as “COM” ports. (The USB port is actually an embedded USB-to-serial port.) Internally, serial ports are identified as COM 1, COM 2, up to COM 10. PROFILER 2 automatically assigns the correct COM port. Typically, the instrument will be assigned to COM 1. See also “Setup > Serial Port” on page 49. Find Device 1 Select Setup > Find Device on the menu. The software scans through all the available ports and find the connected instrument. If an instrument is not found, a dialog box is displayed. To Select a Specific Port Sometimes you may want to connect to the instrument on a specific COM port. If so, set the port as follows: 1 Select Setup > Serial Port on the menu. The ‘Select Port’ dialog box opens. 2 Click the Available Ports pull-down list to see what COM ports are available. 3 Pick the port you want from the pull-down list and click Save. 20 Section 2. Software Setup
- 33. Connecting Multiple Instruments When the software is launched it scans through all the available ports and find the connected instrument automatically. However, if you use multiple instruments with one computer (for exam- ple, a PROFILER 2, a MapCHECK, and a Daily QA 3), note that the scan will only look for the first instrument with which it can communicate. Ensure that the PROFILER 2 is the only connected instrument when using the PROFILER 2 software. Shutdown There is no on/off switch on the PROFILER 2. To shut down the system, save any unsaved files, and close the software application by selecting File > Exit or click the X box in the upper right corner. Then unplug the system components. Although it is not necessary to shut down the system (you can leave it on continuously), note that you should close the software before disconnecting the PROFILER 2. Also note that the automatic background is only taken when the software is launched. If you leave the software on, you should take a manual background reading at the beginning of every day that you use the system. Always close the software before switching to a different PROFILER 2. This will permit the soft- ware to read the serial number when the software is launched, and help prevent using the wrong calibration files. ! CAUTION: Do not store PROFILER 2 where the electronics can be accidentally irradi- ated by the direct beam. Removing PROFILER 2 Software PROFILER 2 software can be uninstalled via the Windows Control Panel options. Perform the fol- lowing steps to uninstall the software: Note: Uninstalling the software removes all of the PROFILER 2 program files, but it does not remove the Data files. Software Removal (Windows Vista) 1 Click Start > Settings> Control Panel then double-click Programs. 2 In the next group of icons/options, select Installed Programs 3 In the list of installed programs, select PROFILER2 then select File > Change/Remove. Software Removal (Windows XP) 1 Click Start > Settings> Control Panel then double-click Add/Remove Programs 2 In the Add/Remove Programs dialog box, select PROFILER2 and click Change/Remove. Connecting Multiple Instruments 21
- 34. This page is intentionally left blank. 22 Section 2. Software Setup
- 35. 3 About PROFILER 2 Software This section contains detailed explanations of menus, toolbars, and dialog boxes. The information is provided for reference during use or if additional details are needed for planning or understand- ing operation of the equipment. Graphical User Interface The PROFILER 2 software is designed to be as intuitive as possible. The Main view contains stan- dard Windows elements, such as a menu bar and toolbars, as well as a legend panel, a view panel, and an analysis panel (Figure 3-1). Everything is visible on the screen at the same time. Menu bar Toolbars Status Bar Display Tools Legend panel Context (right- click) menu View panel Analysis panel Figure 3-1. Main Window, Profile Measurement View Note: For best results, set your computer screen resolution to 1024 x 768 pixels or higher. • For details about the Menu options, see “Menu Options” on page 24. • For details about the Context menus, see “Context Menus” on page 50. • For details about the Toolbar options, see “Toolbar Area” on page 51. • For details about the Legend panel, see “Legend Panel” on page 55. • For details about the View panel, see “View Panel” on page 57. • For details about the Analysis panel, see “Analysis Panel” on page 70. Graphical User Interface 23
- 36. Menu Options The Menu bar (Figure 3-2) provides menus and submenus of commands. If a menu or submenu item is not available, it is either hidden from the menu or the option is dimmed (not selectable). Use the Menu commands for installation, setup, and calibration. Frequently used commands are duplicated with buttons on the toolbar. A list of menu options is provided in the table below. Menu Group Command Command Action File Open Opens a dialog box to select a saved file to open. See also “Opening and Saving Files” on page 113. Re-open Allows user to select a file to open from a list of recently used files. Import • Planned Dose—Allows the user to import patient treatment data files. • Watertank Measured—Allows the user to import water tank scan files. See also “Importing/Exporting Data” on page 121. Export • SNC ASCII—Allows the user to export data in tab-delimited SNC ASCII format for off-line analysis. • DQA Measurement—Displays the interpolated values at the detectors in the Daily QA Check 3 primary positions as taken from the currently selected file. • ADAC ASCII—Allows the user to export beam modelling data in Pinna- cle full ASCII file format. The data can be imported directly into a Pinna- cle TPS. See also “Importing/Exporting Data” on page 121. Close Closes the selected file. This menu item is not visible if the selected file is the Device file. Close All Close all of the open files except for the Device file. Save As... Launches a standard file ‘Save As’ dialog box. See also “Opening and Sav- ing Files” on page 113. Print... • Single—Launches the print single dialog box. • Overlay—Launches the print overlay dialog box. • Comparison—Launches the print comparison dialog box. This option is only active when profiles are being compared. See also “Reports” on page 117. Exit Exits the program. Edit Edit Header Opens the Profile Header Information dialog box for the currently selected file so you can edit the header. See also “Edit > Edit Header” on page 32. Profile Selection Shows the water tank profile selection dialog box. This menu item is only available when a water tank file is selected. See also “Importing Water Tank Measured Files” on page 150. Data Offsets Shows the water tank data offsets dialog box. This menu option is only available when a water tank file is selected. See also “PT Data Offsets Dia- log Box” on page 29. Copy In Graph view, copies the currently selected file into the Windows clip- board in export format with default options. In Header or Data views, copies selected cells to clipboard in tab delimited format. Figure 3-2. Menu Bar Commands 24 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 37. Menu Group Command Command Action Control Start Starts profile data collection. Stop Stops profile data collection. Beam is Pulsed If this option is selected (there is a checkmark beside it), the accelerator uses pulsed radiation. If this option is not checked, the machine uses con- tinuous radiation (e.g. Co-60 and X-ray). Invert Flips the X and Y-axis profiles of the selected file 180 degrees horizontally. Menu label is checked if Invert is on. Subtract Toggles the use of the “background” values for all open profiles; checked Background when background offset is subtracted. Smooth data When checked, this selection invokes a gaussian smoothing algorithm which is applied to the data before display/analysis. The extent of the smoothing is selected in the Setup Parameters dialog box. Capture Multi- Selecting this option enables the software to capture multiple frames over Frame time and play them back using the “movie” toolbar. This menu item is selected when checked. Plot Device Data If this option is on (checked) live device data is plotted in the Data Plot view. The user has the option of turning this option off because it can con- sume memory. When this option is off (unchecked), no data is plotted in the Data Plot view. Tools Collect Initiates background collection routine. See also “Manual Background” on Background page 82. Calibrate Array Opens the array calibration dialog box. See also “Array Calibration” on page 81. Calibrate Dose Opens the absolute dose calibration dialog box. See also “Dose Calibra- tion” on page 94. Download Code Launches the dialog box to download new firmware code. See also “Installing Firmware” on page 192. Save Calibration Saves the current array calibration file to non-volatile, flash memory in the to Flash PROFILER 2. This allows array calibration files to be transported with the PROFILER 2 for use on another computer. Up to 10 calibration files can be saved in memory. See “Tools > Save Calibration to Flash” or “Saving Array Calibration to Flash Memory” for more details. Concatenate Enables two measurements to be concatenated to produce a single wide field measurement. This menu item is selected when there is a checkmark beside it. See also “Concatenating Two Measurements” on page 103. MLC QA Launches the MLC QA Wizard to guide you through performing QA on your MLC device. This feature is not enabled in the current software release. XY Table Used to control a MotionSim XY/4D table. This feature is not enabled in the current software release. Pump Control Used to control the pump of a Sun Nuclear Water Tank accessory. This fea- ture is not enabled in the current software release. Setup Parameters Opens the Setup Parameters dialog box to allow selection of basic pro- gram setup parameters. See also “Setup > Parameters” on page 42. Analysis Opens the Configure Analysis dialog box to change setup for analysis cal- culations. See also “Setup > Analysis” on page 43. Load Calibration Displays a file open dialog box and attempts to load the selected array cal- File ibration file into the currently loaded measurement file. See also “Loading a Saved Calibration File” on page 91. View Calibration Displays the data from the selected array calibration file in graph form. This menu item is dimmed if an array calibration has not been performed, or if an array calibration file is loaded using the Load Calibration File option. See also “Viewing a Saved Calibration File” on page 92. Electron Wedge Launches the electron wedge calibration dialog box. See also “Setup > Calibration Electron Wedge Calibration” on page 47. Wedge This dialog box is used to specify Percent Depth Dose (PDD) data for a Configuration photon wedge. See also “Setup > Wedge Configuration” on page 48. Serial Port Opens the Select Port dialog box to manually select a serial port. See also “Setup > Serial Port” on page 49. Find Device Searches all available serial ports to find the connected PROFILER 2. See also “Finding the Port” on page 20. Help Profiler Advanced Provides detailed information about the PROFILER 2. Help Tip of the Day Shows or hides the Tip of the Day feature. About Shows PROFILER 2 software version, firmware version, serial number, and device type. Figure 3-2. Menu Bar Commands (Continued) Menu Options 25
- 38. File Menu Options Import > Planned Dose Selecting File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu displays the ‘Planning System Import’ window. This menu option allows the user to import dose maps from treatment plans for quality assurance comparison. A special import filter allows data from many commercial treatment plan- ning systems (TPS) to be imported. Once imported, the plan data appears in the window (Figure 3-3) where it can be viewed and manipulated. The PROFILER 2 overlay can be positioned on it, and the corresponding dose values can be saved into one of the currently loaded files. See also “Importing/Exporting Data” on page 121. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 7 6 21 5 22 4 3 23 2 1 Item Description 1 Detector numbers (white) 2 Display area - shows imported 2 dimensional planned dose map. 3 Centimeter scale. 4 Close this dialog—closes the import function. 5 Toggle Visibility of the dose grid—toggles display of numerical values of dose map. 6 Select Planning System File to import—opens a dialog box to select the file to import. The file type options are: Pinnacle3, Brain Lab Brain Scan, CMS FOCUS, Elekta Precise Plan, Memorial Sloan Ket- tering Cancer Care, MDS Nordion Helax TMS, NOMOS CORVUS (Peacock), Nucletron PLATO, RAHD Alpha 3D/Pro, Prowess Panther, Varian CAD, Varian Eclipse, CMS Xio, DICOM RTDOSE, Nucletron Oncentra TP SunCOM, Film, Siemens KonRad, 3Dline Ergo, , PerMedics Odyssey, Radionics XKnife, TomoTherapy Hi Art, AccuSoft AccuKnife, TGM ARTP DICOM EPID (RTIMAGE), DICOM CR (RTIMAGE), EPIDose, MAPcalc , 7 Toolbar: Tools > View in Excel - displays the data in an Excel spreadsheet. Options > Dosemap Orientation - Displays a list of available treatment planning system file types, and allows the user to select if the X and/or Y values will be inverted when importing these file types. 8 Rotate PROFILER 2 overlay—sets graph so the user can drag detectors an arbitrary angle. The rotation angle is indicated below the button. 9 Move PROFILER 2 central axis—sets graph so the user can drag central axis. 10 Reset to home—resets angle and central axis to original position. Figure 3-3. Treatment Planning System Import 26 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 39. Item Description 11 Select Slice—opens dialog to select slice if file includes multiple slices or dose volume. 12 View Dosemap—displays the imported dose map. 13 View Treatment Plan Header—views the header data associated with the imported dose map. 14 View Orientation Instructions—gives instructions for aligning the PROFILER 2 to the cross hairs so that the measured data will match the position of the overlay. 15 Rotate counterclockwise—rotates dose map 45 degrees counterclockwise when clicked. 16 Rotate clockwise—rotates dose map 45 degrees clockwise when clicked. 17 Shift PROFILER 2 left—moves PROFILER 2 overlay 0.1 cm to left when clicked. 18 Shift PROFILER 2 right—moves PROFILER 2 overlay 0.1 cm to right when clicked. 19 Shift PROFILER 2 up—moves PROFILER 2 overlay 0.1 cm up when clicked. 20 Shift PROFILER 2 down—moves PROFILER 2 overlay 0.1 cm down when clicked. 21 Offset values 22 Electronics status messages. 23 Dose map color code—shows the values for color coded regions. Figure 3-3. Treatment Planning System Import (Continued) Options > Dose Map Orientation Selecting the Options > Dose Map Orientation menu option in the ‘Planning System Import’ dia- log box displays the following: 1 2 5 3 4 Item Description 1 List of available TPS file types. Highlight the file type that you would like to configure. 2 Invert X - If this box is selected, when the user clicks the Set button a green checkmark is placed in the Invert X column next to the selected file type. The next time this type of TPS file is imported, the X axis values will be inverted. 3 Invert Y - If this box is selected, when the user clicks the Set button a green checkmark is placed in the Invert Y column next to the selected file type. The next time this type of TPS type is imported, the Y axis values will be inverted. 4 Set button - ‘Sets’ the changes in the affected TPS file type. Changes the red X to a green checkmark in the affected column (X or Y). 5 List Config button - Displays the Treatment Plan Vendor List Configuration screen where the user can add or remove vendors from the TPS file type list. Figure 3-4. Dose Map Orientation Dialog Box File Menu Options 27
- 40. File > Import >Watertank Measured This menu option allows importing of files created by scanning water tanks. The imported files can be displayed, compared, and manipulated using any of the PROFILER 2 tools. The water tank file import utility supports the following file types: • Pinnacle files (*.dat) • Mephysto files (*.exp) • OmniPro files (*.asc) Once the water tank file to import has been selected, the following dialog box is displayed. Select a Profile to Display Dialog Box 4 5 6 7 3 2 1 Item Description 1 The profiles (X, Y, ND, PD) present in the selected file, grouped by setup. Click on a profile to select it. To select multiple profiles, press the SHIFT key while clicking on each profile. One profile from each axis may be selected. Click OK to display the selected profiles in the Graph view. 2 The setup groups within the selected file. Each unique combination of depth/ssd/field size has a unique group. 3 The path to the water tank file. 4 Expand All button - Click this button to display all the profiles within the groups. 5 Collapse All button - Click this button to hide the profiles. 6 OK button - Click this button to select the highlighted profiles. 7 Cancel button - Click this button to cancel the operation and close the dialog box. Figure 3-5. Select a Water Tank Profile to Display Dialog Box Once the watertank file data is displayed in the View panel, the Edit > Profile Selection menu option can be used to return to the Profile selection screen and select different profiles for analysis. 28 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 41. PT Data Offsets Dialog Box After selecting the appropriate water tank profiles in the ‘Select a profile to Display’ dialog box and clicking the OK button, the ‘PT Data Offsets’ dialog box is displayed. 1 2 3 4 Item Description 1 X Shift - The X axis shift that will be applied to the watertank data before it is imported 2 Y Shift - The Y axis shift that will be applied to the watertank data before it is imported 3 OK button - Applies the offsets and then displays the water tank data in the View panel. 4 Cancel button - Displays the water tank data in the View panel without applying any offsets. Figure 3-6. Apply Offsets to Data Dialog Box Once the watertank file data is displayed in the View panel, the Edit > Data Offsets menu option can be used to return to the PT Data Offsets dialog box and change the offset values. File > Export > SNC ASCII Selecting File > Export > SNC ASCII from the menu displays the ‘Export Data’ dialog box (Figure 3-7). This dialog box allows the user to export header information and data for one or more files. The user has the option to export to the Windows clipboard or to a file. The set of files to export can be chosen from: • the currently selected file • all open files except the device file • only the files whose visible properties are set. Group Sub-item Description Export to ClipBoard Sets export target to Windows clipboard. File Sets export target to a text file. FileName Sets the name of the exported file. Browse button Opens a ‘Save As’ dialog box. Figure 3-7. Export to SNC Tabular File File Menu Options 29
- 42. Group Sub-item Description Data Component Selects the data component for export: • Background—background analog to digital counts. • Calibration—calibration analog to digital counts. • Raw—raw measured analog to digital counts. • Corrected—analog to digital counts corrected for back- ground and with array calibration applied. • Dose—Values of the total dose administered. • Normalized—normalized values of the dose. Note: If the data component selected for export does not match the displayed data component, the exported values may not match the displayed values. Data Mode Selects from the following: • Avg Rate—average dose rate for the exposure (total radiation received divided by the total elapsed time) • Inst Rate—instantaneous rate for the frame (total radiation re- ceived in the last updates which fall within the rate mode av- eraging parameter divided by the time elapsed in the updates) • Total Dose—total dose integrated over exposure time Note: If the data mode selected for export does not match the displayed data mode, the exported analysis parameters may not match the displayed analysis parameters. Include Field Labels Includes the field labels in the exported data. Include Frame Data Includes the frame data in the exported data. Apply Orientation Off- Applies the orientation offsets from the file header to the detec- sets to Data tor positions before exporting the data. Export Selects the range of data to be exported: • Selected File Only—exports only the currently selected file. • All Files—exports all open files. • All Files but Device Files—exports all open files except for the device. • Only Visible Files—Exports only files that are visible. OK button Exports the data. Cancel button Cancels the export; nothing is exported. Figure 3-7. Export to SNC Tabular File (Continued) See also “SNC ASCII Export” on page 153. File > Export> DQA Measurement The Export > DQA Measurement option lets you use the PROFILER 2 as a daily device. The data can be viewed on the screen, printed, or exported to a text file. Selecting this menu option displays the ‘Daily QA3 Export’ dialog box shown below. 1 2 3 6 4 7 5 Item Description 1 The path to the current measurement file. 2 The interpolated values at the Daily QA Check 3 primary positions as taken from the cur- rently selected file. 3 Print Button - Creates a printout with the same information displayed in the dialog box. 4 Preview Button - Displays a print preview window. Figure 3-8. Daily QA3 Export Dialog Box 30 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 43. Item Description 5 Setup Printer Button - Display a print setup screen where the user can select the printer and set print options. 6 Save Button - Allows the user to save a simple text file containing the data displayed in the dialog box. The data can be copies and pasted into other applications using this text file. 7 Done Button - Closes the dialog box. Figure 3-8. Daily QA3 Export Dialog Box File > Export > ADAC ASCII Selecting File> Export > ADAC ASCII from the menu allows the user to export a profile in the “Pinnacle Full ASCII” file format so that it can be imported into the Pinnacle software. When you select this menu option the Export to Pinnacle dialog box is displayed. This dialog box presents the user with all of the fields present in the Pinnacle file and allows editing of some of the fields. See also “Pinnacle Export” on page 154. Group Item Description Jaws Left Position of left primary collimator jaw in cm. Right Position of right primary collimator jaw in cm. Top Position of top primary collimator jaw in cm. Bottom Position of bottom primary collimator jaw in cm. Optional Wedge Name A text description of the wedge (if used). Parameters Circular Collimator Size Circular collimator size in cm (if used). Figure 3-9. Export to Pinnacle File Menu Options 31
- 44. Group Item Description Beam & Depth Energy Accelerator energy setting. SSDp cm Source to surface distance to a solid phantom in cm. Inherent buildup Inherent buildup of the PROFILER 2 (1.0 gm/cm2) Buildup Type Type of additional buildup or phantom placed on the PRO- FILER 2. Buildup Thickness CM Thickness of the additional buildup in cm. Buildup Density Density of the buildup material relative to water. SSDw Source to Surface distance to water in a water tank. Depth Depth of detector in water. Calculate button Calculates the values. Orientation Offset Set button Click to set the offset values selected in the Orientation display. Offset X (cm) The amount of X axis offset from beam center line when the PROFILER 2 overlay is in the desired location. Offset Y (cm) The amount of Y axis offset from beam center line when the PROFILER 2 overlay is in the desired location. CCW button Click to rotate the PROFILER 2 overlay in the counterclock- wise direction. CW button Click to rotate the PROFILER 2 overlay in the clockwise location. Left, Right, Up, Down, Click to shift the PROFILER 2 overlay to the desired positions. and Center buttons Plan spacing (mm) Sets the distance the overlay is shifted each time you click the Left, Right, Up, or Down button above. YProfile, XProfile Position (cm) Position of detector on the array. Data for position Measured data for the detector. Data type is selected in the Data toolbar (background counts, calibration counts, raw counts, corrected counts, dose (cGy), or normalized. Figure 3-9. Export to Pinnacle (Continued) Edit > Edit Header This menu option displays the ‘Profile Header Information’ dialog box (Figure 3-10), where the user can define the header data, which is the identifying information attached to each file. Once the header data is saved, it is attached to and remains with the measurement file. The software generates some of the header fields automatically, such as the time/date stamp, software version, firmware version, and board serial/revision (if available). Additional header data can be selected before or after making an exposure. Note: The TAB key can be used to move from field to field. See also “Header View” on page 62. 32 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 45. Tab Group Item Description General File Institution Name of the institution, hospital, treatment center, etc. Information Description Description of the exposure. Date Date the file was created (entered by software). Time Time the file was created (entered by software). Cal File The name of the PROFILER 2 array calibration file that was applied to this measurement. Machine Room Room number or location of the accelerator. Information Type Type of accelerator (manufacturer). Model Accelerator model no. Serial # Accelerator serial no. Collector Gain Gain setting of 1, 2, 4, or 8 selected on toolbar. information Serial # PROFILER 2 serial number. Type Type of collection instrument: PROFILER 2. Software Version The PROFILER 2 software version number (entered by software). Firmware Version The PROFILER 2 firmware version number (entered by software). Figure 3-10. Profile Header Information Dialog Box File Menu Options 33
- 46. Tab Group Item Description Setup Buildup, SSD, Buildup (cm) Thickness of the buildup plate in centimeters. Alignment Type of buildup • Water Equiv—Select if buildup has same density as water. • Acrylic—Select if the buildup is made of acrylic. • Polystyrene—Select if the buildup is made of polystyrene. SSD Source to surface distance in cm. Alignment • None—Select if PROFILER 2 is not aligned. • Light Field—Select if PROFILER 2 is aligned with the light field. • Cross Hair—Select if PROFILER 2 is aligned using the laser cross hairs. Actual Field Size Actual size of light field. It is calculated from the entered SSD and Collimator values. Gantry Angle Angle of rotation of the gantry. (Deg) Collimator Angle Angle of rotation of the collimator. (Deg) Machine Beam Type • Electron - Select if exposure beam is electrons. setup • Photon - Select if exposure beam is photons. • Cobalt - Select if using a cobalt machine. • Undefined - Select if none of the above options apply. Energy Enter exposure energy. Wedge • None—Select if no wedge is being measured. • Static—Select if using a metal wedge for electron wedge measurement. • Dynamic—Select if photon wedge is formed by moving colli- mator jaw. • Virtual—Select if photon wedge is formed by moving collima- tor jaw. Deg Wedge angle in degrees. Rate (MU/Min) Enter accelerator rate setting in monitor units per minute. Dose (MU) Enter accelerator total dose setting in monitor units. Gantry Setup Quick Set Use the pull down list to set up standard fields. Tray Mount Check if PROFILER 2 is mounted in the optional isocentric mounting fixture. Collimator Angle Enter the angle of the collimator in degrees. (Deg) Symmetric Check if the collimator settings are symmetrical. Collimators • X—setting of symmetric X axis pair of collimators. • Y—setting of symmetric Y axis pair of collimators. Asymmetric If the collimator jaws are asymmetrical, enter the setting for each collimators jaw. • Left—setting of asymmetric – X axis collimator jaw. • Right—setting of asymmetric + X axis collimator jaw. • Top —setting of asymmetric + Y axis collimator jaw. • Bottom—setting of asymmetric – Y axis collimator jaw. Orienta- graphic Orientation The graphic shows the orientation of the PROFILER 2 with tion graphic respect to accelerator when the exposure was made. “Gun” refers to the accelerator’s electron gun, usually toward the wall, while “target” refers to the accelerator’s target, usually away from the wall in the gantry head. Zero position is defined as the +Y axis pointing toward the wall. Zoom to Zooms the graphic representation to show individual detectors. CrossHairs Home button Click to return the angle and offset of the PROFILER 2 shown in the graphic to the zero position. Rotation Theta Increment Angular increment for rotation (90, 45, 30, 15, 5, or 1 degrees) Rotation arrows Click buttons to rotate. Angle (deg) Displays current angle of rotation. Set button Sets the angle of rotation. Crosshair Shift Increment Selects the increment of cross hair offset (5, 4, 3, 2, 1, or 1/ location 10mm). Shift arrows Clicking one of the four arrows shifts the cross hairs in the direc- tion of the arrows by the shift increment set. Shift amount The amount of cross hair shift on the X axis in mm. Shift amount The amount of cross hair shift on the Y axis in mm. Figure 3-10. Profile Header Information Dialog Box 34 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 47. Tab Group Item Description Buttons OK Save the header information. Cancel Cancel any header changes. Load Default Load the previously saved default values into the fields. The default values are selected values to header items that you want to remain the same. Save Default Save the following default values to memory: institution, align- ment, orientation, SSD, room, model, type, and serial number. Default values are stored in the application .ini file. Copy All Copy all the current header values to the Windows clipboard. Undo All Undo all the changes made to this header. This option replaces the field values with their values before the dialog box was launched. Figure 3-10. Profile Header Information Dialog Box Editing the File Header Although some of the information in the file header is entered automatically by the software, most of the information must be entered manually. You can enter header data for the measurement before the measurement or afterward. Generally speaking, entering the data beforehand helps focus on the details of the measurement and prevents saving without header data or with incor- rect header data. Of course, you can always edit the header data after collecting the data. Using Default Header Entries Entering file header data can be simplified by setting up default entries. The following header fields can be saved as default values: Institution, Alignment, Orientation, SSD, Room, Machine Model, Machine Type, and Machine Serial Number. Enter these standard values into the dialog box and then click the Save as Default button. The default values are saved and can be loaded into the header window by clicking the Load Default button. The default header entries can be edited at any time, and a new set of default values can be saved. Tools > Collect Background This menu option displays the ‘Background Collection’ dialog box (Figure 3-11) and starts a back- ground measurement. The progress bar shows how much of the background collection is complete. A Cancel button lets you cancel the process. When the background is taken at startup, the collection time is 60 seconds and the dialog box also displays the Tip of the Day. 1 2 4 3 Item Description 1 Progress bar—Shows the progress of the background collection process. 2 Start button—Lets you start a manual background collection. 3 Cancel button—Lets you cancel the process. 4 Collection Time—The background collection time can be set from 10 to 600 seconds. The default collection time is 20 seconds. Use the up or down arrows to change the background collection time. Figure 3-11. Background Collection Dialog Box See also “Background Measurements” on page 82. File Menu Options 35
- 48. Tools > Calibrate Array Selecting Tools >Calibrate Array from the menu displays the ‘Array Calibration’ dialog box (Figure 3-12). After the user clicks the Begin button, additional screen elements are displayed (Figure 3- 14). See also “Array Calibration” on page 81. 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Number Control Name Description 1 Array diagram A diagram of the detector arrays. 2 Lasers Click to display red lines on the diagram simulating lasers. 3 Magnifying glass Click on the magnifying glass to zoom in and change the diagram to a 3D image of the PROFILER 2. 4 Field Size The field size in cm (collimator setting) for array calibration. The default size is 35x35 cm at 100 cm SSD, which includes all detectors. If you are using a smaller field and “By Field Size” is selected in the Calculate Detector Range list box, you must specify the field size and SSD. This excludes any detectors that are not in the beam. If you specify the beam so that un-irradiated detec- tors are included in the field, the results of the calibration will be invalid. To edit the Field Size, click the Edit button (See “Edit SSD and Field Size” on page 37.) The dialog box lets you specify the X dimension, the Y dimension, the machine isocenter, and the SSD. After editing, the calibrated detector numbers are shown to the right of the Edit button. 5 Calculate Detector Selects method of determining which detectors are in the beam for array Range calibration. • By field size—calculates detectors in the beam by the selected field size and SSD. • By Profile Shape—calculates detectors in the beam based on radiation re- ceived by detectors. 6 Beam Energy Beam energy setting in the accelerator. 7 Beam Type Type of beam: Photon, Electron, Cobalt, or Undefined. Selecting Cobalt dims the Beam Energy setting. 8 Warmup (Pulses or This is the part of the measurement you want to exclude during machine war- Milsec) mup. If the program is set to pulsed mode, the Warmup label reads pulses, and the value entered is in pulses. If the program is set to continuous mode, the label reads Milsec (milliseconds). Figure 3-12. Array Calibration Window (Before Clicking Begin Button) 36 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 49. Number Control Name Description 9 CalFromFiles Initiates the array calibration procedure using saved files. See “Calibration button with Saved Files” on page 90. 10 Begin/Finish This button is enabled at the beginning of the procedure and when all steps button are complete. Click button to perform array calibration calculations. 11 Instruction box Displays instructions to prepare the PROFILER 2 for array calibration. 12 Calibrate tab Shows the array calibration screen. 13 Results tab Shows the results screen. See “Viewing the Array Calibration Results” on page 88. 14 Close button Closes the array calibration window. 15 Print button Prints the results graph. 16 Save To Flash Saves the current array calibration to non-volatile, flash memory in the PRO- button FILER 2. This allows calibrations to be transported with the PROFILER 2 for use on another computer. Up to 10 calibration files can be saved in memory. See “Saving Array Calibration to Flash Memory” on page 89. 17 Save to File Saves the current calibration to a file. 18 Save for Atlas Saves the array calibration file in a format that is compatible with older ver- sions of ATLAS QA software. This button is only enabled when a PROFILER 2 is connected. Figure 3-12. Array Calibration Window (Before Clicking Begin Button) (Continued) Edit SSD and Field Size Clicking the Edit button in the upper right of the Array Calibration dialog box displays options to adjust the Field Size and SSD during calibration to fit any linacs that may have a beam that is too narrow to irradiate all the detectors. If this is the case, the detectors that are not fully irradiated are excluded from the calibration to prevent the results from being invalid. After editing, the detec- tor numbers to be calibrated are shown to the right of the Edit button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Number Control Name Description 1 Field Size (cm) Entering values in the X and Y boxes sets the field size in centimeters for the array calibration. Detectors outside of the field at the specified SSD are not calibrated. 2 Machine ISO- Normally you enter 100 cm if this is your machine’s isocenter. This field center (cm) states the distance from the beam source for which the field size as config- ured by the machine is true. For example, on a machine with 100 cm isocenter, a field size set at 20x20 cm is only 20x20 cm at exactly100 cm. Due to beam divergence, the field is smaller closer to the source and larger far- ther from the source. Since a few machines have a different isocenter, you can enter the distance for your machine. 3 SSD (cm) The Source to Surface distance to the top surface of the PROFILER 2 to be used for the array calibration. 4 Detectors The numbers of the detectors that will be calibrated using the field size and Calibrated SSD selected above. 5 Cancel button Cancels the setting. 6 OK button Selects the field size and SSD entered above. Figure 3-13. Edit SSD and Field Size for Calibration of Narrow Beams File Menu Options 37
- 50. Array Calibration Dialog Box (During Calibration) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Number Control Name Description 1 3D Image A 3D image of the PROFILER 2. 2 Reset button Clears the data and resets the calibration to step A. 3 Beam strength During exposure, indicates relative beam strength. 4 Status Text indicates whether the PROFILER 2 is “idle” or “collecting data.” 5 Beam on indicator Indicator is green when the beam is not on, yellow during warm up, and dark red when beam is on. 6 Instruction box Displays detailed instructions for each step of the array calibration procedure. 7 Exposures Indicates what step you are currently performing. 8 Start and Stop Click Start to start collecting dose for a calibration step. Click Stop to stop buttons collecting dose. Figure 3-14. Array Calibration Dialog Box (During Calibration Steps) 38 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 51. Tools > Calibrate Dose This menu option displays the ‘Dose Calibration’ dialog box. The options in this dialog box allow the user to perform dose calibrations and manage the list of currently available dose calibration factors. 1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14 Number Control Name Description 1 Instruction box Displays detailed instructions for the dose calibration procedure. 2 Stop button Stops collecting dose for a calibration step. 3 Start button Starts collecting dose for a calibration step. 4 Dose The value of the calibrated or nominal dose value delivered, and being used as the reference. 5 Energy Beam energy setting in the accelerator. 6 Comments A field to add text comments to the dose calibration. 7 Current calibration Displays a list of all currently available dose calibration factors. The list list includes all of the dose calibration factors found in the device flash memory as well as any dose calibration factors found in the application .ini file which match the serial number and revision number of the attached device and do not match a dose calibration factor already listed from the flash. 8 Add button Saves the dose calibration to a file and adds the dose calibration to the Cur- rent Calibrations list. 9 Remove button Removes the selected calibration factor from the Current Calibrations list. 10 Save to Flash button Saves the current dose calibration factor to non-volatile, flash memory in the PROFILER 2. This allows calibration factors to be transported with the PRO- FILER 2 for use on another computer. Up to 10 dose calibrations can be saved in memory. See “Saving a Dose Calibration To Flash” on page 96. 11 Calibrated Dose Check if the value entered in the Dose box has been verified with a test setup whose calibration is traceable to an authorized standards agency, such as NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology). When this box is checked, dose values are calibrated absolute dose. If this box is not checked, the value is a machine nominal dose. 12 Beam Type Type of beam: Electron, Photon, Cobalt, or undefined. 13 Set as Default Sets the dose calibration selected in the Current Calibrations list as the default dose calibration factor. The default will always appear unless another dose calibration is selected. 14 Close button Closes the dose calibration window. Figure 3-15. Dose Calibration Dialog Box File Menu Options 39
- 52. Tools > Download Code This menu option displays the ‘Download Code to the PROFILER 2’ dialog box (Figure 3-16), which is used to download new firmware to the PROFILER 2 instrument. 1 2 3 4 Item Description 1 File-Open button—Opens a dialog box to let you select the file to be downloaded. When complete, filename appears in the adjacent box. 2 Done button—Click button to close dialog box after loading is complete. 3 Download to PROFILER 2 button—Click button to initiate downloading the code in the dis- played code file. 4 Instruction box—Read instruction box before downloading code to the PROFILER 2. Figure 3-16. Download Code Dialog Box See also “Installing Firmware” on page 192. Tools > Save Calibration to Flash Selecting Tools > Save Calibration to Flash from the menu displays a file open dialog box. When the user selects the array calibration file that they would like to save, the Select Flash Memory Slot dialog box is displayed (Figure 3-17). Item Description Slot The flash memory slot in the PROFILER 2 where the array calibration is stored. Descriptor A description of the array calibration entered when the file was created. Operator Name of the operator who created the array calibration. Date/Time The date and time the array calibration was created. Energy The energy setting of the accelerator on which the PROFILER 2 was calibrated. Figure 3-17. Save Array Calibration to Flash Memory 40 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 53. Item Description Beam mode Type of beam mode (pulsed or continuous). SSD Source-Surface Distance. X Field Size The width of the X field in cm. Y Field Size The width of the Y field in cm. Warmup Cycle The warm up time (if any) that should be ignored during a measurement. Descriptor box A short description of the array calibration. Operator box Name of the operator performing the calibration. Save button Click button to save the array calibration to the selected slot. Cancel button Click button to cancel the operation. Delete button Click button to delete the array calibration from the selected memory slot. The pro- gram will prompt the user to confirm this command. Clear button Click button to delete all array calibrations from flash memory. The program will prompt the user to confirm the command. Figure 3-17. Save Array Calibration to Flash Memory (Continued) See also “Saving Array Calibration to Flash Memory” on page 89. Tools > Concatenate Selecting Tools > Concatenate from the menu displays the ‘frmConcatenation’ dialog box (Figure 3-7). This dialog box allows the user to concatenate two currently loaded files into a single mea- surement. The two files must be of the same type, and the user must select the pivot point where the two measurements are joined. 6 1 5 2 4 3 Item Description 1 Accept button—Click Accept to create the concatenated file from the selected files using the pivot point that is highlighted in the box. The concatenated file is then appended to the currently open file list. 2 Cancel button—Click Cancel to exit without creating a concatenated file. 3 Pivot point list—Select (highlight) the desired pivot point for the concatenation. 4 Device type—shows the type of device you are using. 5 Exposure 2 selection box—select file name for exposure 2 6 Exposure 1 selection box—select file name for exposure 1 Figure 3-18. Concatenate Dialog Box See also “Concatenating Two Measurements” on page 103. File Menu Options 41
- 54. Setup > Parameters This menu option displays the ‘Setup Parameters’ dialog box (Figure 3-19), which is used to change parameters for the PROFILER 2. When first setting up the PROFILER 2 you may use the default setup parameters. 1 12 2 3 13 4 14 5 6 7 15 8 16 9 17 10 11 18 No. Name Description Default/Range 1 Draw Points on Graph When selected, the program displays the measurement unchecked points as individual dots on the graph. 2 Electronics in Beam When this check box is selected, a caution message will checked Msg be displayed on the computer screen if the electronics section of the PROFILER 2 is exposed to the direct beam. This option should always be selected to prevent acciden- tal damage to the electronic circuits in the PROFILER 2. 3 Copy Indexes with When selected, row and column headings are copied checked Data along with the data when copying numerical values to the clipboard or to a spreadsheet. 4 Uniform Axis Scale Selecting this check box causes the top and bottom (hori- checked zontal) axes to have the same scale. This is useful if you want to compare original Profiler files to PROFILER 2 files or ensure X and Y axes of PROFILER 2 files have the same appearance. 5 AutoSave Collected If this checkbox is selected, when the user clicks the Stop checked Data button the ‘Profile Header Information’ dialog box is dis- played. The data in this dialog box is stored with the profile and serves as a record of the setup parameters and the machine used for this profile. If this checkbox is not selected, the profile header can be saved by selecting the File > Save As menu command. If this checkbox is not selected, and the user clicks Start before saving the profile, the data will be lost. If the PRO- FILER 2 program is closed before saving the data, a warning message appears which gives an opportunity to save the data using the Save As function, or Cancel and exit the program. 6 Show Tips on Startup Displays the Tip of the Day viewer when the program is checked launched. 7 Load Default Cal File Loads a selected default calibration file. checked 8 Large Analysis Fonts Displays Analysis panel in large fonts. unchecked 9 Zoom Horizontal and Permits zoom in the vertical and horizontal scales. When checked Vertical cleared, only the vertical axis zooms; the horizontal axis is fixed at the length of the array. 10 Chart Color Drag slider to select the level of background color for the white charts. Adding a background color may make it easier to see color graphs. Figure 3-19. Setup Parameters 42 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 55. No. Name Description Default/Range 11 Chart Line Thickness Adjusts the thickness of the profile lines in the Graph view. Default=1 Range= 1 (thin- nest) to 4 (thickest) 12 Normalization Type For the selected (open) file, selects the rotation point/ Physical Center detector that will be assigned a value of 100%. • Physical Center—Sets the normalization point at the center of the array. This is the point selected to be as- signed a value of 100% when ‘Normalized’ is selected in the Data toolbar. • Calculated Center—Selects the definition of the center of the profile based on the calculated center of the beam. If both penumbra areas are detected, the pro- gram calculates a beam center based on the field region detected. • Maximum Value—Selects the detector with the maxi- mum value to be the normalization point. • Selected Detector—Sets the normalization point to a specific detector on a specific axis. Choose the detector and axis using the ‘Normalization Params’ options in the Setup Parameters dialog box, or right-click the detector on the graph and select ‘Normalize to this channel’ from the context menu. See also “Normalizing the Graph” on page 61. 13 Normalization Params Sets the axis for on-screen normalization. Default=Y Axis - Axis 14 Normalization Params Sets the position of the detector for on-screen Default=0cm - Position normalization. 15 Collection Interval The interval between collections in continuous beam Default=125 ms (ms) - Continuous mode. If the value is outside the valid limits (<125), the Range=125 to 800 field displays a red background to warn the user. 16 Collection Interval The interval between collections in pulsed beam mode. If Default=125 ms (ms) - Pulsed the value is outside the valid limits (<125), the field dis- Range=125 to 800 plays a red background to warn the user. Note: if you increase this interval you may need to reduce the gain so that the device does not saturate the capacitors. 17 Data Correction - Data If Smooth Data is selected on the Control menu, the Default=0.5 cm Smoothing Factor smoothing factor sets the degree of smoothing applied. A Range=0.0 to 1.0. higher value means more smoothing. 18 Data Correction - Rate The range of time over which averaging is performed to Default=125 msec Mode Averaging calculate the instantaneous rate mode results. A higher Range=125 to 800 number results in a smoother appearance of curves. msec Note: If rate mode averaging is less than the collection interval, the software will automatically change the rate mode average period to match the collection interval. Figure 3-19. Setup Parameters (Continued) Setup > Analysis Selecting Setup > Analysis from the menu displays the ‘Configure Analysis’ dialog box (Figure 3- 20). This dialog box allows the user to define the variables used to calculate the data that is dis- played in the Analysis panel. See also “Analysis Panel” on page 70. File Menu Options 43
- 56. Menu group Item Sub-item Description Default/Range Flatness/ Penumbra Percentage of the maximum detector value Default=20% Symmetry Bottom (base intensity point, Max or CAX) that defines the bottom of the penumbra region. Range=20 to 50% Penumbra Top Percentage of the maximum detector value Default=80% (base intensity point, Max or CAX) that Range=50 to defines the top of the penumbra region. 80% Field Region (Flat) The percent of the field size that is used in Default=80% the flatness calculation. Range=5 to 100% Field Region The percent of the field size that is used in Default=80% (Sym) the symmetry calculation. Range=5 to 100% Flatness Variance A method of calculating flatness based on Variance the average between the maximum value of a chamber in the field region and the mini- mum value of a chamber in the field region. See also “Flatness Calculation by Variance” on page 163. Ratio (IEC) A method of calculating flatness per IEC Standard 976. See also “Ratio (IEC) Flatness Calculation” on page 164. Varian Central axis normalized flatness. See also “Varian Flatness Calculation” on page 164. Symmetry CAX Point Symmetrical points are normalized to the Area Difference CAX point and then the difference of the normalized values of the two points are compared. See also “CAX Point Difference Symmetry” on page 165. Local Point Symmetrical points are normalized to the Diff. selected detector, then the normalized val- ues of the two points are compared. See also “Local Point Difference Symmetry” on page 165. Ratio (IEC) A method of calculating symmetry per IEC Standard 976 that finds the ratio of all sym- metric detectors in the field size, always using the larger of the two numbers as the numerator. The maximum value in this series is the IEC number. See also “Point Ratio (Ratio IEC) Symmetry” on page 165. Varian Point Symmetrical points are normalized to the Difference Positive Detector and then the normalized value of the difference of the two points are compared. See also “Varian Point Difference Symmetry” on page 166. Area Average A method of calculating symmetry based on the area used by Siemens Primus. See also “Area Average Symmetry” on page 166. Area Two symmetrical points are selected. Then the area under the graph from the first point to the center is compared to the area under the graph from the center to the second point. See also “Area Symmetry” on page 167. Base intensity Max Base intensity point for defining the field Max point region is set to the value of the detector with the maximum intensity. Cax Base intensity point for defining the field region is set to the value of the detector located at the central axis. Intensity Cutoff The intensity cutoff percentage of the base Default=50 intensity point used for defining the field region of the exposure. Range=50 to 90% Figure 3-20. ‘Configure Analysis’ Dialog Box 44 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 57. Menu group Item Sub-item Description Default/Range Flatness/ Beam Interpo- Select this option to have the software use checked Symmetry lated Flatness and the calculated beam center for flatness and (Continued) Symmetry symmetry instead of the center detector. See “Beam Interpolated Flatness and Sym- metry” on page 168. Use Linear Pen- Select to have the software calculate the unchecked umbra beam edge using linear interpolation Interpolation instead of a default, non-linear modeling of the beam edge. See “Beam Edge Interpola- tion” on page 169. Auto Select Select to have the software select the cor- unchecked Config rect configuration based on the Machine description located in the header file. (Machine description should show Varian 2100, other Varian models, Siemens mod- els, or IEC requirements.) Selected Custom A user-defined custom analysis configura- Custom tion is selected. Varian 2100 Analysis configuration is set to Varian spec- ifications for Varian 2100. Varian Analysis configuration is set to Varian spec- ifications for Varian HCIP302. Siemens Analysis configuration is set to Siemens specifications. IEC* Analysis configuration set similar to Interna- tional Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). Elekta Analysis configuration is set to Elekta specifications. Other Electron Energy Automatic Automatically selects the Electron Energy Selected Analysis calibration to use based on comparison of the heading data. If a comparable heading cannot be found, default values are used. Selected Allows you to select a specific Electron Energy calibration from the adjacent pull- down list. Analysis Style Slope Selects slope method of electron energy Intercept analysis. Intercept Selects intercept method of electron energy analysis. Photon Wedge Depth 1 (cm) Reference depth 1 used in the Percent Dose Default=5 cm Analysis Depth (PDD) calculation for photon wedge calculations. Depth 2 (cm) Reference depth 2 used in the Percent Dose Default=10 Depth (PDD) calculation for photon wedge cm calculations. Profiler CI cutoff 50% or 80% The minimum intensity cutoff percentage of Default=50% the base intensity point used for calculating the Compare Index (CI). Default Light Field 10 x 10 Default light field size for use in analysis cal- Default=20 x Size 15 x 15 culations when you have not yet added a 20 20 x 20 light field size in the header data. 30 x 20 Top plate field Allows the software to factor in the inherent checked size buildup of the attached device when report- compensation ing the measured field size for calculating light/radiation field coincidence. If this box is checked, the software projects the field size measured at the detector plane back to the surface of the overlay. If the box is not checked, the software dis- plays the field size at the diode plane. The inherent buildup for the PROFILER 2 is 1.0 cm. Figure 3-20. ‘Configure Analysis’ Dialog Box (Continued) File Menu Options 45
- 58. Setup > Set Energy This menu option displays up to six energy options, plus an ‘Other’ option which allows the user to define a custom machine energy. Figure 3-21. Set Energy Menu Option Following is the dialog box displayed when the user selects ‘Other’ from the Set Energy menu. 3 1 4 2 No. Item Description 1 Machine Energy Enter the appropriate machine energy. 2 Energy Type The choices are MeV, MV, or Cobalt. 3 OK Saves your changes and closes the dialog box. 4 Cancel Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box. Figure 3-22. Set Energy Dialog Box Setup > View Calibration Selecting this menu option displays the Calibration Data window shown below. This window is similar to the Array Calibration results window (see “Viewing the Array Calibration Results” on page 88) except that the data in this window is displayed in corrected counts. By selecting this menu option, the user can: • View each step of the calibration (A through D) individually • Select a specific axis to view • Normalize the data if desired (Normalized checkbox) • Zoom in on the detector variations by dragging over the area you want to examine more closely. 46 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 59. Figure 3-23. View Calibration Dialog Box Setup > Electron Wedge Calibration Selecting Setup > Electron Wedge Calibration from the menu displays the Electron Wedge Cali- bration dialog box (Figure 3-24). This dialog box is used to set up the parameters for an electron wedge calibration. See also “Checking Electron Energy With a Wedge” on page 106. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 9 10 14 13 12 11 Group Item No. Description Toolbar area Name 1 The machine specific name assigned to this series of wedge calibration files. Add button 2 Adds a new electron wedge calibration. Delete button 3 Deletes the selected electron wedge calibration from the “ini” file. Edit button 4 Enables the selected electron wedge calibration for editing. Save button 5 Saves the added or edited wedge calibration to the “ini” file. Cancel button 6 Cancels the current operation. Done button 7 Closes the dialog box. Figure 3-24. Electron Wedge Calibration Setup File Menu Options 47
- 60. Group Item No. Description List of Wedge FileName 8 The name of the energy specific electron wedge calibration Calibration file. Files Energy Energy used for the calibration. Slope Slope of wedge (degrees). Intercept intercept coefficient value. RSQR R-squared coefficient value. Data Type 9 Indicates the type of instrument, e.g. Profiler 2, IC PRO- FILER, or Profiler 1. Buttons Remove File 10 Removes the selected item from the electron wedge button calibration. Report button 11 Copies the wedge calibration data to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a spreadsheet such as Excel. Edit Energy 12 Brings up a dialog to let you enter the real energy value for button the currently selected electron energy entry. Add File button 13 Opens a file selection dialog box to add a data file to the cur- rent electron wedge calibration. Wedge Inter- Slope (Sb) 14 Slope of wedge (degrees). cept Analysis Intercept (Ib) intercept coefficient value. Results Rsqrd R-squared coefficient value. Coefficient Wedge Slope Slope (Sm) 15 Slope of wedge (degrees). Analysis Results Intercept (Im) intercept coefficient value. Rsqrd R-squared coefficient value. Coefficient Figure 3-24. Electron Wedge Calibration Setup (Continued) Setup > Wedge Configuration Selecting Setup > Wedge Configuration from the menu displays the ‘Wedge Analysis Configu- ration’ dialog box (Figure 3-25). This dialog box is used to specify Percent Depth Dose (PDD) data for a photon wedge. Edit fields allows the user to enter specific depth and dose. An Add/Replace button allows the user to update the PDD data from the values in the edits. A list box displays all of the defined photon energies for selection. The user can also specify which photon energy to use by default. See also “Photon Wedge Measurements” on page 109. 1 2 3 12 11 4 5 10 6 9 8 7 No. Item Description 1 Depth Depth of radiation (cm). 2 Dose Measured dose at selected depth. 3 PDD Percent Dose Depth. 4 Add/Replace Click button to add a new value. 5 Delete Click button to delete the selected value. Figure 3-25. Photon Wedge Setup 48 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 61. No. Item Description 6 Done Click button to close and save the values entered. 7 Use Current Click to use current energy. 8 Add Current Click to add energy to list box. 9 Delete Current Delete current energy reading from list box. 10 Current value list Pull down list box and select energy. 11 Depth Depth of the measurement to be added. 12 Dose Dose of the measurement to be added. Figure 3-25. Photon Wedge Setup (Continued) Setup > Serial Port This menu option displays the ‘Select Port’ dialog box (Figure 3-26), which is used to manually select the port from a list or to search all ports to find the device automatically. See also “Finding the Port” on page 20. 1 2 5 4 3 No. Display Description 1 COM port list Shows selected serial port. Pull down list to see other COM ports. 2 Find button Click button to have the software search all COM ports for either a USB or serial connection to a PROFILER 2 device, starting at the lowest numbered available COM port and stopping at the highest numbered available COM port. If it finds an attached device, it stops searching, notifies the user, and closes the dialog box. 3 Help button Opens the PROFILER 2 Online Help. 4 Cancel button Cancels the selection. 5 Save button Saves the COM port selection to memory. When the program is opened again, the selected COM port will be used. Figure 3-26. Select Serial Port Dialog Box Help > About Selecting this menu option displays the ‘SNC About’ dialog box (Figure 3-27), which provides the following information: • Application Version - the Windows PC version • Firmware Revision - the embedded firmware version • Board Info - the serial number of the attached device • Device Type - the type of attached device See also “Verify Software Version Number” on page 191. File Menu Options 49
- 62. Figure 3-27. SNC About Dialog Box Context Menus Some parts of the screen have context menus that appear when you right-click the area (Figure 3- 28). These menus give you quick access commands that are related to that area of the screen. Context menus 50 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 63. Screen Area Description Legend panel The Legend panel displays different context menus when the user right-clicks on the Device and when the user right-clicks on an open file. See “Legend Panel Details” on page 56 for more information. Mode selection button Right-clicking on the current screen mode selection in the toolbar displays a context menu with three options: Avg. Rate, Inst. Rate, or Total Dose. View panel There are different context menus available in the View panel, depending on the selected view tab. The Graph, Header, and Data tabs have context menu options; the Beam Tuning and Data Plot tabs do not. • For the Graph view context menu options, see “Graph View Context Menu” on page 62. • For the Header view context menu options, see “Header View Context Menu” on page 63. • For the Data view context menu options, see “Data View Details” on page 64. Analysis panel The Analysis panel context menus are used to configure the analysis panel. For infor- mation, see “Changing the Analysis Panel Elements” on page 72 or “Editing the Analysis Panel Parameters” on page 73. Figure 3-28. Context menus Toolbar Area The toolbar area contains a set of toolbars with buttons and displays. Each toolbar can be dragged to a different location within the toolbar area. To move a toolbar, drag it by the vertical handle on the left edge of the toolbar. The software remembers where each toolbar was placed and puts it there when the program is closed and re-launched. 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 No. Name Description 1 Acquisition toolbar Provides controls to acquire a measurement. 2 Display toolbar Provides controls to invert all displayed axes by 180 degrees horizontally and change mode/rate. 3 Dose Calibration Displays the current dose calibration and a list of available dose calibration toolbar factors. 4 Array Calibration Displays the current array calibration and a list of available array calibration toolbar files. 5 Data toolbar Selects the type of data to be displayed (background, calibration, raw, cor- rected, dose, or normalized). 6 Movie toolbar Provides controls for multi frame files. The toolbar is only visible if a multi- frame file is selected. 7 Status toolbar Provides the status of the exposure. 8 On Graph Display Provides graph display options and allows the user to select various on graph toolbar analysis parameters. Figure 3-29. Toolbar Buttons and indicators Acquisition Toolbar 1 2 3 No. Name Description 1 Start button Starts profile data acquisition; same as menu command. Figure 3-30. Acquisition Toolbar Toolbar Area 51
- 64. No. Name Description 2 Stop button Stops profile data acquisition; same as menu command. 3 Gain selection Selects the desired gain, 1, 2, 4, or 8. Default gain setting is 4. Figure 3-30. Acquisition Toolbar Display Toolbar 1 2 3 No. Name Description 1 Invert button When this option is on, all displayed axes are inverted by 180 degrees horizon- tally. The option is on when the button has a light gray background (as shown above). This button functions the same way as the Control > Invert menu option. 2 Mode button Toggles the data display mode between Total Dose, Avg Rate, and Inst Rate. • Total Dose is the total accumulated dose in the file in cGy collected at each detector during the exposure. • Avg Rate is the total dose divided by the time of the exposure for each detec- tor. • Inst Rate is the dose rate for the selected frame (for a multiframe file) or the dose rate for the current update during the exposure. 3 Mode display Shows the selected data display mode: Total Dose, Avg Rate, and Inst Rate. Right-clicking this area displays a context menu for data display mode selection. Figure 3-31. Display Toolbar Dose Calibration Toolbar 1 2 No. Name Description 1 Dose Calibration Displays the currently loaded dose calibration and lists all the available dose cal- ibration factors. Choosing an item from the list applies that dose calibration factor to the currently selected measurement file. 2 Pull-down button Displays a list of all the available dose calibrations. Figure 3-32. Dose Calibration Toolbar Array Calibration Toolbar The Array Calibration toolbar displays the name of the currently loaded array calibration and up to 10 of the most recently loaded calibration files. 1 2 3 4 5 No. Name Description 1 Array Calibration Displays the file name of the currently loaded calibration file and lists up to the file 10 most recently loaded array calibration files, as well as any calibration data found in currently open files. 2 Pull-down button Pulls down a list of available calibration files. Choosing an item from the list loads that calibration into the currently selected file. See note below. 3 Select File button Opens a file selection dialog box to select a calibration file. This button functions the same as the Setup > Load Calibration File menu option. Figure 3-33. Array Calibration Toolbar 52 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 65. No. Name Description 4 View Calibration Displays profiles of the selected array calibration file. button This button is disabled if no array calibrations have been performed or if no cal- ibration files have not been loaded. 5 Save Default Allows the user to save this array calibration as the default. Note: This button is only for array calibration files. To save a dose calibration value as default, use the Dose Calibration dialog box (Tools > Calibrate Dose). See “Set- ting Up A Default Dose Calibration” on page 96. Figure 3-33. Array Calibration Toolbar (Continued) Note: If the user accidentally selects an array calibration file from a different device (wrong serial number), the software will warn the user that the serial number in the calibration file does not match the serial number of the device. If the user clicks OK, the file is loaded. If the user clicks Cancel, the file is not loaded and a ‘Failed to Apply Calibration File’ message is displayed. Data Toolbar The data toolbar allows the user to select the type of data that will be displayed in the View panel. 1 2 No. Name Description 1 Data selection This pull-down list selects the type of data to be displayed. The units on the ver- pull-down list tical axis of the graph are changed to match the type of data selected. • Background—Background counts accumulated for each detector during the last background measurement. • Calibration—Array calibration factors (unitless) • Raw—Raw analog to digital counts (counts) • Corrected—Corrected counts (raw counts minus background times calibra- tion factor) • Dose—Total dose (cGy) • Normalized—Normalized to value selected in “Normalization Type” in Setup Parameters dialog box. 2 Normalize and Normalizes graphs and zooms in from 80 to 110%. Zoom button Figure 3-34. Data Toolbar Status Toolbar The status toolbar (Figure 3-35) is a message center where the program displays current status. 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Name Description 1 Type The type of data collection device used to collect the currently selected data (PROFILER 2, IC PROFILER, original Profiler, other). 2 Gain overrange Color bar indicator shows the overrange condition when the file was measured— green = OK; yellow = underrange; red = overrange. 3 Radiation Indicates whether the currently selected file used pulsed or continuous mode dur- ing data collection. 4 Time The total elapsed time in seconds of the currently selected file. If the software is in Dose or Total Dose mode, this is the total elapsed time for the entire file. If the software is in Rate mode, it is the total time up to the current update. If the file is not a multi-frame file, this panel always displays the total time for the entire file. Figure 3-35. Status Toolbar Toolbar Area 53
- 66. No. Name Description 5 Frame The selected frame number of the currently selected file. If the currently selected file is not a multi-frame file, this panel displays “N/A.” 6 Pulses The pulse count for the currently selected file. This display follows the same rules as the Time, item 4. Figure 3-35. Status Toolbar (Continued) Movie Player Toolbar The movie player toolbar provides controls for starting, stopping, and playing a multi-frame file (movie). Note: This toolbar is only displayed when a multi-frame file (.prm) is selected, and the data mode is not set to background or corrected counts. 1 2 3 4 5 No. Name Description 1 Start button Starts playing the frame sequence. 2 Stop button Stops playing the frame sequence. 3 Previous Moves to the previous frame. 4 Scroll bar The position of the bar shows the relative location of the current frame. Drag the bar to quickly move to an area of interest. The default position of the bar is at the last frame. 5 Next Moves to the next frame. Figure 3-36. Movie player toolbar buttons and indicators On Graph Display Toolbar The On Graph Display toolbar (Figure 3-37) is used to select which axis to display, the on graph analysis parameter, and whether to adjust SSD automatically. 1 2 3 4 5 No. Name Description 1 Both axes Displays data from the X and Y axes in the Graph view and Data view. 2 X axis Displays the X axis in the Graph view and Data view. 3 Axis selector Clicking the drop down portion of this button displays a menu of the available axes (X and Y). Figure 3-37. On Graph Display Toolbar 54 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 67. No. Name Description 4 On Graph Display Selects the analysis parameter to be displayed in the Graph view or Data view. In Result the Graph View the result appears at the bottom of the selected graph. In Data View, the result is shown in a pop-up box when clicking on a specific detector value. To display symmetry results in the Graph view, the user must double-click a point on the graph. The software will automatically select the detector closest to the selected point and the symmetrical detector. • None—No display. • Beam Center—Displays the calculated beam center, which is the midway point between the two linearly interpolated points in the penumbra that are at 50% of maximum dose (Graph view only). • Point Values —If this option is selected and the user double-clicks on any point on the graph, the left and right point values are displayed in large font at the bottom of the graph (Graph view only). • CAX Point Diff.—Symmetrical points are normalized to the CAX point and then the difference of the normalized values of the two points are compared. • Local Point Diff.—Symmetrical points are normalized to the selected detector, then the normalized values of the two points are compared. • Sel. Point Ratio—Displays the ratio of symmetric detectors with the detector with the maximum value placed in the numerator. • Varian Point Diff.—Symmetrical points are normalized to the Positive Detector and then the normalized value of the difference of the two points are compared. • Area Average—A method of calculating symmetry based on the area used by Siemens Primus. • Area—Two symmetrical points are selected. Then the area under the graph from the first point to the center is compared to the area under the graph from the center to the second point. 5 Project to 100cm When this box is checked, all loaded profiles are adjusted to the user supplied checkbox SSD from the file header before analysis and display. When this box is not checked, the data is used as is. Figure 3-37. On Graph Display Toolbar (Continued) Note: A Profiler 1 does not have a CAX detector. If you open a Profiler 1 file and ‘CAX Point Difference’ is selected in the On Graph Display toolbar, the CPD Symmetry result will display 0.0%. In addition, the Symmetry result in the Analysis panel may display the message “Area out of bounds”. Legend Panel The Legend panel on the left side of the screen (Figure 3-1) shows the files that you have opened. Up to 10 files may be loaded in the Legend panel at one time, the ‘Device’ file (the current PRO- FILER 2 measurement) and 9 other files. Files can be viewed singly or together, or two files can be compared. In addition to viewing the PROFILER 2 measurement, files of the following types can be opened and viewed: saved PROFILER 2 files, saved Profiler Classic files, saved IC PROFILER files, Imported Treatment Plan dose map files, and water tank measured files. Legend Panel Details Files in the Legend panel have the following characteristics: • File names are color-coded; profile graphs and analysis data are the same color. • The first item is the ‘Device,’ the current PROFILER 2 measurement. • Files appear in the order loaded; you can change the file order by dragging the column head- ing in the Header and Data views, or by dragging a file within the Legend panel. • Two files can be compared by selecting one, right-clicking the other, and selecting Compare from the context menu. • Hovering the cursor over the file displays the path to the file and the complete filename. • Holding down the CTRL key while clicking on a file will show or hide that profile in the overlay charts. The title of a hidden file is grey instead of its previously assigned color. Legend Panel 55
- 68. 1 8 2 3 4 5 9 6 7 10 11 No. Display Description 1 Device The first position on the legend panel is the device (square icon). The center of the icon is gray until collecting data, then the center of the square turns dark red. 2 Profiler1 file A Profiler 1 file shows a profiler icon and does not show the 3-digit extension. 3 PROFILER 2 or IC An IC PROFILER or PROFILER 2 file shows a profiler icon and displays the 3-char- PROFILER file acter extension (.prs, .prm, or .prc). 4 Selected file The currently selected file has a white background (appears as if the button has been pressed). 5 Multi-frame file A multi-frame file shows an icon that looks like a movie camera. The last multi- frame file to be viewed will have a dashed line below the filename. 6 Concatenated A concatenated file appears as a single file. file 7 Water tank file An imported water tank file. 8 context menu A right-click on the device in the Legend panel opens the following menu: (device) • Clear—Clears the data from this file. • Copy—Copies the file to the Windows clipboard. • Change color—Opens a color selection dialog box to select the color to be dis- played in the profile graph and legend panel. See also “Changing Colors” on page 114. • Compare—Compares the file with another open file of same type. See also “Comparing Profiles” on page 115. • Open—Displays the File Open dialog box (same as main menu). • Re-open—Displays a list of recently used files. Selecting one of these files opens it (same as main menu). 9 context menu A right-click on a file in the Legend panel opens the following menu: (open files) • Close—Closes the file and removes it from the Legend panel. • Copy—Copies the file to the Windows clipboard. • Change color—Opens a color selection dialog box to select the color to be dis- played in the profile graph and legend panel. See also “Changing Colors” on page 114. • Compare—Compares the file with another open file of same type. See also “Comparing Profiles” on page 115. • Open—Displays the File Open dialog box (same as main menu). • Re-open—Displays a list of recently used files. Selecting one of these files opens it (same as main menu). • Change Profile Selection—Displays the water tank profile selection dialog box. This context menu item is only available when right-clicking on a water tank file. • Edit Data Offsets— Displays the water tank data offsets dialog box. This con- text menu option is only available if the user right-clicks on a water tank file. 10 Tool tip display Hovering the cursor over a file displays the path to the file and the complete filename. 11 Context menu A right-click on the blank part of the Legend panel opens the following menu: (blank area) • Open—Displays the File Open dialog box (same as main menu). • Re-open—Displays a list of recently used files. Selecting one of these files opens it (same as main menu). Figure 3-38. Legend Panel Details 56 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 69. View Panel The center of the screen (View panel) has five different views: Graph, Header, Data, Beam Tuning, and Data Plot (Figure 3-39). Click the tabs at the top of the panel to switch between views. Graph view Header view Data view Beam tuning view Data plot view Figure 3-39. Graph, Header, Data, Beam Tuning, and Data Plot Views • Graph view—displays the graph of two profiles, each graph corresponds to a set of detectors. The top graph shows the 30 cm Y-axis profile; the bottom graph shows the 20 cm X-axis profile. • Header view—displays the header information for each open file. You can scroll up an down and edit the header items. • Data view—displays the actual measured values for each detector. All of the measured values for a given file are shown in a column. You can scroll up and down to check the values of indi- vidual detectors. • Beam Tuning view—provides a real-time display of a selected axis and parameter so you can see the immediate results of adjustments you make to tune the beam. • Data Plot view—provides a visual representation of beam analysis parameters over the dura- tion of the measurement. View Panel 57
- 70. Graph View To access the Graph view, click the Graph tab at the top left of the view panel (Figure 3-40). The Graph view can display the profile of an individual axis or both the X and Y axes. Use the On Graph Display toolbar to the left of the view panel to select the desired axis. See “On Graph Dis- play Toolbar” on page 54. Graph View Details The following figure provides details about the Graph view. In this example, both the X and Y axis are displayed. The graph view can also be set to display the profile of an individual axis. 12 13 1 2 11 3 4 5 12 6 7 11 8 9 10 No. Display Description 1 Graph A graph of the Y-axis or X-axis as indicated by the graph label. 2 Symmetry “Goal Posts” mark symmetry points. Double-clicking on any other point moves the marker location of the symmetry points to the new point and its mirror image. 3 Area symmetry If ‘Area Average’ or ‘Area’ is selected in the On Graph Display Result box, the shad- shading ing shows the area used to calculate area symmetry. 4 Symmetry Result The type of analysis parameter to display in the graph. The color of the analysis parameter result matches the color of the selected graph. The following analysis parameters can be selected from the On Graph Display toolbar. • None—No display. • Beam Center—The beam center is the midway point between the two linearly interpolated points in the penumbra that are at 50% of maximum dose. • Point Values —If this option is selected and the user double-clicks on the graph, the left and right value of the selected point are displayed in large font at the bottom of the graph. • CAX Point Diff.—Symmetrical points are normalized to the CAX point and then the difference of the normalized values of the two points are compared. • Local Point Diff.—Symmetrical points are normalized to the selected detector, then the normalized values of the two points are compared. • Sel. Point Ratio—Displays the ratio of symmetric detectors with the detector with the maximum value placed in the numerator. • Varian Point Diff.—Symmetrical points are normalized to the Positive Detector and then the normalized value of the difference of the two points are compared. • Area Average—A method of calculating symmetry based on the area used by Siemens Primus. • Area—Two symmetrical points are selected. Then the area under the graph from the first point to the center is compared to the area under the graph from the center to the second point. Figure 3-40. Graph View Details 58 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 71. No. Display Description 5 Horizontal scale The black centimeter scale shows the plus or minus measurements in centime- ters from the center detector. The horizontal scale with gray numbers shows physical detector numbers. These numbers are also marked on the top of the PROFILER 2. 6 Graph A graph of the Y-axis or X-axis as indicated by the graph label. 7 Symmetry “Goal Posts” mark symmetry points. Double-clicking on any other point moves the marker location of the symmetry points to the new point and its mirror image. The left and right arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to widen or narrow the ‘goal posts’ in one detector increments. 8 Area symmetry If ‘Area Average’ or ‘Area’ is selected in the On Graph Display Result box, the shad- shading ing shows the area used to calculate area symmetry. 9 Symmetry Result See item no. 4. 10 Horizontal scale The black centimeter scale shows the plus or minus measurements in centime- ters from the center detector. The horizontal scale with gray numbers shows physical detector numbers. These numbers are also marked on the top of the PROFILER 2. 11 Vertical scale The vertical scale of the graphs shows percent, dose, or counts. 12 Graph label Indicates which axis is shown in the graph. The 30-cm Y-axis array (83 detectors) or the 20-cm X-axis array (57 detectors). 13 Measurement Dots on graph show location of measurement points on graph if ‘Draw Points on points Graph’ is selected in the ‘Setup Parameters’ dialog box. Figure 3-40. Graph View Details (Continued) Data Points Measured points on the graph correspond to detector locations. Data points can be displayed on the graph if you select the Draw Points on Graph option in the ‘Setup Parameters’ dialog box. The vertical axis units corresponds to the type of data selected in the Data selection toolbar. For example, if you select Background, Calibration, Raw, or Corrected, the vertical axis will be scaled in counts. However, if you select Dose, the vertical axis will be scaled in cGy. If you select Normal- ized, the vertical axis will be scaled in % with the selected point equal to 100%. The horizontal axis shows actual detector locations in cm and detector numbers. • The actual detector numbers are listed in gray numbers above the horizontal axis. The detec- tor numbers correspond to the detector numbers marked on the PROFILER 2 overlay. • The distance markings, in cm, are shown below the horizontal axis in darker numbers. The center detector is the zero point for both axes, and the numbers increase to the right and up. Graph Scale Graphs automatically adjust their maximum values to fit the screen. This does not affect the charts in comparison mode. Zoom You can zoom in on a portion of the graph or restore an area of the graph to normal size by drag- ging the cursor, as follows: 1 To zoom in on a region of the graph, click the left mouse button and drag the cursor from left to right to draw a box over the area of interest (Figure 3-41). Graph View 59
- 72. Select a zoom area Figure 3-41. Select Zoom Area 2 Release the left mouse button and the graph scale(s) will change to the region selected by the box that you drew (Figure 3-42). Note: The program can be set up to zoom both axes or only the vertical axis. See “Setup > Parameters” on page 42. Figure 3-42. Graph View - Zoomed In 3 To restore the scale back to full size, click the left mouse button and drag the cursor right to left (opposite of zooming in). When you release the left mouse button, the graph will return to full scale. Hiding a Profile To hide a profile from being displayed in the Graph view, hold down the CTRL key while clicking on the file name in the Legend Panel. To make the profile visible again, repeat the process. 60 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 73. Normalizing the Graph When the graph is normalized the vertical scale of the graph changes to percent and the graph displays the profile detail with the highest degree of display resolution, while showing the entire profile. Normalizing helps the user to judge the relative magnitude of profile features. To normalize the graph select ‘Normalized’ from the Data toolbar. The Normalization type is selected in the ‘Setup Parameters’ dialog box. See “Setup > Parameters” on page 42. The choices are: Physical Center, Calculated Center, Maximum Value, or Selected Detector. If the user chooses Normalization by ‘Selected Detector’, they must choose the detector and axis. There are two ways to choose the detector and axis: • By selecting them manually with the ‘Normalization Params’ options in the Setup Parameters dialog box • By right-clicking a point on the graph and selecting ‘Normalize to this channel’ from the con- text menu See also “Graph View Context Menu” on page 62. If Normalization Settings Do Not Match Data Type If the normalization setting is not correct for the data type, the software will adjust the normaliza- tion as follows: • User selects normalization by calculated center but the profile analysis failed: The software uses normalization by physical center instead • User selects normalization by calculated center but the profile axis does not exist in the data set: The software uses normalization by physical center instead. • User selects normalization by selected detector, but the profile axis does not exist in the data set: The software uses normalization by physical center instead. • User selects normalization by selected detector, but the detector does not exist in the data set: If the position of the selected detector falls between 2 data points in the data set, an inter- polated value is used. Otherwise, normalization by physical center is used. On Graph Symmetry A profiles symmetry can be analyzed on the graph. The symmetry options are selected in the On Graph Display toolbar (left side of the view panel, see “On Graph Display Toolbar” on page 54.). These analysis parameters are independent of the symmetry setting in the ‘Configure Analysis’ dialog box. Double-click any point on the graph to set new points to measure symmetry. The software will calculated symmetry using the detector closest to the point where you double-clicked and its sym- metrical detector. The points are indicated by a pair of ‘goal posts’ (vertical lines), and the symmetry results are displayed at the bottom of the graph. The left and right arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to widen or narrow the ‘goal posts’ in one detector increments. Selecting another file updates the symmetry information but does not hide the goal posts. If Area or Area Average is selected in the On Graph Display toolbar, the area between the goal posts is shaded. See “Graph View Details” on page 58. Graph View 61
- 74. Graph View Context Menu Right-clicking on a graph displays a context menu. 1 2 3 4 5 No. Display Description 1 Channel The channel number. This will display N/A for a water tank file. 2 Normalize to this Sets the selected detector (channel) to 100%. Selecting this option causes the fol- Channel lowing to occur: • the ‘Normalization Type’ in the Setup Parameters dialog box is changed to ‘Se- lected Detector’ • the Data toolbar setting is automatically changed to ‘Normalized’ • the software automatically calculates the mirror detector • the L/R Symmetry value is recalculated The ‘Normalize to this Channel’ menu option is always enabled. 3 Detector The selected detector and the symmetrical detector. 4 Point values The left and right values for the selected point. 5 Symmetry The symmetry calculated between the two points. The type of symmetry is selected in the ‘On Graph Display Result’ list to the left of the graph. Figure 3-43. Graph View Context Menu Header View To access the Header view, click the Header tab at the top of the View panel (Figure 3-44). The Header view displays the header information for each loaded file. Data for each file is arranged in columns with the description of each row on the left side. This is the same information entered in the ‘Edit Header’ dialog box. See also “Edit > Edit Header” on page 32. 1 2 3 62 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 75. No. Display Description 1 Filenames The files that are currently open in the PROFILER 2 software. The colored filename is the currently selected file. 2 Header fields The header data in each file. 3 Scroll bars Vertical and horizontal scroll bars appear if some data is not visible. Use the scroll bars to view the hidden data. Figure 3-44. Header view • The color of the filename in the Header view matches the color of the file name in the legend panel, the corresponding graph, and the corresponding Analysis panel results. In the Header view, only the currently selected file name is in color; the other file names are black. • Drag the heading of any column left or right to move the item to a new location. This makes it easy to compare two files side by side. Note that the dragged file also moves to a new loca- tion on the Legend panel. • Drag the edges of the column to make the column wider or narrower. • If the screen is too small to show all items or files at the same time, scroll bars appear. Drag the scroll bars to see the hidden data. • To edit header data, double-click on an item to edit. This opens the ‘Edit Header’ dialog box for the file. Or, you can select Edit > Edit Header from the menu to display the dialog box. Copy and Paste Header Fields To copy header fields, click and drag over the fields you would like to copy to select them. Then, right-click on the selected fields and select Copy from the context menu. The fields are copied to the Windows clipboard in tab delimited format. Once the header fields have been copied to the Windows clipboard they can be pasted into any text editor or spreadsheet application. Header View Context Menu Right-clicking on any cell in the grid displays a context menu. The menu options are Copy and Edit Header. Selecting Copy copies the selected cells to the clipboard in tab delimited format. Select- ing Edit Header displays the ‘Edit Header’ dialog box for the clicked file type. Header View 63
- 76. Data View To access the Data view, click the Data tab at the top left of the View panel (Figure 3-45). The Data view shows individual values for all diodes in the array plotted in the Graph view. Use the On Graph Display toolbar to the left of the View panel to select which array is displayed. See “On Graph Display Toolbar” on page 54. 1 2 3 7 6 5 4 No. Display Description 1 Axis label The selected axis. 2 Filenames The names of the loaded files. The one in color is the currently selected file. 3 Detector details Double click on a detector value to display the details of the detector in a pop-up box. Single left-click the box again to hide it. The box shows: • the detector position and number • the number of the symmetrical detector • the calculated values for the type of symmetry selected in the ‘On Graph Dis- play Result’ box. 4 Scroll bars Vertical and horizontal scroll bars appear if some data is not visible. Drag the scroll bars to view hidden data. 5 Detector position The position and number of the detector whose data is shown on the table. and number 6 Detector values Recorded value for each detector in the file (column) at location (row). 7 Context menu Right-clicking on a detector value displays the following menu options: • Copy—copies selected cells to the Windows Clipboard. • Channel number (N/A for a water tank file) • Normalize Here—applies a Normalization setting of ‘Selected Detector’, over- riding the previous setting. • Detector position, detector number, and the symmetrical detector • The calculated values for the analysis parameter selected in the ‘On Graph Dis- play’ toolbar. Figure 3-45. Data View Details • Each loaded file is shown in a column. The first column represents the device (current mea- surement) and each subsequent column represents a loaded file. Each row represents a detector in the selected axis (the detector number and location are shown). 64 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 77. • If the selected file has different detector spacing and identification (for example, if a Profiler 1 file is shown next to a PROFILER 2 file), the detector identification is for the selected file only. In other files that do not use the same spacing, a “—” is inserted in each cell. • Right-clicking on a value in the Data view displays a context menu (Figure 3-45). • The heading of any column can be dragged horizontally to a new location for easier compar- ison of two files side by side. Note that the dragged file also moves to a new location in the Legend panel. • Use the Data toolbar to display the type of data displayed (counts, dose, normalized values, etc.) Data View 65
- 78. Beam Tuning View To access the Beam Tuning view, click the Beam Tuning tab at the top left of the View panel (Fig- ure 3-46). The Beam Tuning view displays dynamic changes in beam characteristics to let you see the immediate results of adjustments to the linac. The update period of this view is 125 ms. The Beam Tuning view displays one axis and one analysis parameter. The axis and analysis param- eter to be displayed are selected with the pull-down lists in the upper left corner of the view. The selected axis profile is shown along with its inverted image. The selected analysis parameter is shown in large type at the bottom of the display. A percent difference graph is shown on the right side of the center line. This graph shows the per- cent difference (symmetry) between mirror image detector pairs in the axis. The scale of the graph is set by the Symmetry Range parameter in the upper right corner of the view. The detector posi- tion is shown in the lower left corner of the screen. 1 2 3 4 5 7 13 8 9 10 11 12 No. Item Description 1 Axis Selects X or Y axis. 2 Analysis parameter Selects one of the following analysis parameters: • flatness • field symmetry • pt. symmetry • field size • beam center • left penumbra width • right penumbra width 3 Symmetry Range Sets the symmetry scale (right side of the graph) from the following choices: ±1%, ±5%, ±10%, and ±20% 4 Title A title which appears in the printout. 5 Legend Graph legend. 7 Profile graph along This graph is the profile (red) of the current beam along the selected selected axis axis. The graph updates dynamically showing changes in the beam due to tuning adjustments. 8 Inverted profile graph The inverted graph (blue) is the same as the profile of the selected axis except inverted 180 degrees to show differences in symmetry between the left and right sides of the beam. This graph also updates dynamically to show changes in the beam due to tuning. 9 Percent difference scale The scale set by the Symmetry Range parameter, item 3. Figure 3-46. Beam Tuning View 66 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 79. No. Item Description 10 Percent difference graph This graph (purple) shows the percent difference (symmetry) between mirror image detector pairs in the axis. The scale of the graph is set by the Symmetry Range parameter (item 3). The graph updates dynamically with beam changes. 11 Centimeter scale along Centimeter scale along the selected axis. axis 12 Selected parameter The numerical value of the Analysis parameter (item 2). The parameter display updates dynamically with beam changes. 13 Graph scale Scale and units for the selected data type, selected in the Data toolbar. Figure 3-46. Beam Tuning View (Continued) Beam Tuning View 67
- 80. Data Plot View To access the Data Plot view, click the Data Plot tab at the top left of the View panel (Figure 3-47). The Data Plot view provides a visual display of beam analysis parameters over the duration of the measurement. It can be used to compare beam characteristics along both sides of the axis, to ana- lyze a pair of detectors over time, or to analyze a specific detector over time. All data plots use instantaneous rate mode. The Data Plot view is only for multi-frame files or real- time device data. The plot options in the upper corners control the type of plot to display for each axis. The available options are: Flatness, Beam Center, Field Size, Point Symmetry, Dose per Pulse, Pulses/Sec, Dose Rate, or Reference Value. The user can select a specific detector for Point Symmetry, Dose per Pulse, or Dose Rate. 1 2 3 12 4 5 6 7 11 10 8 9 No. Item Description 1 Plot Settings Opens the ‘Plot Settings’ dialog box to configure the left axis plot. See “Plot Settings Details” on page 69. This dialog box is used to select the axis to be displayed, the detector pair, and to enable averaging, if desired, for a dose at depth plot. 2 Copy Plot to Clipboard This option copies the plotted data to the clipboard in text format. 3 Plot Settings Opens the ‘Plot Settings’ dialog box to configure the right axis plot. See “Plot Settings Details” on page 69. This dialog box is used to select the axis to be displayed, the detector pair, and to enable averaging, if desired, for a dose at depth plot. 4 Right Axis Plot This is the chart for the right side of the selected axis. It is shown in blue. Following are the analysis parameter options for the right axis plot: • None (leaves the axis blank) • Flatness (%) • Beam Center (cm) • Field Size (cm) • Point Symmetry (%) • Dose per Pulse (corrected counts per pulse) • Pulses/Sec • Dose Rate (corrected counts per minute) • Reference Value (used with an external reference detector) 5 Profile The currently selected profile. Figure 3-47. Data Plot View 68 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 81. No. Item Description 6 Legend The color legend for the left and right axis. 7 Scale Data scale for right axis plot. 8 Plot points Plot points for right axis. 9 Time Time scale 10 Plot points Plot points for left axis. 11 Scale Data scale for left axis plot. 12 Left Axis Plot This is the chart for the left side of the selected axis. It is shown in red. Following are the analysis parameter options for the left axis plot: • None (leaves the axis blank) • Flatness (%) • Beam Center (cm) • Field Size (cm) • Point Symmetry (%) • Dose per Pulse (corrected counts per pulse) (cGy/pulse) • Pulses/Sec (pulses per second) • Dose Rate (corrected counts per minute) (cGy/min) • Reference Value (for an external reference detector) Figure 3-47. Data Plot View (Continued) Note: When a non multi-frame file is selected, the Data Plot view displays “No Data Available”. Plot Settings Details The ‘Plot Settings’ dialog box allows the user to configure the plot. 1 2 3 4 5 Group Item No. Description General Axis 1 Select X or Y axis. Options Detectors 2 Select a specific detector pair (if applicable). The default is CAX. Set for Both Plots 3 If this checkbox is selected, the axis and detector selections are applied to both the left and right plots. Depth 1mm Depth Averaging 4 This option is only visible if the selected file has TPR data or if Dose the attached device supports an ultrasonic sensor. When this Options option is enabled, a single data point is generated for each mm of depth, with all readings that fall within that mm being averaged. Note: The results are displayed in mm if the ultrasonic sensor has been calibrated, or in voltage if the sensor has not been calibrated. Gaussian Smoothing 5 This option is not enabled in the current software release. distance 6 This option is not enabled in the current software release. intensity 7 This option is not enabled in the current software release. Figure 3-48. Plot Settings Dialog Box Data Plot View 69
- 82. Analysis Panel The Analysis panel (Figure 3-49) displays calculated analysis of the selected file. If you select a new file, the values are recalculated for that file. Depending on the setup, the analysis panel can display the following while the beam is on: • Symmetry (beam steering) • Flatness (energy adjustment) • Light to Radiation Field coincidence (overlay to penumbra) • Linac pulse count for each measurement • Dynamic wedge angle (X-ray) • CAX positioning (beam center • Electron energy (with wedge) • Output (CAX dose) • Field size • Field shift • Penumbra width Analysis Panel Details • The Analysis panel consists of three groups. The upper group applies to the Y-axis, the lower group applies to the X-axis, and the center group lists the analysis parameters that are not axis-specific. • The color of the analysis values matches the color of the selected file in the Legend panel. • Right-clicking on one the three groups in the Analysis panel displays a context menu with a menu item for each analysis parameter in the group. You can toggle the visibility of any param- eter. The checked parameters are visible. • The context menu for the analysis panel has an Edit option which allows you to edit individual analysis parameters via a set of simple dialog boxes. Changing settings in these dialog boxes is equivalent to changing the analysis parameters in the ‘Configure Analysis’ dialog box (Setup >Analysis). • The context menu for the analysis panel has a Set Energy option which allows you to choose a different machine energy. • Analysis fonts can be made larger by checking the Large Analysis Fonts option in the Setup Parameters dialog box (Setup > Parameters). • The Analysis Panel can be moved to either the left or right side of the main screen using the arrow buttons at the top left of the panel. • Analysis parameters can be dragged onto each other in order to rearrange their display order. Dragging a parameter upwards in the list inserts that parameter before the parameter it is dropped onto. Dragging a parameter downwards in the list inserts that parameter after the parameter it is dropped onto. When analyzing a file you can select which algorithms to use, whether to take the base value as the maximum value of the profile, or the value at the center line, the percentage to apply to the base value, and the percentage of the field to use from a set of predefined flatness/symmetry con- figurations. These predefined configurations are designed to match specifications from linac manufacturers and standards organizations. Note: CAX Dose and CAX Ratio are useful for comparing two measurements at two dif- ferent gantry angles when the PROFILER 2 is mounted in the IMF. See also “Analysis of a Profile” on page 160. 70 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 83. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Y-axis values 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Values that are not 16 specific to either axis 17 18 X-axis values 19 Group Item No. Description Position Left/Right 1 Moves the analysis panel to the left or right side of the screen. See Icons Arrow icons “Changing the Analysis Panel Position” on page 78. Axes icons 2 These icons are only active when all four axes are displayed in the Graph or Data views. They are used to select whether the analysis panel dis- plays the X and Y analysis results. Y Axis Field Size 3 Field size is the width of the field in cm (as measured between the two Parameters linearly interpolated points of 50% of maximum dose in the penumbra). Beam Center 4 The beam center is the location of the calculated beam center (the mid- way point between the two linearly interpolated points in the penumbra that are at 50% of maximum dose.) Light: Rad 5 The light/radiation field coincidence is a measure of how closely the light Coinc.(-Y) field matches the radiation field. The number in parentheses in the head- ing shows the nominal width of the field in cm. The left box shows the value for the left side of the axis. The positive and negative values show the difference between the radiation field and the light field at each edge of the axis. A positive value indicates the radiation edge falls outside of the light field while a negative value indicates the radiation edge falls inside the light field. Note: If the field size in the file header does not match the field size that was used to collect the measurement, a “Field Size Mismatch” message is displayed. Light: Rad 6 The light/radiation field coincidence along the positive side of the Y axis. Coinc.(+Y) Penumbra (-Y) 7 Penumbra width of the field at the axis. The number in parentheses in the heading shows the percentages of maximum dose used to define the penumbra width. The left box shows the value for the left side of the axis. Note: Displays ‘N/A (Smoothed’ if Smooth Data is selected in the Control menu. Penumbra 8 Penumbra width along the positive side of the Y axis. (+Y) Figure 3-49. Analysis Panel Details Analysis Panel 71
- 84. Group Item No. Description Y Axis Flatness 9 Flatness of the radiation profile, expressed as a ± percent value and cal- Parameters percent culated over a specified portion of the field region, typically 80%. The number in parentheses in the heading is the percent of field region for (Continued) flatness over which flatness is calculated. Type of 10 Type of flatness selected: Variance, Ratio (IEC), or Varian. flatness Symmetry 11 Calculated symmetry (percent) for the type of symmetry analysis that you percent selected. The number in parentheses following the heading is the percent of the field region for symmetry over which the symmetry is calculated. Note: A Profiler 1 does not have a CAX detector. If you open a Profiler 1 file and ‘CAX Point Difference’ is selected in the On Graph Display toolbar, an “Area Out of Bounds” message may be displayed here. Also, the CPD Symmetry result will display 0.0%. Type of 12 Type of symmetry calculation used as selected in Setup > Analysis: CAX symmetry Point Difference, Local Point Difference, Ratio (IEC), Point Average, Area Average, and Area. Horn %Diff 13 Gives the percentage difference calculation between a photon horn posi- (-Y) tion and the CAX, where a horn position is simply the point of maximum dose between the Beam Center and the edge of the field. Note: Displays ‘N/A (Smoothed’ if Smooth Data is selected in the Control menu. Horn %Diff 14 Horn position along the positive side of the Y axis. (+Y) Parameters CAX Dose 15 Measured dose at CAX in cGy. not specific to either axis CAX Ratio 16 Ratio between CAX values of two compared files (only applicable to comparison). Wedge angle 17 Calculated angle in degrees of the fixed, dynamic, or virtual wedge (if a wedge is selected.) Config. 18 Analysis configuration setting. Standard settings are Varian 2100C, Varian, Siemens, IEC, and Elekta. If Custom is selected, select individual values in the Configuration Analysis dialog box. X Axis 19 Same as the parameters above for ’Y-Axis parameters’, except relating to Parameters the X axis. Figure 3-49. Analysis Panel Details (Continued) Note: When viewing an electron beam profile, the ‘90% Positions’ parameter is dis- played instead of the ‘Horn % Diff’ parameter. The “90% Positions’ parameter gives the distance between the center of the beam and the 90% dose position. If ‘Smooth Data’ is selected in the Control menu, the 90% Positions parameter will display ‘N/A (Smoothed)’. Note: When measuring electron energy with a wedge, the Y-axis values of the Analysis Panel displays “Electron Energy” instead of Flatness, and “Energy Params” instead of Symmetry. “Electron Energy” displays the electron energy used for calculation (i.e., Ep0: 13.54 indicates 13.54 MeV), and the “D” value indicates the dose depth at xx% in cm (i.e., D80: 4.70 indicates the dose depth at 80% was 4.70 cm). “Energy Params” displays the name of the energy wedge calibration used to analyze the exposure (lists “default” if the default calibration file was used), and the type of calculation used: slope or intercept. Changing the Analysis Panel Elements Right-click on any of the three groups in the Analysis panel to display the context menu (Figure 3- 50). The menu lists the analysis panel elements and indicates the one that are selected for display with a check mark. Check the elements which should appear in the Analysis panel, or un-check any elements that should not appear. This data is updated during normal operation as well as when viewing the saved profiles. 72 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 85. Figure 3-50. Changing the Analysis Panel Elements Editing the Analysis Panel Parameters 1 Right-click on one of the three groups in the analysis panel to display the context menu options (Figure 3-50). 2 Choose Edit from the context menu and select the parameter to be edited. This will display a simple dialog box to edit the selected parameter. Changing settings in these dialog box is equivalent to changing the analysis parameter in the Configure Analysis dialog box (Setup > Analysis). Figure 3-51. Edit Parameters options Edit Field Parameters The dialog box shown below is displayed when the user selects Edit > Field Parameters from the Analysis panel context menu (top or bottom group of parameters). Item Sub-item Description Base intensity Max Base intensity point for defining the field region is set to the value of the point detector with the maximum intensity. Cax Base intensity point for defining the field region is set to the value of the detector located at the central axis. Intensity Cutoff The intensity cutoff percentage (50 to 90%) of the base intensity point used for defining the field region of the exposure. Figure 3-52. Edit Field Parameters Analysis Panel 73
- 86. Edit Penumbra Parameters The dialog box shown below is displayed when the user selects Edit > Penumbra Params from the Analysis panel context menu (top or bottom group of parameters). Item Description Penumbra Percentage of the maximum detector value (base intensity point, Max or CAX) that defines Bottom the bottom of the penumbra region (typically 20%). Penumbra Top Percentage of the maximum detector value (base intensity point, Max or CAX) that defines the top of the penumbra region (typically 80%). Figure 3-53. Edit Penumbra Parameters Edit Light Field and SSD Parameters The dialog box shown below is displayed when the user selects Edit > Light Field Params from the Analysis panel context menu (top or bottom group of parameters). Item Sub-item Description Symmetric Y and X If the collimator settings are symmetrical, check the Symmetric Collimator Collimators box and fill in the X and Y values: • X—setting of symmetric X axis pair of collimators. • Y—setting of symmetric Y axis pair of collimators. Left, Right, If the collimator jaws are asymmetrical, uncheck the Symmetric Collimator Top, Bottom box and enter the setting for each jaw. • Left—setting of asymmetric – X axis collimator jaw. • Right—setting of asymmetric + X axis collimator jaw. • Top —setting of asymmetric + Y axis collimator jaw. • Bottom—setting of asymmetric – Y axis collimator jaw. SSD Source to surface distance for the selected file, in cm. Actual Field Size Actual size of light field. It is calculated from the selected SSD and Colli- mator values. Figure 3-54. Edit Light Field and SSD Parameters Edit Flatness Parameters The dialog box shown below is displayed when the user selects Edit > Flatness Params from the Analysis panel context menu (top or bottom group of parameters). 74 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 87. Item Sub-item Description Field Region Percentage of the field region over which flatness is calculated. Flatness Variance A method of calculating flatness based on the average between the max- imum value of a chamber in the field region and the minimum value of a chamber in the field region. See also “Flatness Calculation by Variance” on page 163. Ratio (IEC) The method for calculating flatness per IEC Standard 976. See also “Ratio (IEC) Flatness Calculation” on page 164. Varian A method of calculating flatness typically used by Varian and others. See also “Varian Flatness Calculation” on page 164. Figure 3-55. Edit Flatness Parameters Edit Symmetry Parameters The dialog box shown below is displayed when the user selects Edit > Symmetry Params from the Analysis panel context menu (top or bottom group of parameters). Item Sub-item Description Field Region Percentage of the field region used to calculate symmetry. (Sym) Symmetry (dis- CAX Point Symmetrical points are normalized to the CAX point and then the differ- played in Analysis Difference ence of the normalized values of the two points are compared. See also panel) “CAX Point Difference Symmetry” on page 165. Local Point Symmetrical points are normalized to the selected detector, then the nor- Diff. malized values of the two points are compared. See also “Local Point Difference Symmetry” on page 165. Ratio (IEC) A method of calculating symmetry per IEC Standard 976 that finds the dose ratio of all symmetric detectors in the field size, always using the larger of the two numbers as the numerator. The maximum value in this series is the IEC number. See also “Point Ratio (Ratio IEC) Symmetry” on page 165. Varian Point Symmetrical points are normalized to the Positive Detector and then the Difference normalized value of the difference of the two points are compared. See also “Varian Point Difference Symmetry” on page 166. Area Average A method of calculating symmetry based on the area used by Siemens Pri- mus. See also “Area Average Symmetry” on page 166. Area Two symmetrical points are selected. Then the area under the graph from the first point to the center is compared to the area under the graph from the center to the second point. See also “Area Symmetry” on page 167. Figure 3-56. Edit Symmetry Parameters Edit Energy Analysis Parameters The dialog box shown below is displayed when the user selects Edit > Energy Analysis Params from the Analysis panel context menu (top or bottom group of parameters). Analysis Panel 75
- 88. Item Sub-item Description Energy Analysis Slope Selects slope method of electron energy analysis. Style Intercept Selects intercept method of electron energy analysis. Calibration Automatic Automatically selects the Electron Energy calibration to use based on Selection comparison of the heading data. If a comparable heading cannot be found, it uses default values. Selected Allows you to select a specific Electron Energy calibration from the adja- cent pull-down list. Figure 3-57. Edit Energy Analysis Parameters Edit Wedge Parameters The dialog box shown below is displayed when the user selects Edit > Wedge Params from the Analysis panel context menu (center group of parameters). Item Description D1 (cm) Depth 1 used in the Percent Dose Depth (PDD) calculation for photon wedge calculations. D2 (cm) Depth 2 used in the Percent Dose Depth (PDD) calculation for photon wedge calculations. Figure 3-58. Edit Wedge Parameters Edit Configuration Parameters The dialog box shown below is displayed when the user selects Edit > Configuration from the Analysis panel context menu (center group of parameters). This dialog box allows the user to select an analysis configuration that matches the specifications of a specific machine manufac- turer (Varian, Elekta, Siemens, etc.) When the user selects an option in this window, the Analysis panel and the ‘Configure Analysis’ dialog box are updated to match the selected machine specifications. Item Sub-item Description Auto Select If this box is checked the software will select the correct configuration Config based on the Machine description located in the header file. (Machine description should show Varian 2100, other Varian models, Siemens mod- els, or IEC requirements.) Figure 3-59. Edit Configuration Parameters 76 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 89. Item Sub-item Description Selected Custom A user-defined custom analysis configuration is selected. Varian 2100C Analysis configuration is set to Varian specifications for Varian 2100C: • Penumbra = 80/20 • Field Region = 50% MAX dose point * 80% • Flatness Type: Variance • Symmetry Type: CAX Point Difference Varian Analysis configuration is set to Varian specifications for Varian HCIP302: • Penumbra = 80/20 • Field Region = 50% MAX dose point * 80% • Flatness Type: Variance • Symmetry Type: Area Siemens Analysis configuration is set to Siemens specifications for PRIMUS: • Penumbra = 80/20 • Field Region (Flat) = 50% CAX dose point * 80% • Field Region (Sym) = 50% CAX dose point • Flatness Type: Variance • Symmetry Type: Area Average IEC* Analysis configuration set similar to International Electrotechnical Com- mission (IEC): • Penumbra = 80/20 • Field Region Definition: • Electron: 90% MAX dose point - 2 cm • Photon: 50% dose point • -2cm for Field Size 5..10cm • -FS*0.2 for Field Size 10..30cm • -6cm for FS > 30cm Elekta Analysis configuration is set to Elekta specifications. • Penumbra = 80/20 • Field Region Definition: • Electron: 90% MAX dose point - 2 cm • Photon: 50% dose point • -2cm for Field Size 5..10cm • -FS*0.2 for Field Size 10..30cm • -6cm for FS > 30cm Figure 3-59. Edit Configuration Parameters Setting the Machine Energy in the Header The machine energy in the file header can be modified from the context menu in the Analysis panel. 1 Right-click on one of the three groups in the analysis panel to display the context menu options (Figure 3-50). 2 Choose Set Energy from the context menu and select the machine energy. The options are 6 MeV, 9 MeV, 12 MeV, 20 MeV, 6 MV, 10 MV, or Other. Figure 3-60. Set Energy Options 3 If you select Other, the following dialog box is displayed. Analysis Panel 77
- 90. Figure 3-61. Select Energy 4 Select the machine energy and energy type, and then click OK. Changing the Analysis Panel Position To move the Analysis Panel to either the left or right side of the window, click one of the arrow buttons at the top of the Analysis Panel. Put the Analysis panel where it is most convenient. Right Arrow buttons Left Figure 3-62. Moving the Analysis panel Hiding Items Use the right-click menu to hide an item from the Analysis Panel. 1 Right-click the Analysis panel to display the context menu. 2 Clear the check marks from the items you do not want to see. Drag and Drop Positioning Note: To ‘Drag’ an item, place the cursor over it, click and hold the left mouse button, move the cursor to a new position. To ‘Drop’ it, release the left mouse button. You can drag and drop files and analysis items as follows: • In Legend Panel—dragging and dropping a file within the Legend Panel creates a new copy of the file. If you close the file or the application, you are prompted to save the copy to a new file or to discard it. • In View Panel with Header or Data selected—dragging and dropping the label of a file at the top of the column moves the file to a new position. This is how you can rearrange the order of the open files. Note that the files also change position in the Legend Panel. • In Analysis Panel—drag and drop any analysis item to any new position in its group. 78 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 91. 1 To copy a file—Drag it to the empty space in the Legend Panel. This creates a complete new copy of the file. 2 To create a file from a measurement—Drag the measurement in the “Device” location to an empty space in the Legend Panel. This creates a file containing the measured data in the device location. 3 To rearrange files—Drag the title of the column in the Header or Data views. This causes the files to be rearranged in the Legend Panel and in the View panel. 4 To rearrange analysis items—Drag and drop them to the new position in their group. Drag and Drop Positioning 79
- 92. This page is intentionally left blank. 80 Section 3. About PROFILER 2 Software
- 93. 4 Calibrating the System Array Calibration Before using the PROFILER 2, perform an array calibration. This procedure calculates a sensitivity correction factor for each detector using a patented wide radiation field technique. It is very simple and takes only a few minutes to complete. The array calibration files are saved and can be applied to subsequent measurements. Array Calibration Fixture The Calibration Fixture, P/N 1174350, is a Lucite tray that cradles the PROFILER 2 such that the scattering at the array edges remains constant when the PROFILER 2 is shifted during the calibra- tion steps. To use the calibration fixture, set it up as follows: 1 Place the two extension blocks along the edge of the fixture so that the screw heads fit into the matching holes (Figure 4-1). (Extension blocks are necessary for the longer array of the PROFILER 2, but are removed when using the fixture with the Sun Nuclear MapCHECK instrument.) Figure 4-1. Attaching Extension Blocks to Calibration Fixture 2 Unscrew the leveling feet and set the PROFILER 2 instrument inside the fixture. Note: Leveling feet are not required on the calibration fixture because the calibration procedure is not sensitive to small changes in device level. Practically no error is intro- duced during calibration by not leveling the device. The calibration procedure compensates if the array is not exactly perpendicular to the beam axis. The array cali- bration procedure assumes that the beam profile stays the same from one exposure to the next. The calibration procedure doesn’t care what the beam shape looks like so long as it is consistent throughout the calibration exposures. If the beam shape remains consistent, a couple degrees of level error of the couch is not significant. When performing routine measurements with the instrument however, be sure to reattach the leveling feet since a 5 mm discrepancy in detector height will cause a 1% difference in dose due to beam divergence (1/r 2 correction). 3 Push the PROFILER 2 up against the end of the fixture (Figure 4-2). Array Calibration 81
- 94. Figure 4-2. Push PROFILER 2 up against the end of the Calibration Fixture 4 Set up the PROFILER 2 and accelerator as described below and perform the normal calibra- tion steps. Be sure to reset the SSD (Source to Surface Distance) after placing the PROFILER 2 in the fixture, since the fixture raises the PROFILER 2 surface closer to the beam source. Background Measurements Automatic Background The PROFILER 2 automatically takes a background measurement for 60 seconds whenever the software is launched. The measurement is used to calculate a background correction factor for each detector. During the background measurement, the PROFILER 2 measures the electrical current in each detector circuit, calculates a background rate, and stores each rate in memory. After a measure- ment exposure, the PROFILER 2 calculates a correction value for each detector. The calculated background counts are subtracted from the measured raw counts for each detector. Manual Background A background measurement can be collected manually using the following procedure. Possible reasons for a manual background measurement include the following: • The PROFILER 2 was not connected when the software was launched. • Actual background conditions have changed and need to be re-measured. • Gain setting has changed. 1 Select Tools > Collect Background from the menu. The ‘Collect Background’ dialog box opens. See “Tools > Collect Background” on page 35. 2 Select the desired length of time for the background measurement (minimum setting is 30 seconds; maximum setting is 120 seconds). 3 Click Start and wait for the background to be completed. A progress bar shows the status. 4 Click Close to apply the background and exit background collection. Array Calibration Conditions If one is primarily concerned with the consistency of the profile, dose output, timing or symmetry type measurements, it is acceptable to use one array calibration for all electron energies and one array calibration for all photon energies with the induced noise levels less than +/-0.5% regardless of buildup (0-10cm) or SDD (80-120cm). For optimum results, array calibration should be performed under the same conditions as the mea- surements that will be made (same buildup, energy, SDD, etc.). 82 Section 4. Calibrating the System
- 95. Array Calibration Procedure Calibration Setup 1 Install the PROFILER 2 in the Calibration Fixture, if desired. 2 Set a nominal gain (4 is the default value) on the toolbar for a 200 MU/min exposure. • If you change the gain, collect a new background as instructed in “Manual Background” on page 82. • If you get an overrange or underrange indication after the first exposure, change the gain appropriately and repeat background measurement and the first exposure. 3 Click Tools > Calibrate Array. The ‘Array Calibration’ dialog box opens. Note: For screen details see “Tools > Calibrate Array” on page 36. Figure 4-3. Array Calibration, Setup 4 Position the PROFILER 2 according to the on-screen instructions: • SSD set at 100 cm (to the surface of the PROFILER 2) for photons, or 110 cm (to the top surface of the PROFILER 2) for electrons. • Collimator setting at 35 x 35 cm for photons; the 25 x 25 cone inserted for electrons. • The +Y axis facing the “gun” (–Y axis toward “target”) • Cross hairs centered on the center detector (Y=42, X=29) 5 Enter the following information under Beam Setup: • Beam Energy = energy you want for this calibration. • Type = Photon or Electron. • Warmup Pulses = 500 minimum. This allows the machine and electronics to stabilize at the beginning of each step. If your machine requires significant time to stabilize, select a higher number. 6 Click the magnifying glass button (Figure 4-3) to display a 3D image of the PROFILER 2 that shows the proper orientation in relation to the machine. If the ‘Lasers’ checkbox is selected, the screen will also display red lines to simulate laser cross hairs. Array Calibration Procedure 83
- 96. Calibration Steps Overview PROFILER 2 array calibration requires four exposures, labeled A through D. • For the step A exposure, center the cross hairs on the detector 42, the array center, with the +Y axis toward the couch foot. • For the step B exposure, ROTATE the PROFILER 2 180 degrees clockwise and again center the cross hairs on the center detector. • For the step C exposure, from Step B position, SHIFT the PROFILER 2 a distance of 4 mm from step B in the –Y direction. • For the step D exposure, from the Step B position, SHIFT the PROFILER 2 a distance of 4 mm in the -X direction. Finally, examine the profiles, verify that the calibration is good, and save the results to a calibration file. Note: The blue lines on the PROFILER 2 top surface show where to locate the center of the cross hairs for steps C and D. Step A 1 Press the Begin button to start the calibration. 2 Read and follow the on-screen directions for Step A (Figure 4-4). Note: For screen details see “Array Calibration Dialog Box (During Calibration)” on page 38. Figure 4-4. Array Calibration, Step A 3 Verify that: • The SSD measured by the Optical Distance Indicator (ODI) on the accelerator to the surface of the PROFILER 2 is 100 cm. (Software accounts for the additional 1 cm depth of the detectors below the top of the instrument.) • The cross hairs are centered on detector 42, the center detector, and aligned parallel with the X and Y axes. • The +Y axis is pointed toward the couch foot (away from the gantry). 84 Section 4. Calibrating the System
- 97. • Collimator is set to 35 x 35 cm for photons; the 25 x 25 cone is inserted for electrons. This field size ensures that all detectors in the 32.8 cm Y-axis array are irradiated with a full strength beam in all steps while still protecting the electronics from being irradiated. Note: To calibrate with a small field, see “Calculating Calibrated Detectors for Small Fields” on page 93. 4 Click the Start button. The beam indicator on the screen turns red. 5 Set the accelerator for a minimum 200 MU dose (200 cGy) and turn on the beam. The beam strength is displayed on the screen. 6 When the beam turns off, click the Stop button. The instructions for Step B are displayed. Figure 4-5. Array Calibration, Step B Instructions Step B 1 Read and follow the on-screen instructions for Step B. 2 ROTATE the PROFILER 2 180 degrees CLOCKWISE so that the +Y axis is pointed toward the gantry. 3 Align the cross hairs on the center detector (42). 4 Click the Start button. The beam indicator on the screen turns red. 5 Turn on the beam and deliver a 200 cGy dose. The beam strength is displayed on the screen. 6 When the beam turns off, click the Stop button. The instructions for Step C are displayed. 7 If the on-screen diagram is not zoomed in as shown in the figure below, click the magnifying glass button to zoom in on the diagram. Array Calibration Procedure 85
- 98. Figure 4-6. Array Calibration, Step C Step C 1 Read and follow the on-screen instructions for Step B. 2 From the position of step “B,” SHIFT the PROFILER 2 in the -Y direction a distance of 4mm so that the cross hairs are centered on detector 43 on the Y axis. 3 Align the cross hairs as shown in the diagram in the calibration window for Step C (Figure 4- 6). • Use the blue alignment marks labeled “C” on the PROFILER 2 surface to help you line up the cross hairs. 4 Click the Start button. The beam indicator on the screen turns red. 5 Turn on the beam and deliver the 200 cGy dose. The beam strength is displayed on the screen. 6 When the beam turns off, click the Stop button. The instructions for Step D are displayed. 86 Section 4. Calibrating the System
- 99. Figure 4-7. Array Calibration, Step D Step D 1 Read and follow the on-screen instructions for Step B. 2 From the position of step “B,” SHIFT the PROFILER 2 in the -X direction a distance of 4mm so that the cross hairs are centered on detector 30 on the X axis. 3 Align the cross hairs as shown in the calibration window for Step D (Figure 4-7). • Use the blue alignment marks labeled “D” on the PROFILER 2 surface to help you line up the cross hairs. 4 Click the Start button. The beam indicator on the screen turns red. 5 Turn on the beam and deliver the 200 cGy dose. The beam strength is displayed on the screen. 6 When the beam turns off, click the Stop button. The Results tab of the Array Calibration dialog box is activated. Array Calibration Procedure 87
- 100. Viewing the Array Calibration Results After completing step D of the on-screen array calibration instructions, the display automatically switches to the Results view. The two buttons at the upper left of the window let you choose which axis to view (X or Y), and the four check boxes (A, B, C, and D) are used to view profiles of the calibration data obtained in steps A through D. The detector locations are displayed at the along the bottom edge of the graph. Figure 4-8. Calibration Results View To zoom in on the detector variations, click the left mouse button and drag over the area you want to examine more closely. See “Zoom” on page 59. 1 Click the X and Y buttons to display the profiles along the X- and Y-axes. 2 Examine the profiles for appearance (Figure 4-8). The curve should represent the radiation profile of the machine output along the selected axis, assuming PROFILER 2’s +Y axis is on the gantry axis. 3 Based on your analysis of the profiles, click one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen: • Click Close to close the calibration without saving. • Click Print to print a report of the calibration. • Click Save to Flash button to save the array calibration to non-volatile PROFILER 2 flash memory. See “Saving Array Calibration to Flash Memory” below. • Click Save to File button to save the array calibration to a file that you can apply to measurements. See “Saving the Array Calibration File” below. • Click Save for Atlas button to save the array calibration file in a format that is compatible with older versions of ATLAS QA software. 88 Section 4. Calibrating the System
- 101. Saving the Array Calibration File 1 After completing a calibration and clicking the Save to File button, the ‘Save Calibration’ dia- log box opens. The program suggests a file location based on the serial number of the device. Figure 4-9. Saving the Array Calibration to a File 2 Confirm or change the location and enter a file name. Do not type the “.cal” file extension; it is appended to the file name automatically. Record the path to the file, if it has changed. 3 Click the Save button. Saving Array Calibration to Flash Memory Note: Unlike the original Profiler, array calibration files are not automatically saved to flash memory. Array calibrations can be saved to non-volatile flash memory in the PROFILER 2 so that the cali- bration factors can be used on another computer. The calibration files are transported with the PROFILER 2 so that they do not have to be copied or sent by another method. The PROFILER 2 has 10 slots in flash memory for array calibrations. When the PROFILER 2 software is launched, it automatically retrieves the calibration files in the flash memory and copies them to the directory C:SNCPROFILER2Factors<serial number>. 1 If you are currently viewing the array calibration results, click the Save to Flash button. Oth- erwise, click Tools > Save Calibration to Flash. 2 The ‘File Open’ dialog box appears. Select the calibration file you wish to save to flash mem- ory and then click Open. 3 The ‘Select Flash Memory Slot’ dialog box appears. For screen details, see “Tools > Save Cal- ibration to Flash” on page 40. Click on a memory slot to select it, edit the Descriptor and Operator fields, and then click Save. The ‘Descriptor’ is a short description of the calibration file, and the ‘Operator’ is the name of the operator performing the calibration. Figure 4-10. Saving Array Calibration to Flash Memory Array Calibration Procedure 89
- 102. Calibration with Saved Files Note: Before using this technique, you should be familiar with array calibration procedure. It may be convenient to create sets of calibration files separately, save them as files, then use them to create calibration files based on each set. Be sure to use the same energy, gain, and back- ground for all exposures. 1 Close the ‘Array Calibration’ dialog box and return to the main screen. 2 Make exposures with the PROFILER 2 aligned as in Steps A through D and save them to files. Name each file so that you can tell the energy setup and the step (A, B, C, or D) for each file. Note: Make each exposure with the PROFILER 2 rotated or shifted to match the instruc- tions for the corresponding step of the array calibration. 3 Open the ‘Array Calibration’ dialog box (Tools > Calibrate Array). 4 In the dialog box, click the Cal from Files button. The ‘Select Data Files’ dialog box (Figure 4- 11) opens. Figure 4-11. Calibration From Files dialog box 5 Highlight step A; click Select File. A file selection dialog box opens (Figure 4-12). Figure 4-12. Select Data Files for Calibration 6 Navigate to the saved calibration file, select the file for Step A, and then click Ok. The selected file will appear in the Step A slot in the Select Data Files dialog box. 7 Highlight step B and click the Select File button. A file selection dialog box opens. 8 Navigate to the saved calibration file, select the file for Step B, and then click Ok. The selected file will appear in the Step B slot in the Select Data Files dialog box. 90 Section 4. Calibrating the System
- 103. 9 Highlight step C and click the Select File button. A file selection dialog box opens. 10 Navigate to the saved calibration file, select the file for Step C, and then click Ok. The selected file will appear in the Step C slot in the Select Data Files dialog box. 11 Highlight step D and click the Select File button. A file selection dialog box opens. 12 Navigate to the saved calibration file, select the file for Step D, and then click Ok. The selected file will appear in the Step D slot in the Select Data Files dialog box. 13 When finished, all file names will appear in the ‘Select Data Files’ dialog box (Figure 4-13). Figure 4-13. Select Data Files dialog box with calibration files A through D 14 Click the OK button. The calibration file is created and displayed in the Results panel. This is the same as the results obtained from a normal calibration (Figure 4-8). 15 Click Save to File and assign a filename for this calibration. You can also print the results or save them to flash. Loading a Saved Calibration File Perform this procedure to import a saved array calibration file that will be used when calculating measurements. An array calibration file must be loaded when the software is launched. Note: The Stop button in the Acquisition toolbar must be dimmed in order to select a calibration file. Note: If the user accidentally selects a calibration file from a different device (wrong serial number), the software will warn the user that the serial number in the calibration file does not match the serial number of the device. If the user clicks OK, the file is loaded. If the user clicks Cancel, the file is not loaded and a ‘Failed to Apply Calibration File’ message is displayed. 1 From the PROFILER 2 menu, select Setup > Load Calibration File (or click the select file but- ton in the Array Calibration toolbar). The ‘Open a Calibration File’ dialog box is displayed (Figure 4-14). Array Calibration Procedure 91
- 104. Figure 4-14. Open a Calibration File Dialog Box 2 Navigate to the location of the saved calibration files. Calibration files have the file extension “.cal.” Note: The default path to the calibration files is “C:SNCPROFILER2factors<serial number>.” If other calibration files have been saved under a different path name, that path must be selected in this Open window box. 3 Select the calibration file to load and then click Open. The selected file appears in the Array Calibration toolbar. Note: Calibration entries marked with an asterisk indicate that this calibration informa- tion was taken from a currently loaded file, and the software’s master list does not contain it. Viewing a Saved Calibration File Perform this procedure to view a saved calibration file. 1 From the PROFILER 2 menu, select Setup > View Calibration (or click the View Calibration button in the Array Calibration toolbar). The ‘Calibration Data’ window is displayed (Figure 4- 15). Figure 4-15. Array Calibration Data window 92 Section 4. Calibrating the System
- 105. 2 This window is similar to the Array Calibration results window (Figure 4-8) except that the data in this window is displayed in corrected counts. You can view each step of the calibration (A through F) individually, select a specific axis to view, and normalize the data if desired. You can also zoom in on the detector variations by dragging over the area you want to examine more closely. See “Zoom” on page 59. 3 Examine the profiles for appearance. The curve should represent the radiation profile of the machine output along the selected axis. Calculating Calibrated Detectors for Small Fields Normally, calibration is performed with the default field (35x35 cm) and SSD (100 cm). However, if a linac has a smaller field and cannot irradiate all of the detectors, the detectors that are not in the beam must be excluded from the calibration. See also “Calculating Calibrated Detectors For Small Fields” on page 169. CAUTION: When calibrating small fields, exclude detectors that are not fully irradi- ated to ensure a valid calibration. Excluded detectors are not calibrated and are not ! used for subsequent exposures when using a small field calibration. Software sets the array calibration value of all excluded detectors to one. Selecting Calibrated Detectors By Field Size If you know the exact field size for calibration, you can edit the detectors to be included in the calibration. 1 In the Array Calibration dialog box, pull down the Calculate Detector Range list box and select By Field Size. 2 Click the Edit button next to the Field Size and SSD entries (upper right of the ‘Array Calibra- tion’ dialog box) to display the ‘SSD and Field Size Worksheet’ dialog box (Figure 3-13). Figure 4-16. SSD and Field Size Worksheet Dialog Box 3 Select the field size, machine isocenter, and SSD, then click OK. • For a detailed description of each of these options, see “Edit SSD and Field Size” on page 37. Selecting Calibrated Detectors By Profile Shape If you are calibrating a small field and you do not want to set the Field Size, you can have the soft- ware select the field size based on the profile shape detected by the instrument. 1 In the Array Calibration dialog box, pull down the Calculate Detector Range list box and select By Profile Shape. 2 Continue with the regular Step A through D exposures. Detectors outside the field will be automatically excluded by the software. Array Calibration Procedure 93
- 106. Dose Calibration Dose calibration converts the PROFILER 2 corrected counts to dose values by applying a single calibration factor to all detectors. Note: All detectors must have the same sensitivity, which is the case after array calibration. Dose information for absolute calibration may be found by setting up a calibrated detector in the same geometry as the central axis detector of the PROFILER 2 device. Absolute dose calibration is to be determined in a field size and depth where a known dose may be delivered. If you make a measurement (such as TG-51) with an ion chamber whose calibration is traceable to an appro- priate standard, such as NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology), the resulting measurement produces absolute dose values. The calibration establishes a dose calibration fac- tor, which is then applied to all of the array detectors in addition to the relative array sensitivity correction factors obtained during array calibration. The dose measurements are stored separately from the array calibration files in a single file, PROFILER2Dose.ini, located in the C:SNCPROFILER2 folder. Dose calibration values are spe- cific to each accelerator and energy. Note that the physical detector depth is 1.0 cm below the top surface of the PROFILER 2, beneath 1.0 g/cm2 of water-equivalent plastic. To calibrate with 5 cm buildup, add 4.0 cm additional buildup; to calibrate with 10 cm buildup, add 9.0 cm additional buildup, etc. Multiple dose calibrations can be saved and applied to measured files. The energy and a comment can be associated with each calibration. For a list of current calibrations, see the Dose Calibration toolbar or the Dose Calibration window. If the software loads a data file which contains a dose calibration that is not already available in the Dose Calibration ini file, it adds that item to the list of current calibrations and marks it with an asterisk. Note: Dose entries marked with an asterisk indicate that this dose information was taken from a currently loaded file, and the software’s master list does not contain it. Absolute dose calibration information is stored in the memory of the computer in which the calibration was performed (master list) and the file itself. Adding a Dose Measurement 1 Position the PROFILER 2 on the treatment couch, center the cross hairs, and adjust the SSD and buildup to satisfy known dose conditions. 2 Adjust the field size to 10 x 10 cm. 3 Set up the accelerator to administer a known dose. 4 Select Tools > Calibrate Dose from the menu. The ‘Dose Calibration’ dialog box opens (Fig- ure 4-17). • For a detailed description of the options in this dialog box, see “Tools > Calibrate Dose” on page 39. 94 Section 4. Calibrating the System
- 107. Figure 4-17. Dose Calibration Dialog Box 5 Review the on-screen instructions. 6 Click the Start button and collect the dose as described in the dialog box. 7 Click the Stop button. 8 Enter the actual value of the dose that was delivered to the center detector at its depth in the phantom. Note: If the dose delivered by the accelerator is measured with a calibrated device such as an ion chamber traceable to NIST, the Calibrated Dose check box is automat- ically checked. This tells you that using the traceable setup converts the relative dose measured by the detectors to absolute dose. Clear the box if you desire MU and not cGy. 9 If desired, enter a description into the ‘Comments’ box to identify the details of this dose calibration. 10 Click Add to save the dose calibration file and add the dose calibration value to the Current Calibrations list. 11 If you want this to be the default dose calibration, click the Set As Default button. 12 If you would like to save the dose calibration factor to non-volatile flash memory on the PRO- FILER 2, see “Saving a Dose Calibration To Flash” below. 13 Click Close to exit. Note: If the firmware is not at version 1.2.4 or higher, the following message is dis- played when closing the Dose Calibration window: “Profiler 2 device firmware must be updated to at least version 1.2.4 to use the Save to Flash feature. Dose Calibration 95
- 108. Saving a Dose Calibration To Flash 1 From the Dose Calibration dialog box, click the Save to Flash button. The ‘Select Flash Mem- ory Slot’ dialog box opens. This dialog box displays a list of the dose calibrations that are either currently in flash memory or ready to be written to flash. Figure 4-18. Select Flash Memory Slot Dialog Box 2 Click Save. The calibration factor is appended to the first available empty slot (at the bottom of the list. 3 To delete a dose calibration file from a flash memory position, select a slot and then click the Delete button. 4 To remove all of the dose calibrations from flash memory, click Clear. 5 To exit this screen without making any changes to the current list, click Cancel. Changing the Dose Calibration Factor A dose calibration factor can be applied to earlier files that did not contain dose measurements or had the incorrect dose calibration applied. 1 Open a previously measured file. The current dose calibration factor is displayed in the Dose Calibration toolbar. 2 Select another calibration factor from the toolbar. 3 Select File > Save As from the menu and save the file to the same location with the same file name (software will ask if you want to overwrite) or you can enter a new file name. Setting Up A Default Dose Calibration A default dose calibration factor can be set for automatic loading during software startup. 1 Select Tools > Calibrate Dose from the menu. The ‘Dose Calibration’ dialog box opens. 2 Highlight one of the ‘Current Calibrations’. 3 Click the Set As Default button. Removing A Dose Calibration Value 1 Select Tools > Calibrate Dose from the menu. The ‘Dose Calibration’ dialog box opens. 2 Highlight one of the ‘Current Calibrations’ in the lower portion of the screen. 3 Click the Remove button. The program will prompt for confirmation. 4 Click Yes to delete the calibration from the list of current calibrations or click No to cancel. 96 Section 4. Calibrating the System
- 109. Subtract Background The Subtract Background option in the Control menu lets you choose between subtracting the background measurement or not subtracting it. A check mark appears next to the entry on the menu if the feature is on. If there is no check mark, the feature is turned off. Background measurement is made automatically when you launch the software. In addition, you can manually measure it at any time. See also “Background Measurements” on page 82. Recalibration Interval Annual recalibration is recommended. Test your calibrations annually and more frequently if the instrument is heavily used. To recalibrate, simply repeat each calibration. CAUTION: You can always test your calibrations if the instrument is heavily used. ! Test by using two measurements separated by 180 degrees and reviewing with Invert turned on. The need for recalibration is based on normal diode aging due to exposure to radiation. The sen- sitivity of the diodes decreases at a rate of about 1.0% per 1,000 Gy at 10 MeV (electrons), and at a rate of < 0.5% per 1,000 Gy at 6 MV (photons). For example, when you have performed 1,000 measurements of 100 cGy at 6 MV, the diode sen- sitivity will have decreased by < 0.5%. Recalibration Interval 97
- 110. This page is intentionally left blank. 98 Section 4. Calibrating the System
- 111. 5 Measuring Radiation Positioning PROFILER 2 1 Position the PROFILER 2 on the treatment couch for a measurement such that: • PROFILER 2 detector axes are oriented in the direction of interest for your purposes. • Note that if a wedge (fixed or dynamic) is to be measured, the Y detector axis should be parallel to the wedge slope. 2 Adjust couch height to place the PROFILER 2 surface at desired SSD (typically 100 cm). • Note that the detectors are 1.0 cm below the top surface of the PROFILER 2, beneath 1.0 g/cm2 of water-equivalent plastic. 3 Adjust field size. • If the couch height is closer than 100 cm, then the field size can be set larger according to the geometric magnification. (Any field size can be set, as long as the electronics area is not irradiated directly.) CAUTION: When adjusting field size, do not expose the electronics section of the unit to a direct beam or heavy scattering. Scattering may be caused by frequent use of ! high beam energy, large fields, and thick buildup. This may damage the unit. See “Min- imizing Radiation Damage” on page 193. 4 Align the cross hairs with the PROFILER 2 alignment grid. 5 Level the PROFILER 2 with the leveling feet, using the bubble indicator to find true level. Note: The PROFILER 2 has two buildup alignment holes for positioning the provided buildup plates over the array. For best results, the buildup used should be the same as that used during calibration, but this is only noted for absolute best and reproduc- ible results. Measurement differences can be determined by using the profile compare function. Loading Calibration References Array Calibration File Whenever the software is launched, an array calibration file must be loaded. If no array calibration file exists or if a new array calibration file is desired, see “Array Calibration” on page 81. Note: The Stop button in the Acquisition toolbar must be dimmed in order to select a calibration file. Note: If the user accidentally selects a calibration file from a different device (wrong serial number), the software will warn the user that the serial number in the calibration file does not match the serial number of the device. If the user clicks OK, the file is loaded. If the user clicks Cancel, the file is not loaded and a ‘Failed to Apply Calibration File’ message is displayed. Positioning PROFILER 2 99
- 112. 1 Click the drop down arrow in the Array Calibration toolbar and select a file. 2 Alternatively, select Setup > Load Calibration File from the menu or click the ‘Select File’ button in the Array Calibration toolbar. A file selection dialog box appears (Figure 5-1). Figure 5-1. Open a calibration file dialog box 3 Navigate to the location of your array calibration files for this device (the file folders are orga- nized by serial number). Calibration files have the file extension “.cal.” Note: The default path to the calibration files is “C:SNCPROFILER2factors<serial number>.” If other calibration files have been saved under a different path name, that path must be selected in this Open window box. 4 Select the calibration file to load and click Open. The selected calibration file is loaded and the file name is displayed in the Array Calibration toolbar. Note: Dose entries marked with an asterisk indicate that this dose information was taken from a currently loaded file, and the software’s master list does not contain it. Absolute dose calibration information is stored in the memory of the computer in which the calibration was performed (master list) and the file itself. Dose Calibration Value Before measurement, the desired dose calibration value should be selected in the Dose Calibra- tion toolbar. If no dose calibration exists or if a new dose calibration is desired, see “Dose Calibration” on page 94. 1 Click the drop down arrow in the Dose Calibration toolbar (Figure 5-2). Figure 5-2. Select the Dose Calibration Value to be Applied to the Data 2 Click the desired file from the list of calibration values. 100 Section 5. Measuring Radiation
- 113. Note: If a dose calibration is not selected, the values shown are Analog-to-Digital counts. Always enter a dose calibration, even if it is not calibrated with a traceable standard test setup. Inherent Buildup and Physical Depth The PROFILER 2 has inherent buildup of 1.0 ± 0.1 g/cm2 to the detector junction and a specific physical depth from the top surface to the detector plane of 1.0 ± 0.1 cm. The top plate above the detectors is water-equivalent plastic with a thickness of 1.00 cm. This information is needed to set up measurements to match a treatment plan. Measuring A Single Profile During measurement, the PROFILER 2 stores measured data in memory as the ‘Device’ file. Any data that was previously in the Device file is overwritten during measurement. During measurement, the Device file icon, normally a red square with a gray center, flashes with a dark red center. This is to show you that measurement is taking place. Single frame data collection is the default style of data collection. To perform single frame data collection, click Start without turning on multi-frame data collection or concatenation. The soft- ware starts requesting data updates from the device at time intervals specified in the ‘Setup Parameters’ dialog box. On each update the software refreshes the rate data, and recalculates the uncorrected total data. The data is corrected and displayed twice per second independent of the frequency of data collection. Note: The software automatically takes a background measurement at startup. If con- ditions have changed or if it has been more than a few hours since the software was launched, you should take a manual background measurement. See “Manual Back- ground” on page 82. Starting the Profile Measurement 1 Set the accelerator to the energy associated with the selected array calibration file, the desired dose rate, and the monitor units. 2 Click the Start button on the toolbar. That button is dimmed and the Stop button is brightened. 3 Turn the beam on. The PC screen will respond with a graph of the profile. 4 When the beam turns off, click the Stop button to terminate the measurement. Note: Start and Stop can be selected while the beam is on. This may be useful during gain selection or real time accelerator adjustments. However, when making inte- grated Dose measurements in QA, or Dynamic Wedge, or dose ratios at different gantry angles, always select Start before beam is on and Stop after beam is off. Checking the Gain The amplifier gain in the PROFILER 2 is displayed in the Acquisition toolbar. The available gain set- tings are: 1, 2, 4, and 8. The default gain setting is 4. During profile measurements, the Stop button must first be pressed before the gain can be adjusted up or down. The Status toolbar provides an indicator to show the measurement status of the amplifier. • Normal operation is a green bar operating between 20 and 80%. • If this bar is full scale or red, the PROFILER 2 gain should be reduced. If this bar is near zero or yellow, then the PROFILER 2 gain should be increased. Inherent Buildup and Physical Depth 101
- 114. The machine parameter that affects gain quality is the dose per machine pulse and not the aver- age dose rate. (See “About Profile Acquisition” on page 175.) The higher the dose per pulse, the lower the required gain. Lower gains may also be required if the SSD is reduced from a prior mea- surement setting. Saving the Profile 1 When the beam turns off, click Stop. • If ‘AutoSave’ is enabled in the Setup Parameters, the ‘Profile Header Information’ dialog box is displayed. The data in this dialog box is stored with the profile and serves as a record of the setup parameters and the machine used for this profile. See also “Setup > Parameters” on page 42. • If AutoSave is disabled, use the File > Save As menu command to save the file. • If AutoSave is off and Start is selected before saving a profile, the data will be lost. If the PROFILER 2 program is closed before saving the data, a warning message appears which gives an opportunity to save the data under the Save As function, or Cancel and exit the program. Figure 5-3. Profile Header Information Dialog Box 2 When the ‘Profile Header Information’ dialog box is displayed, fill in or complete the data and then click OK. • Header data is stored with the profile and is your record of the setup parameters and the machine used for this profile. • If you prefer to edit the header data later, click Cancel to exit. • For a detailed description of the header fields, see “Edit > Edit Header” on page 32. Figure 5-4. Save As Dialog Box 102 Section 5. Measuring Radiation
- 115. 3 When the ‘Save As’ dialog box is displayed, navigate to the desired location (typically C:SNCPROFILER2Data<serial number>), enter a file name, and click Save. Note: The software automatically appends each file with a unique, 3-character exten- sion. For example, a single profile is saved with the extension “.prs.” Do not manually add a file extension to the file name. 4 Click OK. The file is saved with the name you selected and at the location you specified. Multiple Frame Capture Multiple frame files contain a sequence of snapshots of the exposure, similar to a movie. Every pulse of radiation is measured and each frame can be reviewed separately. This allows the user to see beam changes between frames, which is useful for studying the effect of transient events, such as warm-up. To enable multiple frame capture, select Control > Capture Multi-Frame from the menu. When enabled, a check mark appears next to the entry on the menu. If there is no check mark, the fea- ture is turned off. In multiple frame mode, the software stores all of the frames or updates. This uses more memory than single-frame data collection. Update frequency is set automatically to be the fastest rate achievable from the instrument firmware. There is no limit to the number of frames that can be stored except physical disk size. To use this feature, perform the following steps: • Collect the data. See “Collecting Multiple Frame Data” below. • Play back (review) the data. See “Movie Playback” on page 116. Collecting Multiple Frame Data 1 Ensure that Capture Multi-Frame is enabled in the Control menu. If there is a checkmark next to the menu option then it is already enabled. 2 Click Start on the toolbar and turn the beam on. 3 After collecting a sufficient number of pulses, click the Stop button. The ‘Save’ dialog box appears. 4 Select one of the buttons as follows: • To save the data file, click Save. • To exit without any further action, click Cancel (data will not be saved). • Continue data collection. Concatenating Two Measurements Concatenation simulates a larger PROFILER 2 array by allowing the user to combine two profiles taken at 180-degree separation. Two offset measurements can be concatenated to create a larger field. For example, the user mea- sures a 40x20 cm field with two exposures, one shifted to one end of the 40 cm field, the other exposure shifted to the other end of the 40 cm field. Then, the two exposures are concatenated into a single result. CAUTION: During concatenation, always keep the electronics section of the instru- ! ment out of the beam to prevent damage. Multiple Frame Capture 103
- 116. To concatenate two measurements, pivot the PROFILER 2 at a point along the Y axis exactly between two detectors. Data is collected from each exposure and merged. The resulting array is of a size equal to (pl * 2 - 2), where pl = the detector number of the detector immediately left of the pivot point. The data from 0 to N-1, is from the first set of data, where N = the number of detectors in the array. The data from N to (pl * 2 - 3) is the data from 0 to (pl * 2 - 3 - N) of the second set of data, normalized according to detector values of pl and pl+1 from the original array. Concatenation Procedure 1 Load the proper calibration file and position the PROFILER 2 as required for the first exposure. Keep in mind that the same two detectors must straddle the cross hairs for both profile mea- surements. Hint: For a 60.4 cm wide measurement, the accelerator cross hairs should intersect between detectors 76/77 for both profile measurements. 2 Click the Start button on the PROFILER 2 screen, select the desired MU, and turn the beam on. After the beam turns off, click the Stop button. 3 Save the first exposure. 4 Rotate the PROFILER 2 180 degrees around the pivot point that was under the cross hairs from the initial measurement. There should be at least two detectors exchanging position. Be sure to align the PROFILER 2 so that the coinciding detectors are in the exact position as the detectors from the first measurement (Figure 5-5). 5 Click the Start button on the PROFILER 2 screen and turn the beam on under the same con- ditions as in the first exposure. After the beam turns off, click the Stop Button 6 Save the second exposure. Figure 5-5. Rotating PROFILER 2 180 degrees around a pivot point for two exposures 104 Section 5. Measuring Radiation
- 117. 7 Select Concatenate from the Tools menu. The ‘Select Concatenation’ dialog box appears (Figure 5-6). For a detailed description of the fields in this dialog box, see “Tools > Concate- nate” on page 41. Figure 5-6. Selecting pivot point for concatenation 8 Select the first exposure from the Exposure 1 list. 9 Select the second exposure from the Exposure 2 list. 10 Click the pivot point that you used to make the two exposures. 11 Click the Accept button. The extended profile is displayed in the Graph window and a new concatenation file is created. Note that the second profile is normalized with the first profile, the normalization point being the two detectors of rotation. Figure 5-7. Example of Extended Profile 12 Select Save As from the File menu to save the new concatenated file. The file can be analyzed in the same manner as other measurement files. See also “Concatenated And Double Profiles” on page 172. Concatenating Two Measurements 105
- 118. Continuous Radiation Measuring data from beams of continuous radiation such as those from a Co60 treatment device, is very similar to data collection with pulsed beams. Before measuring a continuous radiation beam, it is recommended to collect a new array calibra- tion file and a dose calibration value for the appropriate energy. This is not recommended because of a switch from pulsed radiation to continuous. Rather, it is recommended due to changes in diode sensitivity over time with exposure to radiation. Perform the following steps to measure beams of continuous radiation: 1 Turn off the Beam is Pulsed option in the Control menu. If there is a checkmark next to the menu option, click the menu option to remove the checkmark. 2 Collect a new array calibration file with the correct beam type selected (Cobalt or Undefined), and save the calibration data to a file. See “Array Calibration” on page 81. 3 Collect a new dose calibration. See “Dose Calibration” on page 94. 4 Load the new array calibration file and the dose calibration value into the toolbars. 5 Perform measurements the same way as you would for a pulsed source. Checking Electron Energy With a Wedge Changes in electron beam energy can be measured using an aluminum wedge (P/N 117081) placed on the PROFILER 2 detector array, providing a convenient way to perform constancy checks. The electron wedge produces a pseudo-depth-dose curve from detectors along the Y-axis that are covered by the electron wedge. The wedge adds a different thickness of buildup above the detec- tors used for the calculation. In the region of the pseudo-depth-dose curve where the slope is the greatest, the output varies linearly. By comparing how the slope and intercept of the pseudo- depth-dose curve changes as you change energies, a relationship is developed to model the slope and intercept of all energies. Electron Energy Wedge Setup 1 Position the PROFILER 2 at 100 cm SSD. 2 Select a 20 x 20 cm electron cone. 3 Place the fixed wedge centered over the Y-axis linear array (narrow end of aluminum wedge at detector 23 and thick end at detector 61). 4 Ensure that the wedge is oriented properly. The wedge heel should be vertical. Electron Energy Wedge Calibration Collect Data 1 Open the PROFILER 2 software (an automatic background measurement is collected). 2 Perform an array calibration for each energy that you plan on including in the electron energy analysis. 3 Set up the PROFILER 2 and the wedge as described in “Electron Energy Wedge Setup” . 4 Repeat the following steps (a-e) for each available electron energy. a. Select the energy-specific array calibration file in the Array Calibration toolbar. b. Click the Start button. c. Deliver 200 MU to the PROFILER 2 with the wedge on it. d. Click the Stop button. e. Save the data to a file. Give the file a name corresponding to the linac and energy of the measurement. 106 Section 5. Measuring Radiation
- 119. Load Electron Energy Files To open the ‘Electron Wedge Calibration’ dialog box, select Setup > Electron Wedge Calibration from the menu. For a detailed description of the options in this dialog box, see “Setup > Electron Wedge Calibration” on page 47. The software provides a default calibration set as an example, but a new calibration set must be created for each linac on which the electron energy wedge will be used. CAUTION: Always replace the factory default calibration files with your own electron ! wedge measurements. Figure 5-8. Electron energy calibration dialog box To Add a New Calibration Set 1 Click the Add button in the top left portion of the dialog box. You will be prompted to enter a Wedge Calibration Name. Enter a name that will be distinctive to the linac on which you are using the wedge. 2 The six default files (corresponding to energies of 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 and 21 MeV) will still be listed in the dialog box. Click on each file one at a time and click the Remove File button. 3 To add a file that is relevant to your particular machine energy, click the Add File button. 4 Locate the file you wish to add (these files were created in the “Collect Data” section above). 5 Type the known energy in MeV (found from water tank scans) that corresponds to the deliv- ered dose in this file. 6 Repeat steps 3-5 for each electron energy for which you have acquired preparatory data. 7 Once all energies files have been added to the calibration file list, click the Save button in the dialog box. You will be asked to confirm saving this list of files to the machine specific Wedge Calibration Name entered in Step 1 above. 8 Click OK to confirm. Note: If desired, copy a summary of the files added as well as the variables associated with each of their pseudo depth dose curves to the clipboard by clicking the Report button. Open a text editor or spreadsheet and paste the results. 9 Click Done to exit the ‘Electron Wedge Calibration’ dialog box. Checking Electron Energy With a Wedge 107
- 120. Apply Calibration 1 To apply a particular electron energy calibration, click Setup > Analysis on the menu bar. 2 Click on the Other tab. 3 In the ‘Electron Energy Analysis’ settings, click the Selected radio button. 4 Use the drop down box to select the calibration set you wish to use. 5 In the ‘Analysis Style’ settings, choose the type of analysis (Slope or Intercept) you wish to perform. 6 Click OK to save the changes. See also “Electron Energy Wedge Analysis” on page 172. Taking a Measurement Once an electron energy calibration set has been applied, when a measurement is taken with an electron wedge placed on the PROFILER 2 as described in “Electron Energy Wedge Setup” above, the software will automatically detect that an electron wedge is present and display the interpolated energy of the beam in the Analysis panel (Figure 5-9). Figure 5-9. Electron Energy Display for Constancy Measurements The wedge slope appears on the Y-axis graph, since that is where you placed it. The X-axis graph shows the attenuation across the middle of the wedge. When a measurement is taken with an electron wedge, ‘Electron Energy’ replaces Flatness and ‘Energy Params’ replaces Symmetry on the Y-axis values of the Analysis panel. In this example, details shown are: • Ep0: 13.54—indicates the electron energy was calculated at 13.54 MeV • D80: 4.70—indicates the dose depth at 80% was 4.70 cm • Default—the name of the energy wedge calibration used to analyze the exposure • Slope—the type of calculation used, slope or intercept 108 Section 5. Measuring Radiation
- 121. Photon Wedge Measurements This feature is used to analyze photon wedge fields. A virtual, dynamic, or fixed wedge can be analyzed. The wedge angle analysis calculation is parameterized in 2 ways: • user selects which depths to use as part of the calculation. • user supplies PDD (Percent Depth Dose) data. PDD data can be defined for any photon energy level, and the user may define as many as desired. The software uses the photon energy level that matches the header of the selected file. One of the sets of PDD data can also be defined as a ‘default’ in case the specific photon energy level is not found. The depths to use in the calculation are defined in the ‘Wedge Analysis Configuration’ dialog box. For the calculations used in photon wedge measurements, see “Photon Energy Wedge Analysis” on page 173. 1 For each energy level, measure the beam with open fields at various depths (at least 2) in a medium. 2 Record the depth and the dose for each exposure. 3 Open the ‘Wedge Analysis Configuration’ dialog box (Setup > Wedge Configuration). For details about this dialog box, see “Setup > Wedge Configuration” on page 48. 4 Click the button to display the following dialog box, enter the appropriate energy and then click OK. Figure 5-10. Enter Energy Dialog Box 5 Enter the depth and dose in the dialog box (Figure 5-11) and then click the Add/Replace but- ton. The software calculates the PDD. Note: Depth units are centimeters (cm). 6 View or edit depth dose pairs by energy level using the drop down button. Figure 5-11. Photon Wedge Dialog Box 7 When you are finished editing/adding depth dose pairs, click the Done button. 8 Select the depths that the software should use as a reference: Photon Wedge Measurements 109
- 122. • Select Setup > Analysis from the menu to display the ‘Configure Analysis’ options. • Click the Other tab. • In the Photon Wedge Analysis section, select the reference depths. • Click OK to close the window. 9 Position the PROFILER 2 in the beam so that the long Y axis (42 cm) is parallel to the slope of the wedge and oriented in the center of it. 10 Set up the accelerator and make the wedge exposure. The wedge angle is calculated for the energy level set in the header based on the values in the ‘Wedge Analysis Configuration’ dia- log box for the corresponding energy level. 11 The view panel displays the wedge graph and the analysis panel displays the measured wedge angle. Beam Tuning Overview Beam tuning is the process of making beam adjustments while observing the resulting changes on the display. Refer to your accelerator documentation for the adjustments that can be made and the method of making the adjustment on your accelerator. See also “Beam Tuning View” on page 66. Using the Beam Tuning Display 1 Place the instrument under the beam and align the cross hairs. 2 Select the Beam Tuning tab at the top of the display. 3 Select the Axis and Parameter to display for the first tuning operation. 4 Click the Start button on the toolbar. 5 Turn on the beam. Graphs of the beam and the value of the selected parameter appear on screen. Axis graph Inverted axis graph % differ- ence graph Figure 5-12. Beam Tuning Display 110 Section 5. Measuring Radiation
- 123. 6 While observing the screen, adjust the first machine control (with, for example, a potentiom- eter) to adjust the beam. Continue with the next adjustment, and the next, until the beam has been tuned. While adjusting, note the following: • Symmetry differences can be tuned out by matching the profile to its inverted profile. • The % Difference graph shows the difference between opposite pairs of detectors (only graphed on the right half of the grid). • Select the axis you want to show by selecting it on the Axis pull-down list. • Select the best parameter to show the adjustment by selecting it from the Analysis pull- down list. 7 When adjustments are complete, turn off the beam and click the Stop button on the toolbar. Data Analysis Using the Data Plot Overview The Data Plot view provides a visual display of beam analysis parameters over the duration of the measurement. It can be used to compare beam characteristics along both sides of the axis, to ana- lyze a pair of detectors over time, or to analyze a specific detector over time. The Data Plot view is particularly useful for analyzing beam start-up characteristics. Use the ‘Dose per Pulse’ or ‘Pulses per second’ analysis parameters, then zoom in on the first few seconds of the measurement for a detailed examination. The Data Plot view is only for multi-frame measurements. It can display analysis data during a measurement (real-time) or it can be used to analyze saved files. All data plots use instantaneous rate mode. There are two color-coded graphs in the Data Plot view. Each graph displays a specific analysis parameter for one side of the selected axis, and if applicable, for the selected detector or pair of detectors. See also “Data Plot View” on page 68. Using the Data Plot Display 1 To analyze a saved file, open the file and make sure it is selected in the Legend panel. 2 Click the Data Plot tab. 3 Click the Plot Settings button for the left axis plot and select the desired options (axis, detector pair, and whether to apply the axis and detector selection to both plots. If this will be a dose at depth plot, you can also select 1mm depth averaging, which generates a single data point for each mm of depth, with all readings that fall within that mm being averaged. Figure 5-13. Plot Settings Options 4 Click OK to save the changes. 5 If you did not choose the ‘Set for Both Plots’ option, click the Plot Settings button for the Right Axis Plot, choose the desired options, and then click OK to save the changes. Data Analysis Using the Data Plot 111
- 124. 6 Select the analysis parameters for the left and right axis plots. The available options are: Flat- ness, Beam Center, Field Size, Point Symmetry, Dose per Pulse, Pulses/Sec, Dose Rate, or Reference Value. • If you are analyzing a saved file, skip to Step 9. Note: The Reference Value analysis parameter is used with an external reference detector. 7 To analyze data in real-time, perform the following steps: a. Ensure that the Plot Device Data and Capture Multi-Frame options are enabled in the Control menu. The option will have a checkmark beside it when it is enabled. b. Click Start on the toolbar and turn the beam on. c. Click the Stop button to stop the measurement. The ‘Save’ dialog box appears. 8 Select one of the buttons as follows: • To save the data file, click Save. • To exit without any further action, click Cancel (data will not be saved). • Continue data collection. 9 Review the data displayed in the Data Plot view. For screen details, see “Data Plot View” on page 68. 10 If you wish, you may zoom in on a portion of the graph to view it in greater detail. See “Zoom” on page 59. Note: If you like, you may turn the Plot Device Data option when you are done using the Data Plot view. The Plot Device Data option can consume memory if it remains enabled for a long period of time. Data Interpretation If the dose measured by the PROFILER 2 does not agree with the calculated dose, then an inves- tigation of the cause will reveal one of the following: 1 There is an error in the treatment plan calculation. 2 There is an error in the machine setup. 3 The treatment machine is out of calibration. 4 The PROFILER 2 is improperly calibrated. 5 The PROFILER 2 has failed. In this event, the plan and setup should be reviewed by the physicist. If this does not reveal the error, the calibration of the machine output and the PROFILER 2 should be tested. If this does not reveal the error, then either the error is the result of a non-reproducible setup problem or an PRO- FILER 2 failure. Under such a condition, the PROFILER 2 should be used to make another measurement of the treatment dose at the next treatment session. If the error persists, the unit should be returned to Sun Nuclear Corporation for repair. WARNING: Under no conditions should the treatment plan be modified based ! solely upon the measurements of the PROFILER 2 without corroborating evi- dence of an error resulting from situations 1 through 5 as described above. 112 Section 5. Measuring Radiation
- 125. 6 Viewing Files and Printing Opening and Saving Files Selecting File Type 1 Select File > Open from the menu. 2 Select the type of files to be opened. 3 Select one more files to be opened and then click OK. Up to 10 files can be opened at once. To select more than one file, hold down the CTRL key as you click to select each file individ- ually, or hold down the SHIFT key as you click files to select files in a group. Note: If the first file opened is a single file (*.prs) and it contains a dose calibration, the data type will default to Dose; otherwise the default data type is Normalized. If the first file opened is a multi-frame file (*.prm), the mode will default to Inst. Rate; otherwise the default mode is Total Dose. Note: If the Control > Capture MultiFrame menu option is selected, the default “Files of Type” option is Multi-Frame (*.prm). Otherwise, the default file type is Single Frame (*.prs). Figure 6-1. Selecting Type of File to Open There are five selections under ‘Files of Type’: • Single Frame Profiler Files (*.prs) - shows single frame PROFILER 2 files. If the .prs file is the first file opened and it contains a dose calibration value, the data type will default to ‘Dose’. Otherwise, the default data type is ‘Normalized’. • Multi-Frame Profiler Files (*.prm) - shows files that contain a series of frames of measured data taken at regular intervals during an exposure and measured with a PROFILER 2. These files are played back like a movie. If the .prm file is the first file opened the mode will default to Inst. Rate. Otherwise, the default mode is Total Dose. • Concatenated Profiler Files (*.prc) - shows composite files made from two different files that have been combined. Opening and Saving Files 113
- 126. • SRS Profiler Files (*.snb) - shows files measured with an SRS PROFILER. When an SRS PROFILER file is selected, all four graphs will display data. • Profiler1 Files - shows all the original Profiler file formats. All types of Profiler 1 files can be opened. Each type has a different extension. When a Profiler1 file is selected, there is only a Y axis graph. • All Files (*.*) - shows all the files in the subdirectory even if they have a non-standard file extension. A proper file with a non-standard extension will open if the file has the correct format. Note: To make file extensions visible, clear the Hide known file extensions check box in the View dialog of Folder Options in Windows (Start>Settings>Control Panel>Folder Options>View). Saving Measured Data The user is prompted to save measured data after clicking Stop on the toolbar. See “Saving the Profile” on page 102. Duplicating a File Click on a file, then select Save As from the File menu to save the copied file and assign a new file name. Re-Opening a File To re-open files that were recently viewed, do the following: 1 Right-click the Legend panel and click Re-Open (or select File > Re-Open). A list of recently opened files appear. 2 Click the file you want. The file opens and is selected in all views. Closing a File To close a saved file, do the following: 1 Click the file that will be closed to select it. 2 Right-click the file and select Close from the context menu (or select File > Close from the menu). Clearing a File To clear an unsaved data set, right-click the device in the Legend panel and select Clear from the context menu. The data set is cleared. Hiding a File To hide a file from appearing in the display, hold down the CTRL key then left-click on the file in the Legend panel. Repeat the process to ‘show’ the file again. Changing Colors As a file is opened or created from measurements, it is inserted into the Legend Panel and each position of the Legend Panel is assigned a color. The assigned color helps the user to associate the file with its profile graph, the headings in the Header and Data views, and the corresponding Analysis items. The color designates the file’s position in the Legend Panel; the color information is not saved with the file. If you reopen the file in the same position in the Legend panel, it will have the same color. If you open the file in a different location it will have a different color. The color can be changed as follows: 1 Select the file to be changed. 114 Section 6. Viewing Files and Printing
- 127. 2 Right-click the file and select Change Color from the context menu. The ‘Color’ dialog box opens (Figure 6-2). Figure 6-2. Color Selection Dialog Box 3 Click a basic color or create a custom color. 4 Click OK to save. Comparing Profiles The PROFILER2 software allows the user to compare two profiles against each other and display the results in the Graph view (Figure 6-3). For a meaningful comparison, the profiles being com- pared must have matching characteristics. For example, a previously saved linac QA adjustment may be compared to a current adjustment in order to replicate the same profile shape that existed during the original measurement. Or, as another example, annual surveys to study the effects of gantry rotation can be compared to one another. The compare function can be used in real time during beam steering adjustments or passively for routine QA checks. During a real time adjustment, data acquisition occurs in the Inst Rate mode such that any changes made to the beam are immediately seen in the next one-second update. The software compares the area of the profiles defined as all the data points after and including the first data point which has a value higher than a percentage of the maximum value of the first profile. The percentage (50% or 80%) can be selected in the Configure Analysis dialog box. While the comparison feature is active, none of the dose or rate data from the other open files is displayed on the graphs. Also, a Compare Index (CI) is calculated and displayed in the lower left corner of each graph. The comparison is updated if the data in either of the constituent files is changed. See also “Profile Comparison” on page 170. Perform the following steps to compare two open profiles: 1 Select the first file for comparison (reference profile). 2 Select the second file for comparison (active profile) by right-clicking on the file (or device) and selecting Compare from the Legend panel context menu. The comparison display appears (Figure 6-3). Note that the files being compared are marked with blue check marks in the Legend Panel. 3 If the device will be used to generate the active profile, collect a measurement as normal. Data acquisition occurs in Instantaneous Rate mode. 4 If you would like to change the comparison index cutoff, select Setup > Analysis from the menu and adjust the Profiler CI Cutoff setting. The options are 50% or 80%. For details, see “Setup > Analysis” on page 43. 5 If you would like to print the comparison results, select File > Print > Comparison from the menu. For details, see “Reports” on page 117. Comparing Profiles 115
- 128. 6 To cancel the comparison, click on one of the files or the device being compared in the Leg- end panel. 1 2 3 4 Item Description 1 The files or device selected for comparison are marked with blue checkmarks. 2 The ‘Reference Profile’ and ‘Active Profile’. The Reference Profile is the base profile selected for comparison, and the ‘Active Profile’ is the second file selected for compari- son or the device. 3 Percent Difference Profile - A graphical representation of the differences between two profiles. The Percent Difference profile is calculated from the averaged profiles in the two profiles that are being compared. For details, see “Profile Comparison” on page 170. 4 Compare Index - Calculated value to evaluate the similarity between the two profiles. Graphs which do not compare well will have a large compare index. The CI is updated if the data in either of the constituent files is changed. For details, see “Profile Comparison” on page 170. Figure 6-3. Comparison of two profiles Movie Playback Multi-frame files store each update in addition to the total data. A multi-frame file can be played back at a rate of 1 frame per second. Note that the speed of the playback does not necessarily correspond to the speed at which the frames originally arrived from the device. Frame forward Slider bar Frame back Stop Play Figure 6-4. Playback Controls for Multiple Frame Capture The Playback controls toolbar contains buttons, the horizontal slider bar, seconds, and frame indicators. 116 Section 6. Viewing Files and Printing
- 129. • Click the button with the right pointing arrow to start playback. • Click the square box to stop playback. • Drag the slider bar to advance or rewind the movie. • Click the small arrow buttons on either side of the slider bar to move at one frame at a time. See also “Collecting Multiple Frame Data” on page 103. Reports There are three styles of printout. Each style of printout has a header which consists of a title, date of printout, an optional comment line, and a graph. The graph region fills the width of the page, and its height is determined by the height of the header. • Single—Displays a graph of the currently selected file, an analysis summary, and a file header. A tabular data printout follows if you selected that option in the Print dialog box. • Overlay—Displays a graph of all the currently displayed files in an overlay fashion and includes a legend for profile identification. An array of file headers follows the graph. • Comparison—Displays a graph of the two files under comparison followed by the file headers. Print Options Selecting File > Print... > Single, etc., opens the ‘Print’ dialog box that lets you select the axis or axes to be printed, the size of the graph, whether or not to print the tabular data (detector values), the header data to be printed, and a comment. Figure 6-5. Print Dialog Boxes Reports 117
- 130. Group Item Description Main Axis • X Axis—selects only transverse axis for printing. • Y Axis—selects only sagittal axis for printing. • Primary Axes—selects only the X and Y axes. Graph (Print single and Print comparison only) Selects type of graph: • Best quality—graph printed larger for best quality. • Conserve space—graph printed small to conserve space. Print Tabular Data (Print single only) Prints the values for each detector in a tabular format. Series (Print overlay only) Selects the method to identify each profile: • Differentiate by Color • Differentiate by Line Style (for B&W printers) The printed report will include a legend below each axis graph that iden- tifies each profile by the selected method (color or line style). Comment Optional user comments that are printed directly beneath the title at the top of the report. Buttons OK Prints the selected file with the options selected. Cancel Cancels printing. Preview Opens a preview viewer so you can see what will be printed. Setup Printer Opens a printer dialog box so that you can set up your printer. Advanced The advanced button opens or closes a list of header items to be printed in the report. Once you have selected the items you want to print, the pro- gram remembers your settings. Select All Click to select all the header items. Unselect All Click to unselect all the header items. Header items list Check boxes show which header items are selected. The options are: Machine Serial Number; Beam Type; Energy; Wedge Angle; Wedge Type; Gantry Angle; Collimator Angle; Collimator Left; Collimator Right; Collimator Top; Collimator Bottom; Rate; Dose; Field Size; Orientation; Tray Mount; SSD; Alignment; Buildup; Buildup Type; Calibration File; Col- lector Model; Collector Serial; Collector Revision; Firmware Version; Measurement Mode; Nominal Gain; Collection Interval. Figure 6-6. Print options for single, overlay, and comparison reports 118 Section 6. Viewing Files and Printing
- 131. Printing Reports To print a report, select Print from the File menu while the data you want to print is displayed in one of the views. A report will be printed from the selected printer (Figure 6-7). movie6_15x15_6MV_v1.1.20.0.prm - 6/6/2008 9:31:01 AM Y - Radial 110 105 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 % 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 -10 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 cm X - Transverse 110 105 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 % 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 -10 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 cm Y Axis X Axis movie6_15x15_6... movie6_15x15_6... Field Size Beam Center Field Size Beam Center Filename: C:SNCProfiler2... Measurement Mode: Pulsed 15.03cm -0.02cm 15.00cm -0.11cm TimeStamp: 2/2/2007 13:23:47 Collection Interval: 100 Light:Rad Coinc.(15) Light:Rad Coinc.(15) Software Version: 1.1.20.0 -Y= 0.03cm +Y= 0.00cm -X= 0.11cm +X= -0.11cm Machine Type: Penumbra(80/20) Penumbra(80/20) Machine Model: -Y= 0.29cm +Y= 0.27cm -X= 0.31cm +X= 0.26cm Machine Serial Number: Flatness-bm(80) Flatness-bm(80) Wedge Angle: 0 N/A (Smoothed) N/A (Smoothed) Wedge Type: None Symmetry-bm(80) Symmetry-bm(80) Collimator Angle: 0 0.6% Area 0.1% Area Collimator Left: 7.5 Collimator Right: 7.5 Collimator Top: 7.5 Collimator Bottom: 7.5 Alignment: None Buildup Type: WaterEquiv Collector Model: PROFILER 2 Collector Revision: C Firmware Version: 1.2.3 Figure 6-7. Typical Printed Report (Single) Printing Screens All PROFILER 2 screens can be printed just as they are viewed in the PROFILER 2 software. This is accomplished using the Windows clipboard utilities, not the PROFILER 2 functions. The following example assumes that Microsoft Word has been installed, but other text editors might also work. Open Word while the PROFILER 2 software is running. The steps are: 1 Capture the screen: a. With a PROFILER 2 screen displayed, press the Print Screen key on the keyboard. This will capture the whole screen. b. To capture a dialog box without the ‘background’ window, for example the ‘Setup Param- eters’ dialog box, press the ALT key and the Print Screen key simultaneously. Reports 119
- 132. 2 Resume the Word application. To do so, move the mouse cursor to the bottom of the screen and click in the Word window. It may be hidden, so move the cursor to the bottom. 3 Position the cursor in the document or start a new document and click Paste from the Edit menu. The PROFILER 2 screen will now appear. 4 Print the document with the normal print function under the Word File menu. 120 Section 6. Viewing Files and Printing
- 133. 7 Importing/Exporting Data Importing Planned Dose Files Dose maps created by treatment planning systems can be imported into the PROFILER 2 soft- ware. Once imported, these files can be compared to measured profiles. Since there are a large number of different file formats, a separate import filter has been devel- oped to import the treatment plan files for PROFILER 2. Import Filter Sun Nuclear Corporation has developed a filter to import the quality assurance files created by many different commercial treatment planning systems (TPS). Most of these files are snapshots of the radiation dose values that the planning system will produce when a plan is run on the accel- erator. When such a file is imported into a Sun Nuclear Corporation instrument, the dose distribution of the treatment plan file can be compared directly to the actual measured values. For each planning system, the filter examines the file(s) you select and converts the data to be displayed according to the treatment plan selected. Your treatment planning software may create still other file extensions such as “.dcm” (DICOM). Usually, the filter ignores the file extension and tries to read the files that you select, although the .dcm extension is required for DICOM files. The file extensions are primarily useful to help you correctly identify the files you want to open in instrument software. But since each filter is expect- ing a certain type of file, it is very important that the correct filter be selected in the list box. TPS Dose Maps This section provides instructions for exporting a suitable dose map from many of the popular treatment planning systems. Since TPS vendors take different approaches, use a variety of hard- ware, and use different operating systems, each planning system may be a special case. Consequently, we have listed major vendors and provided our best recommendation on how to obtain a suitable dose map. However, TPS vendors change their planned dose file formats frequently, and there is often more than one way to obtain the desired dose map. If you notice an error in these instructions, or would like to recommend a better procedure, please contact us at 321-259-6862 ext. 392. CAUTION: Instructions for importing planned files are based on the best information ! available at the time of publication. Accuracy is not guaranteed. Please report any errors to Sun Nuclear Corporation. About Dose Maps The primary output of the planning software is a set of files containing an array of expected dose values (dose map) in a phantom. The plan output will be in any of several forms: • a flat, 2-dimensional array of dose values • a 3-dimensional volume of dose values in 2D slices spaced at regular intervals • a set of dose maps The 2-dimensional array of values can be imported directly. However, for the 3-dimensional vol- ume of dose values and the unordered set of slices, you must select a particular slice when importing the data. Importing Planned Dose Files 121
- 134. The instrument imports the planned dose map directly into the instrument software for compari- son with the measured values. The data is always imported with a geometry matching the device file so that the profile data points match exactly. Profile positions are linearly interpolated as nec- essary, and assigned a value of zero if they fall outside the available data. Import Filter - Supported File Types The PROFILER 2 import filter supports the following file types: • 3Dline Ergo • AccuKnife: AccuSoft XL • Philips: Pinnacle3 • Brain Lab: Brain Scan • CMS: FOCUS or XIO • DICOM: RTDOSE, EPID (RTIMAGE), or CR (RTIMAGE) • Elekta: Precise Plan • Film • EPIDose • MAPcalc • Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Care • MDS Nordion Helax TMS • Nomos: CORVUS • Nucletron: PLATO and OnCentra • PerMedics: Odyssey • Prowess: Panther • Radionics XKnife • RAHD: Alpha 3D Pro • Siemens: KonRad • TGM ARTP • TomoTherapy Hi Art • Varian: CadPlan and Eclipse • SunCOM About EPIDose Files EPID (Electronic Portal Imaging Device) files can be imported into PROFILER 2. An EPID is an imag- ing device attached to the accelerator that provides an image with each exposure. A typical EPID consists of an active-matrix flat panel fabricated of amorphous silicon. EPID images are exported as DICOM RT IMAGE files. About DICOM Files The filter imports three types of files that conform to the Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM 3.0) standard: • RT QA DOSE files—files that contain one or more dose maps in a uniform phantom or a dose volume. • RT IMAGE files—files that contain images obtained from an imaging device (such as an EPID). • CR IMAGE files—files produced by a computed radiography (CR) device (such as a Kodak device). PROFILER 2 Plan Grid Resolution The PROFILER 2 grid resolution is 4 mm. Note: The PROFILER 2 will not accept a grid resolution greater than 4 mm. Based on the experience users have reported to us, the following selections are recommended: • CMS Focus or XIO—You can specify 2 or 3 mm grid resolution, but Focus or XIO will always interpolate to a 1 mm grid. • Varian CadPlan—You can specify either 1.25 or 2.5 mm. 122 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 135. • Nucletron PLATO—Note that the dose plane is identified as X-Z in Plato. Preparing Dose Maps for Import When preparing a treatment plan file to import into a Sun Nuclear Corporation instrument, there are a number of points to keep in mind: • Select a dose map of something that can be directly measured with the Sun Nuclear Instru- ment you are using. • Precise angular and planar orientation of the dose map is necessary to get an accurate com- parison with the measured values. • Buildup can be used to simulate the dose depth assumed by the treatment plan. • Each dose map to be imported should be saved to a file with an appropriate name so you can readily identify it. Exporting 3D Line ERGO++ Files The 3D Line ERGO++ file is a 3D DICOM file sliced on the transverse axis. To obtain a useful file to import, you must select a dose depth that is a multiple of the vertical spacing of the dose val- ues. The filter then extracts a dose map on the coronal plane at the dose specified. 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. 4 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where the instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 5 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “3Dline Ergo.” 6 Open each file (*.dcm) separately into the instrument software. 7 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. 8 Click the Slice Selection button in the toolbar to display the following dialog box: Figure 7-1. Select Desired Dose Depth 9 Choose the correct dose depth (Z position) so that the filter can select the correct set of val- ues in the X-Y plane equivalent to the instrument measurement. Importing Planned Dose Files 123
- 136. Exporting AccuKnife AccuSoft XL Files The AccuSoft XL Treatment Planning system exports QA files to a text file suitable for use by Sun Nuclear instruments. The import filter for this type of text file has been developed but has not been field tested. The following generic process may enable you to import these files. 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map suitable for using with PROFILER 2. Refer to the AccuSoft XL documentation for specific directions. The dose map should be equivalent to a plane in a flat phantom perpendicular to the beam’s central axis. It should match the orientation and depth of the instrument detectors. 3 If necessary, convert each QA dose map file so that it is compatible with a Windows PC. 4 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file.The appropriate file extension is .txt. 5 Move the .txt files to a directory on the PC where instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 6 Open the treatment plan in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “AccuSoft AccuKnife(*.*)”. 7 Open each file separately into the instrument and display it with the corresponding measurement. Exporting Pinnacle3 (Philips) Files Note: The PROFILER 2 will not accept a grid resolution greater than 4 mm. Pinnacle3 files can be easily exported from Pinnacle3 and imported into Sun Nuclear instruments. The files are exported from the Solaris Unix operating system as text files that can be read using the PROFILER 2 Windows-based software. Screen appearance may vary between different versions. The screens shown below are from ver- sion 7.6C. 1 Open the ‘Planar Dose Computation’ window (Figure 7-2). 124 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 137. Step 7 Step 3 Step 2 Step 6 Step 5 Step 4 Figure 7-2. Dose Plane Setup 2 Ensure “Phantom” is selected for planar dose calculation. 3 In the Planar Dose Computation window, click the Add Plane per Beam button to create each beam. 4 Modify the export file name for each beam. 5 Modify the SPD (Source-to-Plane-Distance). The SPD value should be equal to the SDD (Source-to-Detector-Distance) in the measurements. 6 Enter the SSD value, which is equal to the SPD minus the depth in the phantom. Note: During actual setup for measurement, be sure to account for both physical and water-equivalent buildup thickness from the instrument surface to the detector active region. 7 Click the Dose tab (Figure 7-3). Importing Planned Dose Files 125
- 138. Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 9 Step 8 Figure 7-3. Planar dose computation dialog box 8 Set the Resolution or Pixel Size. Example: 0.2cm = 2mm planar dose resolution. 9 Set the Dimension of the field. Example: at 2mm dose plane resolution, 201 x 201 = 40 x 40 cm field size. 10 Select the Directory for the dose maps. If possible, select the directory to save the files to a location to which you will have read/write access from your PC later on. If not, place the files on media that can be used in the Windows computer. 11 Select the ASCII file option. 12 Click the “Export All Planes to File” button. 13 Open the treatment plan in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “ADAC Pinnacle 3(*.*).” 14 Open each .txt file separately into the instrument software and display it with the correspond- ing measurement. 15 As each file is opened, a dialog box (Figure 7-4) appears, asking you to enter either the MU (monitor units) delivered. Enter the MU to convert the numbers in the file to dose delivered to the PROFILER 2. If your file already contains absolute values, enter a value of 1; if your file contains relative values, enter the MU. Figure 7-4. MU Delivered Dialog Box 126 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 139. Exporting BrainLAB Brain Scan Files This procedure is covered in the BrainLAB manual. Refer to the “Dose Export” function in the ‘Cal- culations’ menu of the BrainLAB software. 1 Define a plane perpendicular to the beam and note the dimensions and buildup at the selected plane. Note: The instruments can only compare dose maps of planes perpendicular to the beam. 2 In the ‘Dose Export’ dialog box, select the Type of File. 3 In the File pull-down list, select either Coronal Plane or Fluence. The other file types are not compatible with the PROFILER 2. 4 Enter the pathname and a filename and click Export. An ASCII file will be created that can be imported by the PROFILER 2. 5 Open the treatment plan in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Brain Lab Brain Scan (*.*).” 6 When the file opens, the first field is shown. Click the Select Slice button in the toolbar to display the following dialog box. Figure 7-5. Slice Selection Dialog Box 7 Pull down the Field Name selection list, click on the desired field, and then click OK to display the selected field with the corresponding measurement. Exporting CMS Files Focus and XIO files CMS Focus and XIO systems can export two types of files for use with Sun Nuclear instruments. The first is called a General Dose Plan file. You create this file by selecting a plane from the com- plete treatment plan to be used for QA. These planes can be selected from different angles and locations relative to the patient axes (coronal, axial, etc.), so the user must select a plane that cor- responds to instrument location and orientation. This is the preferred format since the file contains absolute dose data or it can be calculated. Note: Based on the experience users have reported to us, you can specify 2 or 3 mm grid resolution, but Focus or XIO will always interpolate to a 1 mm grid. The PROFILER 2 will not accept a grid resolution greater than 4 mm. Generate a General Dose Plan Export File 1 Create the plan. 2 Select the proper plane of dose values for use with the PROFILER 2. Importing Planned Dose Files 127
- 140. 3 For each field, generate a “QA dose plane export” file (text file) for the selected plane. Refer to the CMS Focus or XIO documentation for specific directions. 4 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files. 5 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 6 Open the treatment plan in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “CMS Focus (*.*).” 7 Open each .dcm file separately into the PROFILER 2 software and display it with the corre- sponding measurement. 8 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. Generate a Beam Map File Using the Decimal Utility The second type of CMS or XIO file is called a IMQA or Beam Map file. This is a snapshot of a single beam at a given SSD that was originally used for manufacturing compensators. Note: Originally decimal utility format was relative, but in newer versions of the soft- ware, the data is absolute. See planning system instructions for details. Beam Map files are generated either directly with a “QA dose plane export” file or by using the Decimal utility to the CMS Focus or XIO software that creates an instruction file for machining brass modulators. The modulator instruction file has a “.dec” extension. Although you may not be creating brass modulators for the actual manufacture, this process is used to generate the neces- sary files. To create a file to be imported into the instrument, it is only necessary to select an option in the Decimal utility to simultaneously produce a file with a “.txt” extension. These text files can then be imported directly into the instrument software. 1 Create the plan. 2 Initialize the Decimal utility and load the plan. 3 Open the ‘Edit Plan’ screen of the Decimal utility, and press the F7 button, which is the IMQA button. A menu appears with an On/Off button. 4 Click the On button to generate a .txt file simultaneously with the .dec file. 5 Generate the .dec and .txt files for all of the fields. Use a suitable naming convention so you will know what the files are. 6 The .txt files will be generated with the same root name and in the same file folder as the .dec files. On many systems, this folder will be the floppy drive. 7 Discard the .dec files and move the .txt files to a directory on the PC. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 8 Open the treatment plan in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “CMS Focus (*.*).” 9 Open each .txt file separately into the PROFILER 2 software and display it with the corre- sponding measurement. 128 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 141. Exporting Elekta Precise Plan Files 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s directions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. These will be DICOM (.dcm) files on the Windows PC. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. 4 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where the instrument is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 5 Open the treatment plan in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Elekta Precise Plan (*.*).” 6 Open each file separately into the PROFILER 2 software. 7 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. Exporting Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Care Files This file format is only for use by Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Care Center personnel for the Memorial system. 1 Create the plan in the normal manner. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a pair of files representing a QA dose map. Refer to the local documentation for specific directions. One of these files will be a text (.txt) header file, containing information about the field. The other file is a binary (.bin) file containing the actual values. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. CAUTION: Be sure you have both files of the pair in the directory and that they have ! the same basic name (but different extensions). For example, 234475.bin and 234475.txt. If they have different names or one file is missing, the filtering will fail. 4 Move each pair of files to a directory on the PC where the instrument is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 5 Open the treatment plan in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Care (*.*).” 6 Open each pair of files separately (select either the .txt or the .bin file) into the PROFILER 2 software and display the results with the corresponding measurement. Importing Planned Dose Files 129
- 142. Exporting MDS Nordion Helax TMS Files 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s directions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. These will be DICOM (.dcm) files on the Windows PC. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. 4 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where the instrument is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 5 Open the treatment plan in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “MDS Nordion Helax TMS (*.*).” 6 Open each file separately into the PROFILER 2 software. 7 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. Overly Complex DICOM File Format Normally, you should try to export the Helax file as a single dose map in the coronal plane and export it in the DICOM format. However, in a rarely used procedure, it is possible to export a series of vertical slices and export them in DICOM format, where each slice is a separate file. The slices represent a series of vertical planes that are perpendicular to the coronal plane of the desired dose map(Figure 7-6). DICOM Slice Files Horizontal Dose Plane Extracted by PROFILER 2 Figure 7-6. Extracting a Horizontal Dose Map from a Set of Slices is Time-Consuming When this type of file is encountered, PROFILER 2 opens every single file in the directory, extracts the row of data equivalent to the depth of the desired coronal plane, and closes the file. The extracted rows of data are rebuilt as an equivalent coronal dose plane at the depth selected. Nat- urally, this is time consuming and uses computer resources, since each file must be opened, processed, and closed. Where possible, this process should be avoided. 130 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 143. Exporting NOMOS CORVUS Files The NOMOS CORVUS (North American Scientific) treatment planning system produces 3D DICOM files. The manufacturer recommends upgrading to Corvus 6.2 which provides the ability to export the dose distribution in several DICOM formats. The product has an option to re-orient all beams to the nominal (0 degrees IEC) angle when a QA plan is created. The user can export single-frame files (one axial, sagittal, or coronal slice per DICOM file) or multi-frame files (all planes either axial, sagittal, or coronal slices). 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. 3 If necessary, convert each QA dose map file so that it is compatible with a Windows PC. 4 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. Note: DICOM files must have the .dcm extension. 5 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where instrument is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 6 Open the treatment plan in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “DICOM (*.*).” 7 Open each file separately into the instrument software. 8 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. Exporting Nucletron Files The import filter imports both Nucletron PLATO and OnCentra files. • For Plato files, see “Nucletron PLATO File.” • For Oncentra files, see “Nucletron Oncentra TP File” on page 132. Nucletron PLATO File Note: Note that the dose plane is parallel to X and Z axes in Plato, whereas the dose plane is parallel to the X and Y axes in the instrument software. 1 Create a plan in PLATO according to normal practice. 2 For each QA field to be imported into the instrument, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the PLATO documentation and the example below for details. The saved dose map files will be binary files saved on the Unix-based host computer. • EXAMPLE: Let us assume that you have a 5 beam IMRT plan. PLATO will not allow you to change the gantry angle, so the process is: • Place the IMRT plan on a square phantom by creating the appropriate STUDY. • Move the isocenter to the desired depth. • For each beam: • Delete all the other beams. • Save a simulator plan. Importing Planned Dose Files 131
- 144. • Find the simulator plan file by using the command: • find /usr/people/plato_share/data -name nnnnnn.S0N • where nnnnnn is the Patient ID and 0N is the number of the simulator plan • Edit the simulator plan file using jot and change the <GantryAngle>xxx to <GantryAngle>0. • Load the simulator plan. • Calculate. • Save the plan with export of dose grid. • The dose grid file is the required file for that beam. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention to identify the resulting files. The names or extension of the files is not important as long as you can identify each file with the treatment plan and field. 4 Move both the simulator plan and dose grid files to a directory on the instrument PC by send- ing them across a local area network, sending them via an FTP connection, or sending them as E-mail attachments. Floppy disks and CDs may also be used if properly formatted for DOS. Refer to Unix documentation for formatting instructions. 5 Open the dose grid file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Nucletron Plato (*.*).” 6 Select the dose grid file to open. 7 Open each PLATO file separately into the instrument software and display it with the corre- sponding measurement. Nucletron Oncentra TP File The Nucletron Oncentra file is a 3D DICOM file sliced on the transverse axis. To obtain a useful file to import, you must select a dose depth that is a multiple of the vertical spacing of the dose val- ues. The filter then extracts a dose map on the coronal plane at the dose specified. 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. 4 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where the instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 5 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Oncentra TP(*.*).” 6 Open each file separately into the instrument software. 7 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. 132 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 145. 8 Click the Slice Selection button in the toolbar to display the following dialog box: Figure 7-7. Select Desired Dose Depth 9 Choose the correct dose depth (Z position) so that the filter can select the correct set of val- ues in the X-Y plane equivalent to the instrument measurement. Exporting PerMedics Odyssey Files The PerMedics, Inc. Odyssey Treatment Planning System produces a 2D DICOM RT dose file with slices in the transverse, sagittal, or coronal planes. 1 Create the plan, prescription, or beam dose distribution according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing an RT Dose 2D file as follows: a. Select a slice that matches the orientation of the measuring device. b. In the Odyssey software, select menu option File > Export > RT Dose 2D (Figure 7-8). c. Save the file to an appropriate medium. Figure 7-8. Selecting a 2D dose export in Odyssey 3 If necessary, convert each QA dose map file so that it is compatible with a Windows PC. 4 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. Note: DICOM files must have the .dcm extension. 5 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 6 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “PerMedics Odyssey (*.*).” 7 Open each file separately into the instrument software. Importing Planned Dose Files 133
- 146. 8 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. Exporting Prowess Panther Files The Prowess Panther treatment planning system produces 2D DICOM RT Dose files sliced along the coronal plane. 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. 3 If necessary, convert each QA dose map file so that it is compatible with a Windows PC. 4 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. Note: DICOM files must have the .dcm extension. 5 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 6 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Prowess Panther (*.*).” 7 Open each file separately into the instrument software. 8 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. Exporting Radionics XKnife Files The Radionics XKnife Real-Time Stereotactic Planning system produces dose maps in the Sun- COM format. The SunCOM format will be supported starting with XKnife RT 3.0.2 (no special utilities are needed). 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. To generate Sun- COM files in XKnife RT, follow these steps: a. In XKnife RT, display one (or more) 2D views. b. Calculate Slice Dose by selecting “Slice Dose” on the Dose Tab (Figure 7-9). 134 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 147. Figure 7-9. Calculate Dose Slices by Selecting ‘Slice Dose’ c. Generate SunCOM file by selecting Print from the File menu, then selecting Dose Pro- files (Figure 7-10) and clicking the Print button. The .snc files will be written to the patient's directory. Figure 7-10. Select Dose Profiles from the Print menu 3 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. Importing Planned Dose Files 135
- 148. 4 Move the .snc files to a directory on the PC where instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 5 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Radionics XKnife (*.*)” or “SunCOM (*.*).” Either file type will open .snc files. 6 Open each .snc file separately into the instrument software and display it with the corre- sponding measurement. Exporting RAHD Alpha 3D Pro Files The RAHD Alpha 3D Pro generates dose maps that can be opened in the instrument. The following steps provide a generic procedure. 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. 3 Using the 64-bit Alpha processor running on Unix, convert each QA dose map file to 32-bit files compatible with a Windows PC. 4 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. Note: DICOM files must have the .dcm extension. 5 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 6 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “RAHD Alpha 3D/Pro(*.*).” 7 Open each file separately into the instrument and display it with the corresponding measurement. Exporting Siemens KonRad Files The Siemens KonRad treatment planning system produces two-dimensional DICOM RT Dose files sliced along the coronal plane. 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. 4 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where the instrument is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 5 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. 136 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 149. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Siemens Konrad (*.*).” 6 Open each file separately into the instrument software. 7 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. Exporting TGM ARTP (Topslane) Files The TGM (Topslane) Anti-Tumor Radiation Treatment Planning (ARTP) system produces two- dimensional DICOM RT Dose files sliced along the coronal plane. 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. 4 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where the instrument is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 5 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “TGM ARTP (*.*).” 6 Open each file separately into the instrument software. 7 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. Exporting Varian Files Note: Based on the experience users have reported to us, you can specify either 1.25 or 2.5 mm grid spacing. The PROFILER 2 will not accept a grid resolution greater than 4 mm. CadPlan File 1 Create the plan. 2 For each QA field to be imported into instrument software, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the CadPlan documentation for specific directions. These will be binary files saved on the Unix host computer. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention to identify the resulting files. The name or extension of the files is not important as long as you can identify each file with the treatment plan and field. 4 Move the binary files to a directory on the PC by sending them across a local area network, via an FTP connection, or as E-mail attachments. Floppy disks and CDs may also be used if properly formatted for DOS. Refer to Unix documentation for formatting instructions. 5 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Varian CAD (*.*).” 6 Open each CadPlan file (*.dose) separately into the instrument software and display it with the corresponding measurement. Importing Planned Dose Files 137
- 150. Eclipse File 1 Create the plan. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the Eclipse documentation for specific directions. 3 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. 4 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 5 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “Varian Eclipse (*.*).” 6 Open each file (*.dcm) separately into the instrument software and display it with the corre- sponding measurement. Note: There could be several very high dose points in the dose file (upper left corner), called “burning marks.” Make sure that this option is unchecked when generating and exploring the QA dose files. Exporting Files in DICOM File Format The DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine) standard was developed to pro- vide standards for intercommunication between medical radiology devices. Several manufacturers have developed radiotherapy interfaces that provide dose map outputs suitable for importing into instrument software. The following steps provide a generic procedure that may work for DICOM RT Dose files. CAUTION: If you are importing a plan file from a system previously described, use the ! specific file selection for that plan. The DICOM selection is for new or generic files only. 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. Refer to the manu- facturer’s documentation for specific directions. 3 If using a Unix or other operating system, convert each QA dose map file to files for a Win- dows PC. 4 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. Note: DICOM files must have the .dcm extension. 5 Move the .dcm files to a directory on the PC where instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 6 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. 138 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 151. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “DICOM RTDOSE (*.*).” 7 Open each file separately into the instrument software. 8 The beam center offset coordinates are displayed in the upper right corner of the import win- dow. If needed, change the offset values using the arrow icons in the toolbar. The offset can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. See also “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. DICOM CR image file PROFILER 2 can import data files from a Kodak CR (computed radiography) system. The file is an RT Image file in DICOM format. When imported in PROFILER 2 software, all the data are normal- ized to the maximum value in the data file. The user can re-normalize the data file to any selected point. When importing, select the “DICOM CR (RT IMAGE) (*.*)” filter. Exporting Files in SunCOM File Format The SunCOM file format is a generic format developed by Sun Nuclear Corporation that lets you manually convert any QA dose map into a format that can be imported into the instrument soft- ware. This file format will generally be for temporary use until a specific file conversion utility is developed. 1 Create the plan according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 2 For each field to be imported, generate a file containing a QA dose map. 3 Using other software, edit and convert each QA dose map file to a text (.txt) file for use on a Windows PC. There are several approaches that might work: • Import the dose map into a spreadsheet (such as Excel), edit it, and export the resulting file as a .txt file. • Import the dose map into a text editor, word processing program, or database program. Edit the file and export it as a .txt file. • To edit the file, see “SunCOM File Specification” on page 139. 4 Use an appropriate naming convention for the resulting files so that you can identify the treat- ment plan and field for each file. 5 Move the .txt files to a directory on the PC where instrument software is installed. You can use floppy disk, CD, USB flash drive, network, or whatever method you have to make the files available to the PC. 6 Open the treatment plan file in the PROFILER 2 software. • Select File > Import > Planned Dose from the menu to display the ‘Planning System Import’ window. • Click the file folder icon in the toolbar to display the import dialog box. • In the “Files of type” list box, select “SunCOM (*.*).” 7 Open each .txt file separately into the instrument and display it with the corresponding measurement. SunCOM File Specification A SunCOM File is used to import a dose map into Sun Nuclear software such as the PROFILER 2 Planned Dose Import Utility. Its intended use is for plan file formats that are not yet supported by Sun Nuclear's import function. The file contains a collection of required keywords and allows you to place comments in the header for future reference. A required keyword is preceded by *. Any unexpected text, prior to the key words, is ignored. Global requirements • Data values are tab delimited. • All entries must be ASCII. Importing Planned Dose Files 139
- 152. • All numeric values must contain a decimal, followed by at least one digit. EX 3.5, -8.4, 18.453, 6.0, 128.0, 0.0 • All comments must be contained in the header. SunCOM Optional Header Information None of the information in this category is required, including the row headers. At some future version, the data suggested in each row may be supported; therefore, inclusion of the indicated data should be in the following order. ID: This could contain helpful identification information, such as “first 10x10 test on room 2" Date/Time: Comment 1: SSD Comment 2: Depth Comment 3: Field Size Comment 4: X1, X2 Collimator setting Comment 5: Y1, Y2 Collimator setting Comment 6: Gantry Angle Comment 7: Collimator Angle Comment 8: Wedge Type and Angle Comment 6: Beam Type and Energy Comment 7: Dose at normalization point Comment 8: Composite of n Fields, or Field m of n Comment 9: Planning System The user may add any additional text that is deemed appropriate. SunCOM Required Keywords The file input will recognize the asterisk (*) at the beginning of a new line as the start of a key word. The following key words must occur in the order indicated. • *Version: Tab following the colon, then SunCOM’s file version which is 1.0 for this writing of the specification. Example -- *Version: (tab) 1.0.2 • *Dose Units: Tab following the colon, then indicate the units of dose values that populate the 2d YX data table. Allowable units are: cGy, Gy, relative. (Relative means there are no dose units, such as a normalized file). Example -- *Dose: (tab) cGy • *Dose Scalar Quantity: Tab following the colon, then indicate the scaling factor needed to convert the Dose Units above to cGY. Example: if the Dose Units are already in cGY, enter 1; if the Dose Units are in GY, enter 0.01. • *Coordinate Units: Tab following the colon, then indicate the units of the spatial coordinates for the dose values in the 2D dose map table. The coordinate values are located in the row and column of the *YX: location. Allowable units are: cm, mm Example -- *Coordinate Units: (tab) mm The coordinate data must be evenly spaced and the spacing must be the same for both Y and X coordinates, i.e., uniform grid. 1 mm spacing is preferred for PROFILER 2 applications. All coordinate data must contain a decimal, even integer values such as 10.0. • *YX: This keyword must be immediately followed by a tab, and then the lowest value for the X coordinate of the dose table. All data in the YX row to the right of the keyword “*YX:tab” represent the X coordinate locations of the dose data in the columns immediately following this row. 140 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 153. The first column of data directly below “*YX” contains the Y coordinate locations of the dose data in the rows immediately following this column. The highest value for the Y coordinate of the dose table must be immediately below the keyword “*YX:” Note: There is no tab preceding the Y coordinate of each row. It is assumed that the 0.0,0.0 coordinate location is coincident to the crosshairs of the machine, and that the +Y direction is toward the machine gantry. The 2D dose must be tab delimited and contained in the table defined by the column and row headings (i.e., Y and X coordinates.) Example SunCOM File Comment1: Picodose TA version 2.0 Comment2: original resolution 600 DPI Comment3: "film calibration ""provaieo""" Comment4: "image file ""calibrazione-ugo.tif""" Comment5: Comment6: Comment7: Comment8: Comment9: *Version: 1.0.2 *Dose Units: cGy *Dose Scalar Quantity: 1 *Coordinate Units: mm *Hole Value: None *YX -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 97.1 93.7 93.8 92.7 98.8 95.7 99.3 95.4 92.7 93.6 100.5 4 101.3 101.7 95.3 90.8 94.2 95.9 96 94.8 91.2 94.7 96.5 3 103.7 98.6 90.3 91.5 95.1 98.5 95 93.4 88 97.6 95 2 109.8 103.7 111.3 92.3 91.8 93.8 93.4 96.4 93.8 95 95.2 1 103.9 97.6 97.9 98.1 97.3 96.2 96.3 89.8 93.1 95.8 89.5 0 127.8 105.5 105.2 99.7 101.6 101.6 91.9 88.1 90.3 91.8 88 -1 117.3 106.8 106 100.6 107 110.8 103.8 95.4 128.3 92.3 93.7 -2 117.1 109.4 112.5 107.7 106.1 107.1 109 100.2 90.2 94.1 87.9 -3 119.4 109.3 109.6 103.4 105.2 102.4 100.5 105.4 96.1 95.1 94.7 -4 144.7 106 105.3 101.8 105.5 106.7 100.1 98.9 106.4 100.2 93.7 -5 113.5 109.7 104.3 97.7 99.4 99.8 96.9 97.8 99.6 101.2 86.6 Using the PROFILER 2 Import Filter 1 Prepare the dose map as described in the manufacturer’s documentation. Procedures for var- ious manufacturer’s are provided in this section, starting on page 123. 2 From the PROFILER 2 program menu, select File > Import > Planned Dose. The ‘Planning System Import’ window opens. 3 Click the Open File button in the toolbar. An import dialog box opens. 4 Select the ‘Files of type’ that match the planning software. To do this, click on the down arrow to view the available file types (Figure 7-11). CAUTION: Always select the “Files of Type” before opening a file. Opening a file with ! the wrong type selected will display an error message. The import filter must know what type of file it is opening. Importing Planned Dose Files 141
- 154. Figure 7-11. Select the Proper Type of File to Import The types of files that can be imported include, but are not limited to, those shown on the pull- down list. 5 Navigate to the location of the file you want to import (the location could be a removable media drive, your hard drive, or on a network). 6 Select the file you want to import and click Open.The planned dose map is displayed in the Import window. 7 If you would like to invert the treatment plan along the X axis, Y axis, or along both axes, see “Inverting Imported Files” on page 146. 8 If the import filter detects a volume, multiple fields, or a depth dose value in the file, the import window will display a ‘Select Slice’ button . Click this button to display a dialog box which allows you to select the appropriate volume, field, or gantry Z position. See “Importing a Slice Or Volume File” on page 148. CAUTION: For proper comparison, verify that the depth or field selected corresponds ! with the measured dose map. Aligning Plan Dose Maps to PROFILER 2 PROFILER 2’s X- and Y-coordinates are marked on the top overlay, while the +Z coordinate is understood to be pointing toward the ceiling when PROFILER 2 is lying flat. A correct PROFILER 2 measurement is made with top surface facing the accelerator head, the Z axis aligned with the central axis (CAX) of the beam, and the top surface of PROFILER 2 perpendicular to the beam axis. Normally, the central axis of the beam coincides with the intersection of the X and Y axes. How- ever, PROFILER 2 may be rotated around the Z axis and aligned with the crosshairs at the 0, 90, 180, and 270 degree positions. PROFILER 2 can also be offset from beam CAX to measure asym- metric fields and to combine multiple measurements for large fields. Treatment plan dose maps may use other coordinate systems or may have other orientations. Some treatment dose maps may be described in terms of patient coordinates. Some treatment plans produce a dose volume from which it is possible to extract a slice along any plane. Still other treatment plans collect unrelated slices in a single file. 142 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 155. To ensure accuracy, be careful to select the correct dose map plane in the treatment plan for com- parison with a PROFILER 2 measurement setup that meets the following criteria. • Perpendicular with the beam axis. • Planned dose depth equivalent to the buildup placed on PROFILER 2 plus 1.0 cm of H2O inherent buildup. • SPD (Source to Plan Distance) of 100 cm in the plan will equal an SSD of 99 cm (approximately 98.85 cm) to the PROFILER 2 top surface (detectors are 1.0 cm beneath the surface). • CAX of treatment plan the same as the CAX of the measured beam or a compensating offset applied. The import window allows offset adjustments in 1 mm increments. • PROFILER 2 rotated to match the +X and +Y axes of the treatment plan. The import window allows rotation to any desired angle (1 degree increments) or by 45 degree increments clock- wise or counterclockwise. Beam Center Offset If the central axis of the plan file is not the same as the central axis of the linac, an offset value can be entered after the plan file is imported. For successful display and comparison, PROFILER 2 always needs to have a defined common point in both the PROFILER 2 and the treatment plan for alignment purposes. The PROFILER 2 point is the center detector. If a corresponding point is not defined in the treatment plan, such as in the CMS General Dose Plane Files, PROFILER 2 determines the center of the plan by calculation and designates the center point as the CAX of the imported file. If this alignment is not what you desire, you must manually select an offset to align the PROFILER 2 center detector with the cor- responding point in the plan file. In the PROFILER 2 import window, the crosshairs represent the X and Y axes of the PROFILER 2. When the PROFILER 2 is shifted from the crosshair location, this shift (in cm) should be the actual location of the crosshairs on the PROFILER 2 in its new location, as read from the X and Y axes. 1 Open the planned file. See “Using the PROFILER 2 Import Filter” on page 141. 2 Determine the shift required to align the CAX of the plan file and the CAX of the PROFILER 2. 3 Use the arrow buttons or the Shift Overlay button in the Import window toolbar to apply the appropriate offset. The offset coordinates are displayed directly below the arrow buttons. See also “TPS Import Window Toolbar” on page 146. 4 Ensure that the specified offset will not place the electronics in the beam. If this occurs a red message will appear below the toolbar. Rotation The PROFILER 2 overlay can be rotated to match the +X and +Y axes of the treatment plan. The import window allows rotation to any desired angle, however the PROFILER 2 must be aligned with the crosshairs at the 0, 90, 180, or 270 degree positions 1 Open the planned file. See “Using the PROFILER 2 Import Filter” on page 141. 2 There are two ways to rotate the overlay to the desired angle: • Click the Rotate Clockwise or Rotate Counterclockwise button in the Import window toolbar to change the rotation angle in 45 degree increments. The window displays the selected rotation angle below the toolbar. • Click the Rotate button in the Import window toolbar and click and hold at any point in the display. Then, drag the mouse to adjust the rotation angle. The window displays the selected rotation angle below the toolbar. Importing Planned Dose Files 143
- 156. Measuring an Equivalent Profile You can measure the actual profile from the accelerator and compare it to the profile you observed from the imported plan file. 1 Click the View Dosemap button in the Import window toolbar. 2 Rotate and offset the PROFILER 2 overlay to the desired location. For rotation and offset instructions, see “Rotation” on page 143 and “Beam Center Offset” on page 143. View Dosemap View Orientation Instructions Figure 7-12. Rotation and Offset from Imported File 3 Click the View Orientation Instructions button in the Import window toolbar. This will display instructions for aligning the PROFILER 2 to the cross hairs so that the measured data will match the position of the overlay in the Import window (Figure 7-12). 4 Follow the on-screen orientation instructions. CAUTION: Before making an exposure, make sure that the blue “Electronics are clear” message is visible at the top of the dosemap view. DO NOT IRRIDIATE IF THE ! RED “ELECTRONICS IN BEAM” MESSAGE IS VISIBLE. You may damage the instrument. 5 Set up the accelerator for the planned dose. 6 Click the Start button and deliver the planned dose to the PROFILER 2. 7 When the accelerator turns off, click the Stop button. The measurement results will appear in the Graph view (main screen). 8 Save the results. 9 Compare the planned file to the measured file. See “Comparing Profiles” on page 115. 144 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 157. Import Window Display The import display is a 2-dimensional dose map produced by a treatment planning system. It shows the expected distribution of dose over a selected area when the plan is delivered to a flat phantom (Figure 7-13). Menu Toolbar Options Rotation Offset values Angle Electronics Centimeter status scale message Imported 2- dimensional planned dose map Legend bar shows values for colored regions. Detector numbers (white) Figure 7-13. Display of an Imported Plan File Imported data appears as a color graphic sized to fit the window. Centimeter scales show the X- and Y-axes. Areas of higher dose are shown in shades of red while areas of lower dose are shown in blue. A legend bar on the right side of the window shows the values associated with each color. PROFILER 2 detector locations are a white overlay on the imported data. The white numbers indi- cate the PROFILER 2 detector numbers. When an imported file is selected and made visible, profiles of the planned data appear in the PROFILER 2 arrays. Note that you may have to drag the import window to one side so you can see the profiles on the main window of the PROFILER 2 software. TPS Import Window Menu Options There are two menu options in the TPS Import window: • Tools > View in Excel - displays the data in an Excel spreadsheet. • Options > Dosemap Orientation - Displays a list of available treatment planning system file types, and allows the user to select if the X and/or Y values will be inverted when importing these file types. TPS Import Window Toolbar The TPS Import window has a toobar at the top of the window. The following figure describes the toolbar options: Importing Planned Dose Files 145
- 158. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 No. Name Description 1 Open File Opens a dialog box to select the file to import. The file type options are: ADAC Pinnacle3, Brain Lab Brain Scan, CMS FOCUS, Elekta Precise Plan, Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Care, MDS Nordion Helax TMS, NOMOS COR- VUS (Peacock), Nucletron PLATO, RAHD Alpha 3D/Pro, Prowess Panther, Varian CAD, Varian Eclipse, CMS Xio, DICOM RTDOSE, Nucletron Oncentra TP Sun- , COM, Film, Siemens KonRad, 3Dline Ergo, PerMedics Odyssey, Radionics XKnife, TomoTherapy Hi Art, AccuSoft AccuKnife, TGM ARTP DICOM EPID (RTI- , MAGE), DICOM CR (RTIMAGE), EPIDose, MAPcalc 2 Display Dose Grid Toggles the display of numerical values for the dose map. 3 Close Window Close the import window. 4 Rotate Overlay Allows the user to drag the overlay to the desired angle. The rotation angle is indicated below the button. 5 Move Overlay Allows the user to move the overlay to the desired central axis offset. The offset coordinates are displayed below the shift buttons (13, 14, 15, and 16). 6 Reset to Home Resets the angle and central axis offset back to their original position. 7 Select Slice Displays a dialog box to select the appropriate volume, slice (if file includes mul- tiple slices), or dose depth. 8 View Dosemap Displays the imported dose map. 9 View Header Displays the header data associated with the imported dose map. 10 View Orientation Displays instructions for aligning the PROFILER 2 to the cross hairs so that the Instructions measured data will match the position of the overlay. 11 Rotate Click to rotate the dose map 45 degrees counterclockwise. Counterclockwise 12 Rotate Clockwise Click to rotate the dose map 45 degrees clockwise. 13 Shift Overlay Left Click to shift the PROFILER 2 overlay 0.1 cm to the left. The offset coordinates are displayed below the button. 14 Shift Overlay Click to shift the PROFILER 2 overlay 0.1 cm to the right.The offset coordinates Right are displayed below the button. 15 Shift Overlay Up Click to shift the PROFILER 2 overlay up by 0.1 cm.The offset coordinates are displayed below the button. 16 Shift Overlay Click to shift the PROFILER 2 overlay down by 0.1 cm.The offset coordinates are Down displayed below the button. Figure 7-14. TPS Import Window Toolbar Inverting Imported Files If treatment plans files are consistently inverted in the X axis, Y axis, or in both axes relative to the measured files, you can set preferences to automatically invert the plan files axes when they are imported. WARNING: Symmetrical files appear the same when inverted. Be sure you ! have set the inversion parameters correctly and that your planning software has not changed the file orientation due to an upgrade, changed version, or changed method. 1 In the PROFILER 2 menu, select File > Import > Planned Dose. The Planning System Import window is displayed. 2 In the Planning System Import window, select Options > Dosemap Orientation from the menu. The ‘Dose Map Orientation’ dialog box opens (Figure 7-15). 146 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 159. 1 2 5 3 4 Item Description 1 List of available TPS file types. Highlight the file type that you would like to configure. 2 Invert X - If this box is selected, when the user clicks the Set button a green checkmark is placed in the Invert X column next to the selected file type. The next time this type of TPS file is imported, the X axis values will be inverted. 3 Invert Y - If this box is selected, when the user clicks the Set button a green checkmark is placed in the Invert Y column next to the selected file type. The next time this type of TPS type is imported, the Y axis values will be inverted. 4 Set button - ‘Sets’ the changes in the affected TPS file type. Changes the red X to a green checkmark in the affected column (X or Y). 5 List Config button - Displays the Treatment Plan Vendor List Configuration screen where the user can add or remove vendors from the TPS file type list. Figure 7-15. Dose Map Orientation Dialog Box 3 In the Treatment Plan Importing list, highlight the treatment plan to be inverted. 4 Check the box for Invert X, Invert Y, or both. 5 Click the Set button. The axis or axes selected for inversion will change from a red X to a green check mark. The axes marked with the green check will be inverted when that type of plan is imported. Check for Dose Map Inversion If you are not sure if your files are inverted or which axis is inverted, you can check it using the following method: 1 Create a planned file that is geometrically asymmetrical, such as an “L” shape. 2 Measure the selected plan, with the instrument oriented with its Y axis directed toward the Gantry, and crosshairs centered on the XY axis. 3 Import the selected plan. 4 Compare the measured and imported images. If the orientation is correct, no further action is required. 5 If the comparison is not correct, determine which axis is inverted. Using an “L” shaped plan as an example, if an “L” appears in the measured display, and the imported display looks like a “7”, then x and y are inverted. Or, if there is a measured “L” and a backward “7”, i.e., an inverted L, then the y axis is inverted. 6 In the instrument program, change the import settings for the planning program that you are using. 7 After the editing, re-start the instrument program. The program will now invert the selected axis or axes each time a plan is imported. Import the file again and verify that the orientation is correct in both the measured and imported windows. Now other fields can be measured, imported and compared. Importing Planned Dose Files 147
- 160. 8 If your planning program is updated, verification of the orientation should be repeated. Run- ning this test with a generally uniform distribution plan is not recommended because inherent symmetry may make it difficult to detect an orientation error. An “L” shaped plan is recommended. Excluding Import Filters If you only import one or a few treatment plan file types, you can eliminate the other filters from the Import menu drop down box. This simplifies importing. 1 In the Import window, select Options > Dosemap Orientation from the menu. The ‘Dose Map Orientation’ dialog box opens. 2 Click the List Config button. The ‘Treatment Plan Vendor List Configuration’ dialog box opens (Figure 7-16). • The available vendors list (left side) is color-coded to indicate which vendors are included. Those listed in blue are included and those listed in red are not. • The included vendors list (right side) contains only those vendors that the user wishes to see in the open dialog box (Figure 7-16). Figure 7-16. Selecting One Or More Treatment Plans To Appear On The Import List 3 Use the arrow buttons to select only the vendors you want to appear on the list. To add a ven- dor, highlight it in the available vendors list and then click the right arrow to copy it to the included vendors list. To remove a vendor, highlight it in the included vendors list and click the left arrow to move it back to the available vendors list. 4 When you are done selecting included vendors, click OK. The ‘Dose Map Orientation’ dialog box now shows only the selected treatment plan vendors. Importing a Slice Or Volume File If the imported data is a volume (such as Plato) or consists of multiple slices (such as BrainLAB) an extra button appears on the toolbar of the Import window (Figure 7-17). You must choose the desired slice for comparison. CAUTION: For proper comparison, you need to verify that the slice selected corre- ! sponds with the measured dose map. 148 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 161. ‘Select Slice’ button ap- pears if file is a volume or has slices. Click but- ton to display selection slider (below). Pull down list of available fields (slices) Figure 7-17. Data slice selection controls 1 Click the Select Slice button on the toolbar. The ‘Slice Selection’ dialog box opens. 2 Pull down the Field Name selection list, click on the desired field, and then click OK to view that slice. TPS File Import - Troubleshooting Opening Plan Files CAUTION: You must select the file type from the pull-down box at the bottom of the ! dialog box BEFORE you click on a file name. Always select the file type first, before selecting the file name. If you click a file with the filter set for the wrong type, you will usually get an error message. Error Messages The following table lists specific error messages that may appear when you are trying to import files. Table 7-1. Import Filter Error Messages Message Meaning DICOM dose units expected cGy Dose units were not in cGy; change units and re-export dose map. DICOM files should have extension dcm DICOM files must have the .dcm extension. You may be able to rename the file if it is in DICOM format. Did not find (name of field keyword) before Required keyword is missing; possibly not the correct type of end of file file; wrong file selected; or file has been corrupted. Expected keyword version, found _______. The filter did not find the expected keyword in the expected location within this file; possibly not the correct type of file; wrong file selected; or file has been corrupted. Expected version x.x.x, found y.y.y The filter does not support the software version that was used to create the file. Dose data is missing File may be corrupted; wrong file type. Error in grid min, max definition File may be corrupted; wrong file type. Importing Planned Dose Files 149
- 162. Table 7-1. Import Filter Error Messages (Continued) Message Meaning Expected (modality or file type) of _______, Filter expected one file type, but found a different file type. found _____ The file type must match the one selected in the ‘Files of Type’ pull-down list. First X, Y coordinate not same for all levels Grid spacing is not the same in all slices. Grid spacing not positive Grid spacing must be positive; plan may be rotated or flipped. Grid spacing not same for all levels Spacing of values different for different horizontal slices of dose volume; reset plan and re-export dose map. Import file did not load Filter encountered an error; retry import or re-export dose map. No depth interval or non-uniform spacing Can’t read file because spacing is not uniform. Number of X and/or Y dose points not greater Number of points in dose grid seems to be 0 or negative. Must than one have a grid of positive value. Spacing value not > 0 Bad data or grid flipped. Unable to open file (filename) Filter was not able to open selected file. Unable to open simulation plan file (file name) Nucletron Plato plan requires two files; unable to find the sec- ond file (file name). Import Filter Updates The import filter is a dynamic linking library (DLL) file that is distributed with each PROFILER 2. The file is part of the application software that you load on your computer, and may be updated when a new software release is available. Software updates for the PROFILER 2 are available free of charge during the standard warranty period. However, after the standard warranty period expires, software upgrades for the PROFILER 2 are no longer furnished. You may want to purchase an annual Software Maintenance Agreement that provides all issued software upgrades during the maintenance period. This will ensure that your PROFILER 2 instrument continues to communicate with your TPS computer. Since TPS ven- dors often change software formats, Sun Nuclear Corporation regularly modifies the PROFILER 2 software to read the TPS files as they change. Contact your sales representative for additional details. Importing Water Tank Measured Files This software feature allows importing of files created by scanning water tanks. The imported files can be displayed, compared, and manipulated using any of the PROFILER 2 tools. The water tank file import utility currently supports the following file types: • Pinnacle files (*.dat) • Mephysto files (*.exp) • OmniPro files (*.asc) To ensure that flatness measurements remain consistent between the water tank and the PRO- FILER 2, use similar buildup and sufficient backscatter when measuring with the PROFILER 2. 150 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 163. Water Tank File Import Procedure 1 Collect the watertank measurement as described in the manufacturer’s documentation. 2 Select File > Import > Watertank Measured from the menu. The ‘Select a Watertank File’ window is displayed. Figure 7-18. Select a Watertank File Window 3 Navigate to the location of the file you want to import (the location could be a removable media drive, your hard drive, or somewhere on a network). 4 Select the file and then click Open. The ‘Select a Profile to Display’ dialog box appears. This dialog box displays all of the profiles present in the selected file grouped by setup: each unique combination of depth/ssd/field size has a unique group. Within each group, all of the profiles collected under that setup are listed as either X profiles or Y profiles. Figure 7-19. Select a Profile to Display Dialog Box 5 Click the Expand All button or the plus sign next to the Field Size to display the profiles within the group. Figure 7-20. Profiles Displayed in Dialog Box Importing Water Tank Measured Files 151
- 164. 6 Click on a profile to select it. To select multiple profiles, press the SHIFT key while clicking on each profile. One profile from each axis may be selected. Once you have the appropriate pro- file(s) selected, click OK. The ‘PT Data Offsets’ dialog box is displayed. Figure 7-21. PT Data Offsets Dialog Box 7 Specify the shift that will be applied to the watertank data before it is imported, and then click OK. The watertank data can now be viewed and analyzed in the Graph, Header, and Data views. Following is a sample graph view of watertank data: Figure 7-22. Water Tank Data in Graph View Exporting Data Data can be exported in three formats: SNC ASCII, DQA3 Measurement, or Pinnacle ASCII. • SNC ASCII format—Data in PROFILER 2 tab delimited ASCII text format can be exported to the clipboard or directly to a file. The exported file can be opened with a spreadsheet or word processor for off-line analysis. Advanced exporting can be done via the export menu item, but a quick export of just the selected file can be done via the Edit > Copy menu option or by pressing CTRL+C on the keyboard. • DQA3 Measurement—Exports ASCII data containing measurements from PROFILER 2 diodes that are in the equivalent location of the DQA3 detectors (top, bottom, left, right, and center). These measurements are similar to data in a DQA3 database. • Pinnacle ASCII—Exports beam modeling data in Pinnacle full ASCII file format. The data can be imported directly into a Pinnacle3 treatment planning system. 152 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 165. SNC ASCII Export This feature exports header information and file data. There are two ways to export the data: by selecting the menu option or by copying the data on the screen directly to the Windows clipboard. From Menu Select File> Export >SNC ASCII from the menu to display the ‘Export Data’ dialog box (Figure 7- 23). This dialog box allows you to export data for just one file, or data for multiple files to compare the data side by side. The following options are provided in the ‘Export Data’ dialog box: • Export to clipboard or directly to a text file • Selection of data type: background, calibration, raw, corrected, dose, or normalized • Selection of data mode: Avg Rate, Inst Rate, or Total Dose • Optionally include field labels with the export • Optionally include frame data from multi-frame files • Optionally apply orientation offsets to the data • Export data for the selected file only, all open files including the device file, all open files except the device file, or only the files that are currently displayed (not hidden). Note: To ‘hide’ a file, hold down the CTRL key and right-click the file name in the Leg- end panel. For details about the ‘Export Data’ dialog box, see “File > Export > SNC ASCII” on page 29. Figure 7-23. Export Data to SNC ASCII Dialog Box When the SNC ASCII data is saved to a file, the default location is the ‘Exports’ folder in the same directory where the PROFILER 2 software is installed (typically C:SNCPROFILER2). By Copying The PROFILER 2 software can publish screen data to the Windows clipboard in tab-delimited text format, as follows: • In any view (Graph, Header, Data, Beam Tuning, or Data Plot), select the appropriate file in the Legend Panel, then without selecting any cells or other control, press Ctrl+C to export the header data, detector data, and frame data for the currently selected file. This is the same as using the Export > SNC ASCII menu option. • In the Header or Data views, highlight the cells to be exported then press Ctrl+C to copy the selected data to the Windows clipboard. Exporting Data 153
- 166. DQA3 Measurement Export This feature lets you use an PROFILER 2 device as a daily device. The data can be viewed on the screen or exported to a text file. 1 Select File > Export > DQA Measurement from the menu to display the ‘Daily QA3 Export’ dialog box (Figure 7-24). This dialog box displays the interpolated values at the Daily QA Check 3 primary positions as taken from the currently selected file. Figure 7-24. Export to DQA dialog box 2 To create a printout with the same information displayed in the dialog box, click the Print but- ton, or to save a simple text file containing the data displayed in the dialog box, click the Save button. The default location is the ‘Exports’ folder in the same directory where the PROFILER 2 software is installed (typically C:SNCPROFILER2). Pinnacle Export PROFILER 2 measurements can be used for beam modeling in Pinnacle software. The data from a measurement is exported in a file format that can be read by the Pinnacle planning software. The PROFILER 2 file that is currently selected in the software can be exported in ‘Pinnacle Full File Format’. The export either creates a new Pinnacle file, or it appends to an existing file. The default values for the Pinnacle header information are drawn from the header fields of the selected file, but you have the option to make changes to these values in the dialog box before the data is saved. Header fields The Pinnacle file needs values for Energy, Jaw Positions, and SSD & Depth. The value for Energy and the 4 Jaw Positions (Left, Right, Top, Bottom) are copied directly out of the file header. The values can be edited in the ‘Profile Header Information’ dialog box before saving. The SSD & Depth values are a bit more complicated. The exported data will be imported into the Pinnacle planning system as water tank data, so the Depth recorded in the file represents a “water equivalent” depth, and the SSD recorded represents the distance to a virtual water surface. In the case where the buildup used is water equivalent, then the SSD is simply the SSD found in the header, and the depth is simply the depth found in the header plus 1.0 g/cm2 to represent the inherent buildup of the PROFILER 2 device. In the case where the buildup is not water-equivalent, the water-equivalent depth is calculated by the following formula: Inherent buildup + BuildupThickness x BuildupDensity The SSD to the virtual water surface is calculated according to the following formula: (User Entered SSD) – BuildupThickness x (BuildupDensity-1.0) The SSD, Buildup, Buildup Density, and inherent Buildup are initially populated from the header (or the default value of 0.9 in the case of the inherent buildup) after which the user can modify and recalculate the Water Equiv Depth and SSDw values. 154 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 167. Data Orientation The data positions recorded into the file are all relative to the beam CAX, using the right-handed Pinnacle coordinate system. This coordinate system has positive Y pointing towards the machine and positive X pointing in the direction 90 degrees counter-clockwise of the positive Y. The PRO- FILER 2 detector positions are initially in a left-handed coordinate system with positive Y pointing towards the top of the device and positive X pointing in the direction 90 degrees clockwise of the positive Y. Before being saved into the file, the PROFILER 2 detector positions are converted into Beam CAX coordinates using the orientation and shift applied to the PROFILER 2 device. The initial position and orientation of the PROFILER 2 device is taken from the header information, and the user is given the opportunity to edit them in the dialog box. Wedge and Circular Collimator The Export to Pinnacle dialog box contains an optional field for ‘Wedge Name’. If the header con- tains wedge information, this field is initialized as “<wedgetype> <wedgeangle>” and the user is allowed to edit it before saving. Another optional field is the circular collimator. There is no PRO- FILER 2 header equivalent so this field is initially blank. Export Procedure WARNING: Ensure that the PROFILER 2 is properly calibrated, the correct exposure is measured, and that the data is properly transferred to Pinnacle. ! After modeling, perform test exposures to check for correct accelerator out- put before treating patients. Incorrect use could result in over- or under- exposure of the patient. 1 Set up the accelerator, position the PROFILER 2, and measure the field that you want to import into the Pinnacle planning software. 2 After measuring the field, select it and display the measured data on the screen. 3 Select File > Export > ADAC ASCII from the menu The ‘Export to Pinnacle’ dialog box is dis- played. For a detailed description of the options in this dialog box, see “File > Export > ADAC ASCII” on page 31. Exporting Data 155
- 168. Figure 7-25. Export to Pinnacle Treatment Planning System Dialog Box 4 Edit the data in the dialog box as necessary. 5 Click Save. 6 Enter a file name and location for the file and click OK. The default location is the ‘Exports’ folder in the same directory where the PROFILER 2 software is installed (typically C:SNCPROFILER2). 7 Transfer the file to the Pinnacle planning system. 8 Refer to the Pinnacle planning system documentation to upload the file. 156 Section 7. Importing/Exporting Data
- 169. 8 Interpreting Measurements Assuring Accurate Measurements Calibration Accurate measurements depend on, among other things, a properly calibrated instrument. You should take care to be sure that the following steps have been taken: • Current array calibration files are available for each machine, energy level, and type of expo- sure (electron, photon, or cobalt). • Each array calibration file is created by precisely following the steps listed in the dialog box and ensuring accurate alignment, level, and SSD. • A dose calibration is made for each machine, energy level, and type of exposure (electron, photon, or cobalt). If absolute dose is required, the dose calibration value must be confirmed with a standard test setup traceable to a recognized standard. • The calibration fixture (P/N 1174350) should be used with each calibration. • Repeat all calibrations at least annually or more frequently when the instrument is heavily used. See also “Recalibration Interval” on page 97. Reporting Hardware or Software Faults Report any evidence of PROFILER 2 hardware or software faults to the manufacturer by tele- phone, fax, or E-mail. Calibration Concepts Array Calibration A calibration function is included with the software that enables the user to calibrate the PRO- FILER 2 for use on all of the beam energies produced by the accelerator. The procedure uses a wide radiation field for measurement and is very simple; it takes only a few minutes to complete. For best results, all beam energies should be calibrated. Calibration Files There is no limit to the number of calibration files that the PC can hold, other than disk space. There is a limit of 10 calibration files that can be stored in the PROFILER 2’s flash memory. When the PROFILER 2 is used, the calibration is only selected from the computer. The reason that calibration files are stored in the PROFILER 2 flash memory is to allow PROFILER 2s and comput- ers to be switched and always have access to calibration files that correspond to a PROFILER 2. For example, if a facility has several PROFILER 2s that are exchanged or shared between comput- ers, then there will always be a calibration file with the PROFILER 2 that will be downloaded into the computer, even if this computer has never been used with the present PROFILER 2. If only one PROFILER 2 is used with a given computer, it is not necessary to save the calibration files to the PROFILER 2’s flash memory. The fact that there are only 10 calibration slots in the PRO- FILER 2 does not detract from the PROFILER 2’s utility. The computer can hold all the calibration files that one would take time to prepare. Assuring Accurate Measurements 157
- 170. Theory of Calibration Using Wide Fields Calibration values consist of sensitivity values for each detector that can be applied to the mea- sured output of a detector in such a way that the corrected measurement of dose distribution is independent of the detector sensitivity. Historical methods of calibration use a narrow field and a device to move the detector array in steps such that each detector occupies the central axis posi- tion while its response is measured. If the array detector’s response is energy and directional dependent, then the calibration value is valid only at the beam energy and beam orientation used during calibration. The severity of this limitation depends upon the magnitude of the energy response. These problems are eliminated in the wide field calibration technique described below. The linear array is positioned in the radiation field such that the field overlaps the end detectors. For clarity, steps C and D of the calibration process will be discussed first. Radiation is delivered to the array and the measurement of the detectors are saved in a data array labeled as [C]. The array is then moved laterally along the array axis such that the detectors now occupy positions in the fields formerly occupied by the adjacent detectors. Another dose is deliv- ered and the measurement is saved in a data array [D]. In the simplest form, if the dose delivered is precisely the same for both [C] and [D], and if the measurements have a very high precision, then the relative sensitivity of neighboring detectors can be calculated because they both occupied the same location in the field. For example, the array was shifted for [D] and #2 (detector number 2 in the array) occupies #1’s former position during [C]. Then the sensitivity ratio of #2 to #1 is ‘D2’ / ‘C1.’ Likewise the sensi- tivity ratio of #3 to #2 is ‘D3’ / ‘C2,’ and the sensitivity ratio of #3 to #1 is (‘D3’ / ‘C2’) * (‘D2’ / ‘C1’). In like manner, the entire array sensitivity can be calculated with respect to detector #1. The benefit of such a calibration is that the measured values for each detector’s calibration is taken at or near the field location where it will be used to measure the field distribution. Any change in energy (including that caused by scatter in a wide field) or angle of incidence at adjacent regions in the field will be small which will minimize any error caused by an energy or directional response. Furthermore, the relative sensitivity between neighbors will be known to a higher pre- cision because it is a simple ratio between two measured values, at the spatial location where they will be used. This will result in a higher precision in field profile measurement, which can reveal significant profile shapes otherwise obscured by measurement artifacts. However, such a simple calibration is not practical without further measurements. With the calcu- lation described above in steps C and D, any error in measurement precision, dose delivery, or minor sensitivity change in the array will propagate through the ratios and the end could have a significant error which could have significant effects on symmetry calculations. For example, a 0.1% error bias in the dose delivery will cause a 4.6% sensitivity error on the 46th detector. The error bias between data sets [C] and [D] can be corrected by rotating the array 180 degrees and making a third measurement, saving it as data array [A]. With data set [A], the relative sensi- tivity between the end detectors can now be calculated because they occupy each other’s former positions. In fact, the relative sensitivity between all mirror detectors can be calculated. These true relative sensitivity values can then be used to determine a correction to the error bias with a pre- cision limited only by the measurement precision between a detector pair. There are several requirements between these data sets: 1 The movement of the detector array should not change the scatter conditions to the detector array. 2 The dose distribution profile from the machine should not change from one data set to the next, i.e., the profile shape must stay constant. It is allowed that the actual dose or dose rate change between data sets, these changes are compensated in the data analysis. However, if the energy of the beam itself changes during or between data sets, then the profile shape will change which will invalidate the calibration process. 3 The relative sensitivity of the detectors all change the same amount. This statement is in rec- ognition of the equilibration of a detector’s response during radiation exposure. Typical changes in response are small (0.1%) and can hardly be measured. Furthermore, the change may be due to the measurement electronics. 158 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 171. The field size must overlap the end detectors sufficiently to allow the end detectors to be irradi- ated without penumbra effects. Buildup over and around the detectors must be uniform and extend beyond the field size. The field shape (i.e., dose distribution) can be irregular, however, high gradient changes in intensity will require higher precision in array positioning than for low gradient changes. This concept can be expanded to off axis detectors with an intermediate rotation of the array such that off axis detectors occupy detector locations formerly occupied by the linear array. Then rela- tive sensitivities of the off axis detectors can be calculated with respect to the array sensitivity. In the case of the PROFILER 2, there are off axis detectors located 8 cm from the center which require a 90 degree rotation to be calculated, referred to as step [B]. Profile Storage And Data Format Saving a Profile After pressing the Stop button, you are prompted to save the file if ‘Auto Save Collected Data’ is selected in ‘Setup Parameters’. If ‘Auto Save Collected Data’ is turned off, you can save the profile by using the Save As command under the File menu. If AutoSave is off and Start is selected before saving a profile, the data will be lost. If the PROFILER 2 program is closed before saving the data, a warning message appears which gives an opportunity to save the data under the Save As function, or Cancel and exit the program. The file path will be C:SNCPROFILER2Data<serial number>filename. If the PROFILER 2 was installed under a different directory, then that path will be followed. During installation, a ‘Data’ directory was created for profile storage. When Save As is selected, the ‘Edit’ screen appears, which provides a template to document the parameters associated with the profile being saved. PROFILER 2 File Formats The following table lists the file formats for PROFILER 2. Table 8-1. File Formats for PROFILER 2 File Name Extension Description Single Profile .prs A single profile data set. Concatenated Profile .prc A concatenation consisting of two separate profiles combined to make a single profile. This type of file is used to save profiles wider than 30 cm up to 60 cm. Multi Frame Capture .prm A multi-frame file, consisting of multiple profile frames. This is a sequence of profiles taken at regular intervals, allowing you to record transients, such as warm-up. Calibration .cal A standard array calibration file. Note: File formats for the PROFILER 2 are the same as the file formats for the IC PROFILER. SRS Profiler File Formats The following table lists the file format for the SRS PROFILER. Although this format can only be created with the SRS PROFILER, it can be opened in the PROFILER software. Table 8-2. File Format for SRS PROFILER File Name Extension Description Multi-frame file .snb A multi-frame file, consisting of multiple profile frames. Profile Storage And Data Format 159
- 172. Profiler 1 File Formats The following table lists the file formats for Profiler1. Although these formats can only be created with the Profiler1, they can be opened in the PROFILER 2 software. Table 8-3. File Formats for Profiler1 File Name Extension Description Single Profile .pro A single profile data set. If you save to this format, a text file with the same name but the extension .txt is also generated. Text .txt A text file created automatically whenever you save a .pro file. The .txt file contains the same data as the .pro file. This provides a user- readable file that is created as a result of selecting Save As from the File menu. The file format may be examined by opening the cor- responding .txt file using a text editor or a spreadsheet program such as Excel. Double Profile .jpr A data set from two Profilers at the same time, single acquisition. This format is similar to the .pro files but contains data from two Profilers. Normally, the two Profilers are connected using the array extension kit. Concatenated Profile .cat A concatenation consisting of two separate profiles combined to make a single profile. This type of file is used to save profiles wider than 20 x 20 cm up to 40 x 40 cm. Single Multi Frame .mvi A “movie” file, consisting of multiple profile frames. This is a Capture sequence of profiles taken at regular intervals, allowing you to record transients, such as warm-up. Double Multi Frame .jmv A double “movie” file. This is a movie file but with two Profilers con- Capture nected with the array extension kit. Calibration .cal A standard array calibration file. Calibration (dual) .jca An array calibration file for two Profilers joined together with the array extension kit. Note: Single 2D Profile (.p2d) and Double 2D Profile (.jp2) are not supported. Analysis of a Profile The Analysis panel displays numerical analysis results of field size, beam center, light/radiation coincidence, penumbra, flatness, symmetry, etc. A very important feature of the Analysis panel is the real time update during data collection. All parameters are calculated and displayed after each update from the PROFILER 2. If the Inst Rate mode is selected, then the analysis is on the last update of the output of the accelerator. If the ‘Avg Rate’ mode or ‘Total Dose’ mode is selected, the analysis will be on the total output of the machine since pressing Start. For example, if beam steering adjustments are required on the accelerator to achieve symmetry, then, with the Inst Rate setting, beam changes due to adjustments are shown immediately. Beam Tuning view is a special case of this without storing the data to file. With Inst Rate mode selected, the Analysis panel will display these changes in real time as the adjustments are made. A perfect adjustment will be a 0% reading in the symmetry box. The Flat- ness value is also updated and displayed above the symmetry box, as well as the other parameters as described below. The following variables and relationships describe the analysis applied to a profile (Figure 8-1). Note: These relationships apply equally to the X-axis and Y-axis. See also “Analysis Panel” on page 70. 160 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 173. Figure 8-1. Characteristics of a Typical Profile Subscripted indices refer to virtual detector locations, such as lFRGN, etc. Variable definitions: CM = The virtual detector number associated with the calculated beam center position. The subscript M refers to middle. lh + rh C M = -------------- - 2 DRj = Dose rate of detector j during the profile interval. FRGN = The Field ReGioN over which flatness, area symmetry, and symmetry is calculated. It is expressed as a percent of the Field Size (FS) and displayed in the box next to Flatness, as a number in parentheses. The default value for this is 80%. You can adjust the value, but it cannot exceed 100%. l= First detector j whose displayed array value is greater than 1/2 of the maximum array value, searching from 1 to 83 for the Y axis and from 1 to 57 for the X axis. Detector l is such that: 1 1 DR l – 1 ≤ -- MAX [ DR i ] , DR l > -- MAX [ DR i ] - - 2 2 The variable “l” represents the left portion of the array as viewed on the graph. If the value of l is not greater than or equal to 2, the software will display the error mes- sage “Variable out of range.” Analysis of a Profile 161
- 174. lh = Virtual detector location for the left 50% (half) beam intensity point. 1 ⎛ -- ( MAX [ DR j ] ) – DR l – 1⎞ - 2 ⎜ ---------------------------------------------------------- ⎟ - lh = l – 1 + ⎜ DR l – DR l – 1 ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ lFRGN = Virtual detector location for the left side of specified field region size, defined as FRGN%. By definition, lFRGN ≥ lh. FRGN l FRGN = C M + ( l h – C M ) ⋅ --------------- - 100 lf = Integer detector index, corresponding to the first detector on the left side included in the FRGN. lf = int ( l FRGN ) + 1 r= Last detector number (j) whose displayed array value (ADR if dose, DR if rate) is greater than 1/2 of the maximum array value, searching from 1 to 83 for the Y axis or 1 to 57 for the X axis. Detector r is such that: 1 1 DR r + 1 ≤ -- MAX [ DR i ] , DR r > -- MAX [ DR i ] - - 2 2 The subscript “r” represents the right portion of the array as viewed on the graph. The value of r must be less than or equal to 82 for the Y axis, or less than or equal to 56 for the X axis, or the software will display the error message “Variable out of range.” rh = Virtual detector location for the right 50% (half) beam intensity point. 1 ⎛ DR r – -- MAX [ DR j ]⎞ - 2 ⎜ ------------------------------------------------⎟ rh = r + ⎜ DR r – DR r + 1 ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ rFRGN = Virtual detector location for the right side of specified field region size, defined as FRGN%. By definition, rFRGN is less than or equal to rh. FRGN r FRGN = C M + ( r h – C M ) ⋅ --------------- - 100 rf = integer detector index, corresponding to the last detector on the right side included in the FRGN. rf = int ( r FRGN ) Field Size Field size, in cm, is calculated from the difference in the 50% virtual detector positions, SSD - FS = ------------------- ⋅ ( r h – l h ) ⋅ 0.40 cm SSD + 1 where SSD is the distance to the PROFILER 2 surface in cm. 162 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 175. If the ‘Top Plate Field Size Compensation’ option in the Analysis settings (Configure >Analysis) is enabled, the software will factor in the inherent buildup of the attached device when reporting the measured field size for calculating light/radiation field coincidence.The inherent buildup of the PROFILER 2 is 1.0 cm. If enabled, the software reports the field size at the detector plane, other- wise it reports the field size at the overlay. See the profile header information for the actual field size and the SSD entry. The SSD field can be edited; the default value is 100 cm. Note that at 100 cm, field size calculations will be reduced by 1% because by geometric ratio, the detectors are 1% further away than the surface of the PRO- FILER 2, where the field size is actually set. Beam Center The beam center position is calculated from the detector number j=CM in the Y and X arrays using the following transformations: Y j = ( j – 42 ) × 0.40 cm X j = ( j – 29 ) × 0.40 cm Light/Radiation Field Coincidence The light/radiation field coincidence is the radiation offset from the light edge, displayed as centi- meters from the edges of the field. A negative result shows the radiation edge is inside the light edge, i.e., the light field edge overlaps the radiation field edge. Analysis assumes the light field edges are aligned with one of the rectangular field marks on the PROFILER 2’s surface. Select the appropriate actual field size to define the calculation. If the actual field size is left blank, the program uses the default field size that is set in the ‘Configure Analysis’ dialog box (Setup > Analysis). The actual field size can be defined in the ‘Profile Header Information’ dialog box (Edit > Edit Header) or by right-clicking in the parameters area of the Analysis panel and selecting Edit > Light Field Params. The known template locations are subtracted from the radiation field locations, calculated from the interpolated 50% points lh and rh values using the transformation functions Yj and Xj. Penumbra The penumbra width is calculated and displayed in the Analysis panel. The penumbra region (i.e., 20% to 80% intensity) is adjustable in the ‘Configure Analysis’ dialog box (Setup > Analysis), or by right-clicking in the parameters area of the Analysis panel and selecting Edit > Penumbra Params from the menu. Enter the percentage values for penumbra top and bottom. The selected values are shown in parentheses in the ‘Penumbra’ parameters in the Analysis panel. The allowed range is: • Top: 50 to 90% • Bottom: 10 to 50% For these “virtual” detector locations, the value used is interpolated from a piece-wise linear curve. Flatness The Flatness calculation method and field region used to calculate flatness can be selected in the Configure Analysis dialog box (Setup > Analysis), or by right-clicking in the parameters area of the Analysis panel and selecting Edit > Flatness from the menu. The software provide three methods for calculating flatness: Flatness Calculation by Variance This method calculates the flatness of the radiation profile, expressed as a ± percent value and calculated over a specified portion of the field size (FRGN), typically 80% of the field size. MX – MN FLAT = ± ------------------------ ⋅ 100% - MX + MN Analysis of a Profile 163
- 176. The numeric value is actually half of the maximum percent variation, i.e., it is expressed from the average between the maximum and the minimum. For example, if FLAT = ±2.5%, then the range from maximum to minimum is approximately 5%. MX = Maximum value of a chamber in the specified field region MN = Minimum value of a chamber in the specified field region Ratio (IEC) Flatness Calculation This method of calculation is according to IEC Standard 976. It determines the flatness of the radi- ation profile, expressed as a ± percent value and calculated over a portion of the field size The relevant field sizes (X and Y axes) for this calculation are: 5cm to 10cm: (the distance from 50% left of CAX to 50% right CAX) - 2cm 10cm to 30cm: (the distance from 50% left of CAX to 50% right of CAX) * 0.8 30cm to ? cm: (the distance from 50% left of CAX to 50% right of CAX) - 6cm The Ratio (IEC) flatness calculation is MX FLAT = ± -------- ⋅ 100 , - MN where: MX = Maximum value of a chamber in the specified field region MN = Minimum value of a chamber in the specified field region Varian Flatness Calculation This method calculates the central axis normalized flatness. MX – MN FLAT = ----------------------- - CAX where: MX = Maximum value of a chamber in the specified field region: [DRj], for lFRGN < j < rFRGN MN = Minimum value of a chamber in the specified field region: [DRj], for lFRGN < j < rFRGN. Symmetry The software supports the following types of symmetry calculations: • CAX Point Difference • Local Point Difference • Point Ratio (Ratio IEC) • Varian Point Difference • Area Average • Area The Symmetry calculation method and field region used to calculate symmetry can be selected in the Configure Analysis dialog box (Setup > Analysis), or by right-clicking in the parameters area of the Analysis panel and selecting Edit > Symmetry from the menu. CAUTION: You can select different types of symmetry in the Analysis Panel and the ! Graph display. Verify that you have set them up correctly for your needs. 164 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 177. Since the Analysis panel symmetry and the Graph display symmetry can be set independently of each other, it is good practice to verify your symmetry settings before performing detailed analy- sis. If you want the Analysis panel symmetry and Graph display symmetry to be the same, you must verify that they match. See “Setup > Analysis” on page 43 and “On Graph Display Toolbar” on page 54. The Analysis panel displays the results of the selected symmetry calculation across the calculated field region. If any of the field region formulas encounter an error, no symmetry results will appear in the Analysis panel. When a point symmetry formula is selected for the Analysis panel, the point symmetry formula is calculated for all pairs of points which fall within the field region, and the worst results are displayed. Area symmetry is calculated as expected, upon the entire field region. The Graph symmetry displays area symmetry information using the physical center of the array and field boundaries that are selected by the user (i.e., the detector closest to where the user dou- ble-clicked and its symmetrical detector). Note: The method of calculating symmetry is selected independently for the Analysis panel and the Graph display. It is possible to set them differently. CAX Point Difference Symmetry In this analysis, symmetrical points are normalized to the central axis (CAX) point. Then the differ- ence of the normalized values of the two points are compared. D sym – D j SYM = ----------------------- ⋅ 100 , - D CAX where: Dsym = value at position physically symmetric to j Dj = value at position j Dcax = Detector number corresponding to Dcax Local Point Difference Symmetry In this analysis, the user selects a detector and the normalized values of the two points are compared. D sym – D j SYM = ----------------------- ⋅ 100 - Dj where: Dsym = value at position physically symmetric to j Dj = value at position j Point Ratio (Ratio IEC) Symmetry Ratio (IEC) symmetry is defined by IEC Standard 976. It finds the dose ratio of all symmetric detec- tors in a portion of the specified field size, always using the larger of the two numbers as the numerator. The maximum value in this series is the IEC number. The relevant field sizes (X and Y axes) for this calculation are: 5cm to 10cm: (the distance from 50% Cax to 50% CAX) - 2cm 10cm to 30cm: (the distance from 50% Max to 50% CAX) * 0.8 30cm to ? cm: (the distance from 50% Max to 50% CAX) - 6cm The Ratio (IEC) symmetry calculation is Analysis of a Profile 165
- 178. D MX SYM = ----------- , D MN where: Dj = value at position j Dsym = value at position physically symmetric to j DMX = greater value between Dj and Dsym DMN = lesser value between Dj and Dsym Varian Point Difference Symmetry With Varian Point Difference, symmetrical points are normalized to the Positive Detector and then the normalized values of the difference of the two points are compared. D left SYM = 100 ⋅ ⎛ 1 – --------------⎞ , - ⎝ D right⎠ where, Dcax = Detector number corresponding to Dcax Dleft = Detector number less than Dcax symmetric to Dright with respect to Dcax Dright = Detector number greater than Dcax Area Average Symmetry Area average symmetry is a method defined for testing the Siemens Primus accelerator. If we first define the following parameters: minL = first detector after FRGN with value greater than the value at lFRGN = ceiling (lFRGN) maxL = last integer detector number less than CTR = floor (CTR) minR = first integer detector number greater than CTR = ceiling (CTR) maxR = last detector before rFRGN with value greater than the value at rFRGN = floor (rFRGN) Then we can define Dosel as the average reading for all points from minL to maxL: maxL ∑ Dj j = minL Dose l = --------------------------------- maxL – minL Similarly, we can also define Doser as the average reading for all points from minR to maxR: maxR ∑ Dj j = minR Dose r = --------------------------------- - maxR – minL From these definitions, we can state the area average symmetry as: DoseMx – DoseMn SYM = ------------------------------------------------- ⋅ 200 - , DoseMx + DoseMn where, DoseMx = greater value between Dosel and Doser 166 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 179. DoseMn = lesser value between Dosel and Doser Area Symmetry Area Symmetry “SYMA” is calculated from the integrated left “SAL” and right “SAR” portions of the profile, in the field region (FRGN) defined by the value in the “Analyze nn% of Field Size.” The numeric result is the percent difference of the right half of the array with respect to the left half. The PROFILER 2 result allows you to see which half is greater. A positive result means the right half is greater; negative means the right half is less. SAR – SAL SYMA = ⎛ ---------------------------- ⎞ ⋅ 200 - ⎝ SAR + SAL⎠ The SAR and SAL values are calculated by trapezoidal integration of the measured data points. The beam center and the left and right edges of the field region over which the calculation takes place will not normally fall on a detector location. For these “virtual” detector locations, the value used in the integration is interpolated from a piece wise linear curve. The definitions for SAL and SAR are: int ( C M ) – 1 1 1 SAL = ∑DRj + -- ⋅ ( DR lf + DR int ( C ) ) + -- ⋅ ( DR l 2 - M 2 - FRGN + DR lf ) ⋅ ( 1 – frac ( l FRGN ) ) j = lf + 1 1 + -- ⋅ ( DR int ( C ) + DR C ) ⋅ frac ( C M ) - 2 M M rf – 1 1 1 SAR = ∑ DR j + -- ⋅ ( DR int ( C ) + 1 + DR rf ) + -- ⋅ ( DR r 2 - M 2 - FRGN + DR rf ) ⋅ ( 1 – frac ( r FRGN ) ) j = int ( C M ) + 2 1 + -- ⋅ ( DR int ( C ) + DR C ) ⋅ 1 – frac ( C M ) - 2 M M Before calculating SAL and SAR, some decision making is required. The above equations are based upon the trapezoidal integration rule. Their derivation assumed fixed measurement points and virtual points defining the edges of the left (lFRGN and CM) and right (CM and rFRGN) fields. It is possible to define FRGN (field region) such that there are no measured points in FRGN, and it is possible to compute the area of the two trapezoids resulting from such a definition, however it has no practical meaning. Nor would one point in FRGN be useful. Two points may not be mean- ingful, but it is simple to set conditions upon which to calculate. If either lf > int(CM) or if rf < int(CM) + 1, then the message “Defined region too small” will be dis- played in the message box, and a “---” will be displayed in the area symmetry box. There is either 0 or 1 measured points in FRGN. Note that the upper limit is when CM is undefined because the field size was too large and there were no measured points which fell below 50% of the maximum. This condition is handled in the variable out of range error. Horn Values If the selected file energy is Photon, the software displays horn calculations in the analysis panel. The display includes percent difference between the left horn and CAX, and percent difference between the right horn and CAX. The horn value is the maximum value in that portion of the profile. The formulas for horn value are: Horn Value Left: Max Horn Left of CAX / CAX * 100 Horn Value Right: Max Horn Right of CAX / CAX * 100 The results of these formulas are displayed as percent. Horn Values 167
- 180. If the field analysis is successful, the formula uses the interpolated CAX value. If the field analysis is not successful, the formula uses the physical CAX value. In the event that the CAX value = 0, the software will display an error. 90% Position If Electron energy is selected the software displays the positions of the left and right penumbra in the Analysis panel. The left and right penumbra are at 90% of CAX value. Following is the linear interpolation of position associated with 90% of CAX dose: LtLow =Dose at 1st detector in Left penumbra to be as close to 90% of CAX without going over 90% of CAX LtHigh = Dose at 1st detector in Left penumbra to be greater than 90% of CAX RtLow = Dose at 1st detector in Right penumbra to be as close to 90% of CAX without going over 90% of CAX RtHigh = Dose at 1st detector in Right penumbra to be greater than 90% of CAX PosLtLow = Position associated with Ltlow PosLtHigh =Position associated with LtHigh PosRtLow = Position associated with RtLow PosRtHigh = Position associated with RtHigh SlopeLt = (LtHigh - LtLow) / (PosLtHigh - PosLtLow) SlopeRt = (RtHigh - RtLow) / (PosRtHigh - PosRtLow) IntLt = LtHigh - SlopeLt * PosLtHigh IntRt = RtHigh - SlopeRt * PosRtHigh 90PosLt = (0.9 * Dcax - IntLt) / SlopeLt 90PosRt = 0.9 * Dcax - IntRt) / SlopeRt Beam Interpolated Flatness and Symmetry When this option is selected in the ‘Configure Analysis’ dialog box the software calculates flatness and symmetry values based on the detected beam center instead of the center detector. Since there may be some small difference between the center detector and the actual beam center when aligning the instrument, this option may correct for possible physical alignment errors. When the option is selected, the software first calculates beam center based on the detected beam edges. Then the difference between the detected beam center and the center detector is determined as an offset and the same offset is applied to the selected mirror detectors used for the flatness and symmetry calculation. Finally, the values at the offset points are interpolated from the adjacent detectors. For example, if the actual beam center is detected to be offset 3.0 mm in the +Y direction and mirror detectors at ±4 cm are selected (detectors 32 and 52), the software linearly interpolates the value for the left position between detectors 32 and 33 and for the right detector between 52 and 53. If the offset is 5.1 mm, the software would interpolate between detectors 33 and 34 on the left and 53 and 54 on the right, since detectors are spaced at 4mm intervals. 168 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 181. Beam Edge Interpolation By default, the software uses an improved algorithm for beam edge interpolation. The calculation is shown below: y = C + A ⋅ atan ( B ⋅ ( x – x0 ) ) where: • y and x are variables • C, A, B, and x0 are fitted constants The method of least squares is applied to the data to find the parameters.This algorithm deter- mines the 50% point and is more accurate than linear interpolation. When beam conditions for this improved algorithm are not satisfied, the software uses linear inter- polation instead. If desired, the user can disable the improved algorithm (manually switch to linear interpolation) by checking the ‘Use Linear Penumbra Interpolation’ option in the ‘Configure Analy- sis’ dialog box. Smoothing By selecting the Control > Smooth data menu option the user can activate smoothing on the currently displayed data. This feature uses a Gaussian smoothing algorithm which adjusts the point value of any particular detector based on the readings for the next closest detector. For detectors on all axes (that are inside the range specified in the .ini file), the smoothed corrected count for any particular detector is: w 0 ⋅ CC i – 2 + w 1 ⋅ CC i – 1 + w 2 ⋅ CC i + w 3 ⋅ CC i + 1 + w 4 ⋅ CC i + 2 SCC i = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - w0 + w1 + w2 + w3 + w4 If the called for CC does not exist, CCx is set to 0 and the corresponding weight is set to 0, ( j – r ) ⋅ ds 2 w j = exp ⎛ – 1 ⋅ ⎛ ------------------------⎞ ⎞ - ⎝ ⎝ s ⎠ ⎠ j = 0....4 r = smoothing radius. Currently set at 2, meaning that the selected detector plus the two detec- tors above and two detectors below will affect the smoothing equation (total of 5 detectors.) ds = detector spacing in mm (device and axis dependent, 0.4 for PROFILER 2. s = the user-selected extent of smoothing (default is 0.5 cm). This value can be modified in the ‘Setup Parameters’ dialog box using the ‘Data Smoothing Factor’ field. Calculating Calibrated Detectors For Small Fields If you are performing an array calibration for a field smaller than the default 35x35 cm field at 100 cm SSD, the software must remove any detectors that were not irradiated to prevent a calculation error. The calibrated detector range is selected with the ‘Calculate Calibrated Detectors’ settings in the ‘Array Calibration’ dialog box. There are two options: By Field Size and By Profile Shape. If you select By Field Size, the software will use the SSD and Field Size you enter to calculate which detectors will be in the beam. If you select By Profile Shape, the detectors in the beam are calculated by the software. The algo- rithm starts at CAX and searches outward until it finds a percent difference between adjacent detectors that is 60% or greater. It performs this calculation for each Step, A through D, in the +X, –X, +Y, and –Y directions. Then it takes the smallest number found over each of these calculations and uses that as the detector distance from CAX across which calibration is performed. Beam Edge Interpolation 169
- 182. See also “Calculating Calibrated Detectors for Small Fields” on page 93. Profile Comparison The dosimetry of a linear accelerator includes a detailed 3-dimensional plot of the depth dose dis- tribution in a water tank. This task is long and tedious and the resultant data is only valid for the beam energy and intensity profile which existed during the measurement. Any changes in energy or beam steering can invalidate the data; such changes can occur during routine maintenance or from age of the accelerator components. It is very important, during such adjustments, to repli- cate the same profile shape as existed during the 3-dimensional dosimetry measurements. See also “Comparing Profiles” on page 115. Percent Difference Compare provides a graphical representation of the differences between two profiles. The com- pare difference profile is calculated from the averaged profiles in the two profiles selected to be compared. The variable CDPj represents the percent difference of the new profile shape at the location of detector j with respect to the reference profile. The scale of the graph of CDPj is –10% to +10%, with division lines set at 1% increments. CDP j = ( NG1 j – NG2 j ) ⋅ 100 j: l+1 to r-1, using l and r from the selected profile. The variables NG1 and NG2 refer to the normalized graphs 1 and 2. Each profile array element “j” is normalized to the respective profile average, taken between the 50% intensity points. DR j DR j NG1 j = ⎛ ---------------------------⎞ - NG2 j = ⎛ ---------------------------⎞ - ⎝ AVG [ DR j ]⎠ GRAPH 1 ⎝ AVG [ DR j ]⎠ GRAPH 2 Active Profile Reference Profile j: 1→83 for the Y axis and 1→57 for the X axis. The average value of the array values is found from both the two compared graphs: r ∑DRj j=l AVG [ DR j ] = ------------------ - r–l+1 where r is the right 50% subscript and l is the left 50% subscript in each graph. Compare Index A compare index (CI) is calculated and displayed at the bottom the graph in the compare screen. Compare Index reduces the graphical comparison of two profiles to one number which can be used as an evaluation index. The index is the RMS value of the compare differences, divided by the number of points. It is similar in meaning to the coefficient of variation. Graphs which do not compare well will have a large compare index. r(2) r(2) 2 ∑ ( CDP j – AVG [ CDP ] l ( 2 ) ) j = l(2) CI = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - r( 2) – l( 2) + 1 The symbols r(2) and l(2) refer to the subscript variable r and l in the selected profile, the reference profile. 170 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 183. Data Type and Mode Selection Overview The user can select between three data modes: Inst Rate, Avg Rate, or TotalDose. In addition, the user can select the type of data displayed from the following selections: Background, Calibration, Raw Counts, Corrected Counts, Dose Counts, or Normalized. Total Dose is obtained from Raw Counts, as follows: ( RawCounts j – BackgroundCounts j ) ⋅ CalibrationFactor j TotalDose = DosePerCount ⋅ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - GainMultiplicationFactor where, BackgroundCountsj = BackgroundPerTicj x TimerTicks TimerTicks is the timerticks in the measured data j is the detector number BackgroundPerTic is calculated during the background measurement CalibrationFactorj is calculated during the array calibration procedure DosePerCount is calculated during the dose calibration procedure GainMultiplicationFactor depends on the gain setting of the hardware and is nominally equal to the gain setting RawCountsj is the counts value received from the device for detector j. The software displays the following depending on the Data mode selected in the Data toolbar: Background: The BackgroundCountsj term for each detector. Calibration: The CalibrationFactorj for each detector. Raw Counts: The RawCountsj for each detector. Corrected Counts: The result of the calculation without the DosePerCount term. This is pro- vided as an option because some users may not have a dose calibration performed and the numbers after normalization will be equivalent independent of dose calibration. Dose Counts: The result of the calculation Normalized: Normalized values of the dose. Normalized Selecting “Normalized” from the Data toolbar changes the vertical scale of the graph to percent. Normalization takes place around the selected designation in the Setup submenu Parameters Setup. The choices for normalization are Physical Center, Calculated Center, Maximum Value, or Selected Detector. The normalized view of the profile shows the profile detail with the highest degree of display res- olution, while showing the entire profile. It is useful to judge the relative magnitude of profile features. Inst Rate and Avg Rate Modes The data mode only has an effect when viewing raw counts, corrected counts, or dose counts. Inst Rate and Avg Rate mode express the result of the formula in units per minute rather than total units. This means applying an additional factor to the equation equal to 60.0/ElapsedTimeInSec- onds. The equation for Inst Rate mode is equivalent to dose mode except that it is calculated over only the last update interval. This affects the raw counts, timer ticks and ElapsedTimeInSeconds value. This creates a matrix (Table 8-4). Data Type and Mode Selection 171
- 184. Table 8-4. Data Type as a Function of the Mode Selected Data Type Total Dose Avg Rate Inst Rate Raw Counts Raw counts for the entire Raw counts for the entire Raw counts for the latest update file file interval Corrected Corrected counts for the CC for the entire file mul- CC calculated from raw counts for lat- Counts entire file tiplied by 60.0/TotalTime est update interval, multiplied by 60.0/LastIntervalTime Dose Counts Dose Counts for the Dose for entire file multi- Dose calculated from raw from latest entire file plied by 60.0/TotalTime interval, multiplied by 60.0/ LastIntervalTime Concatenated And Double Profiles When displaying corrected counts or dose counts, an additional Factor is applied to the second set of data for concatenated and double profiles. For concatenated files this is equal to: Set1CorrectedCounts j + Set1CorrectedCountsj + 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Set2CorrectedCounts j + Set2CorrectedCountsj + 1 Where j and j+1 are the two detectors on either side of the pivot point. For double profiles (profiler1 devices only) the factor is the same except j and j+1 are the two end- most detectors. Electron Energy Wedge Analysis Electron Energy Calculated by Slope Analysis ln ( Em ) = Sm ⋅ ln(-m) + Im i.e. ln ( – m ) + Im Em = e where: Em = Electron energy calculation using the attenuation slope data m = slope of the wedge attenuation in the measured profile Sm = Calibration Factor— this is the slope of the ln(Ej) vs. ln(mj) data matrix points Im = Calibration Factor—this is the intercept of the ln(Ej) vs. ln(mj) data matrix points ln() = natural log of the argument Note that the natural log is used in this analysis because the data generally gives a better fit and the energy calculation is in better agreement. Electron Energy Calculated by Intercept Analysis Eb = Sb ⋅ b + Ib where: Eb = Electron energy calculation using the detector intercept data b = detector intercept following the slope of the wedge attenuation in the measured profile Sb = Calibration Factor – this is the slope of the Ej vs. bj data matrix points Ib = Calibration Factor – this is the intercept of the Ej vs. bj data matrix points 172 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 185. Photon Energy Wedge Analysis To calculate the wedge angle, you will first need to know the dose at depth for two points from a water tank depth dose curve (D1, D2, dist1, dist2). The calculations assume that the dose consistently varies exponentially with depth and that the attenuation coefficient stays constant, i.e., D1 = D0 ⋅ exp ( – u ⋅ dist1 ) D2 = D0 ⋅ exp ( – u ⋅ dist2 ) Calculation 1 First solve for u with the known values of D1, D2, dist1, and dist2 (the dose at depth for two known points) from previous water tank scans. For example, using SSD=100 cm, 10 x 10 cm field, 6 MV, and BJR25: D1 ln ⎛ ------ ⎞ - ⎝ D2⎠ u = ------------------------------- - dist2 – dist1 D1=67.7% dist1=10 cm D2=40% dist2=20 cm u=0.0526 Calculation 2 Next solve for generic dist2-dist1 using the value of “u” determined previously. D1 ln ⎛ ------ ⎞ - ⎝ D2⎠ dist2 – dist1 = ------------------ - u Calculation 3 Realize for the physical wedge: tan (θ) = (wedge height) / (wedge length) = (height difference of measurement points) / (distance between measurement points) OR tan ( θ ) = ( WH ) ⁄ ( WL ) = ( wdist2 – wdist1 ) ⁄ ( wdistL ) Photon Energy Wedge Analysis 173
- 186. WH wdist2 Detectors wdistL wdist1 WL Then, substitute dist2-dist1 for (wdist2-wdist1) in tan (θ) and solve for theta. ⎛ ln ⎛ D1⎞ ⎞ ------- ⎝ D2⎠ ⎛ ------------------------------- = atan ⎜ --------------------------⎟ θ = atan ⎝ dist2 – dist1⎞ - ⎜ ⎟ wdistL ⎠ ⎜ u – wdistL⎟ ⎝ ⎠ In this equation: • D1 and D2 are the dose collected by two detectors spaced wdistL apart • u is the constant found earlier from watertank measurements. Real Time Studies During Accelerator Adjustment This scenario assumes that a standard profile has been saved, which represents the beam as tested when the accelerator was accepted. 1 Select File > Open from the menu and open the standard file. The saved “standard” profile will now be displayed. 2 Select the Rate Mode. 3 In the Legend panel, click the standard file to select it. 4 Measure another profile under the same conditions associated with the standard. 5 While the beam is on, right-click the ‘Device’ and select Compare. 6 In the Compare graph, any changes in profile shape appears as a point off the 0 percent dif- ference line. For example, if beam steering adjustments are made, the compare graph will respond in real time while the beam is on. This feature can be used to adjust a machine back to the profile shape defined by the standard. Compare in Accelerator QA Another saved profile could also be opened for comparison to the standard. When stored profiles are compared, the integrated data is being compared. Rate data is not saved. During annual surveys, changes in beam symmetry and flatness should be checked at several gan- try angles. Mount the PROFILER 2 into the Isocentric Mounting Fixture (IMF) and secure into the accessory tray in the accelerator head. See “IMF Installation” on page 178. First, a profile can be acquired at the 0 degree position. Then acquire a profile at another angle. Right-click the second profile and select Compare to see any changes in the profile. 174 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 187. Fixed Wedge QA Accumulate profiles on the wedges that are available and save the profiles for future comparison. Acquire wedge measurements using the same conditions as before. The resulting comparison will be a sensitive indication if a change has occurred in the photon energy because the wedge profile attenuation “angle” will depend upon the attenuation coefficients of the photon energy. Note that the apparent angle will not agree with the specified wedge angle. The wedge angle is specified as the angle of an isodose line in a depth dose plot. The profile angle is an attenuation angle resulting from the measurement of a linear array at a “fixed depth.” Moving (Dynamic, Virtual) Wedge QA Dynamic wedge measurements must be displayed in Dose mode, and will only be complete for view after the accelerator wedge routine is finished and the machine is not producing radiation. During the measurement of a dynamic wedge, if the Inst Rate Mode is on, then the field width appears to be changing as the wedge is formed, due to the accelerator collimator jaw opening or closing. For example, assume a 200 MU, 45 degree dynamic wedge has been accepted. The PROFILER 2 can now be used to capture the profile of the accepted wedge and save it as a standard. Now several other 45 degree wedges at different MU settings can be measured with the PROFILER 2, saved for future reference, and compared to the standard at 200 MU. A dynamic wedge profile can be compared to an open field profile using the Compare function. For best comparison, normalize the profiles at the detector location with the highest measure- ment. Right-click on the channel and select Normalize to this channel from the menu. About Profile Acquisition The PROFILER 2 measures either pulsed radiation (for example, from a linac) or continuous radia- tion (such as from a cobalt-60 treatment device). Pulsed radiation is measured with an algorithm for radiation pulse synchronization. Continuous radiation is measured by timed synchronization. Each detector is connected to the input of a low leakage, high-gain MOSFET operational amplifier (opamp). The output voltage of the opamp increases as charge is collected on the feedback capac- itor during radiation. After measurement of the output voltage, the capacitor is discharged with an ultra low leakage MOS switch and is then ready for another measurement. Each detector is fully guarded to prevent extraneous leakage accumulating into the summing junction of the op-amp. Pulses are directly detected by a separate circuit of trigger detectors. Each array detector has a trigger detector which provides a trigger signal regardless of the beam collimation. If there is beam on the PROFILER 2 array, there will be at least one trigger detector which causes the mea- surement of the entire array. This is important for wedge fields shaped by a flying collimator jaw which may close the field completely. Radiation Measurement The typical medical linear accelerator produces a pulse of radiation every 1,700 to 10,000 micro- seconds, the typical pulse duration being 4 microseconds wide. Prior to radiation pulses, the detector array is measured and saved as an offset. After pulses occur, the array is measured again for about 10 milliseconds, the capacitors are discharged, and another offset reading is taken. Each array measurement takes about 1,500 microseconds. The initial offset array is then subtracted from the final array, resulting in an array of net charge from the 10 millisecond period of radiation. In effect, the PROFILER 2 measures the radiation profile intensity of a group of radiation pulses over a period of 10 ms. These net values are summed over a period of one second and then trans- mitted to the computer. Each profile update includes the total charge measured over a discrete number of pulses. The measurement limit is 600 pulses per second, defined by the time constants and analog-to-digital conversion speed. About Profile Acquisition 175
- 188. This technique is independent of amplifier offset because the offset is being subtracted for each measurement. This technique is nearly independent of detector leakage because the measure- ment duty cycle is a small fraction of the actual lapse time. Finally, this technique offers an improvement in measurement precision with the accumulation of pulses because the random error accumulation is proportional to the square root of the number of measurements, and the pre- cision is directly proportional to the number of measurements. The output of all amplifiers are multiplexed through four gain circuits whose output is measured by four analog-to-digital converters. There are 4 gain selections, in binary steps from 1 to 8. The gain is set manually and remains unchanged during a profile measurement. An overrange circuit constantly monitors the gain amplifier status and indicates a problem if any detector is overranged on any pulse measurement. Given this design, the gain is totally independent of the selected machine dose rate, and only depends upon the dose per pulse, which should be unchanging unless the beam energy or SSD is changed. All of the control and display functions are active during data acquisition. For example, if a refer- ence profile is displayed, and the Inst Rate mode is selected; then reference profile can be displayed simultaneously with the current profile as it is being acquired. If beam steering is made, then these changes will be seen with the reference profile displayed. 176 Section 8. Interpreting Measurements
- 189. 9 PROFILER 2 Accessories Isocentric Mounting Fixture (IMF) Purpose The following paragraphs tell how to assemble and use the Isocentric mounting Fixture (IMF) (Fig- ure 9-1). Figure 9-1. Isocentric Mounting Fixture (shown with MapCHECK) Description With the IMF, you can attach the PROFILER 2 (or MapCHECK) to the gantry tray at isocenter (100 cm SDD, source to detector distance) and rotate the gantry while taking measurements. The IMF is shipped assembled and consists of three plates separated by standoffs. The middle and bottom plates are black anodized aluminum, separated by a standard distance. The colored top plate, or “block tray,” and standoffs that separate it from the middle plate are spe- cific to the accelerator manufacturer. The block tray and its standoffs are color-coded for each manufacturer. Table 9-1. Assemblies for different accelerators Accelerator P/N Color Weight Dimensions Varian 1175000-V blue 16.25 lb. (7.4 kg) 15.5 x 12.4 x 15.4” (39.4 x 31.5 x 39.1 cm) Siemens 1175000-S red 17.75 lb. (8.1 kg) 15.5 x 12.4 x 18.9” (39.4 x 31.5 x 48.0 cm) Elekta 1175000-E green 17.5 lb. (7.9 kg) 15.5 x 11.3 x 19.2” (39.4 x 28.7 x 48.8 cm) Isocentric Mounting Fixture (IMF) 177
- 190. CAUTION: The top plate is designed to fit tightly in the slots of the accelerator’s ! accessory holder to prevent movement of the IMF during rotation of the gantry. IMF Installation Varian 1 Slide the blue block tray of the IMF into the block accessory tray of the accelerator until it locks. 2 Remove the leveling feet from the bottom of the instrument. 3 Insert the instrument into the IMF (Figure 9-2) and align the four outer threaded holes in the bottom of the instrument with the matching holes in the bottom plate of the IMF. CAUTION: Insert the instrument as shown (Figure 9-2) to keep the center detector ! aligned with the beam axis. Figure 9-2. Installing instrument in IMF 4 Secure the instrument to the bottom plate with the four, 1/4-20, plastic cap screws (Figure 9- 2) furnished with the IMF. Do not use the three leveling screws. Note: You can also install the instrument on the IMF first, then place the entire assem- bly in the block accessory tray. Siemens 1 Slide the red block tray of the IMF into the block accessory tray until it locks in the detent notch. Note: The IMF top plate is designed to fit the majority of Siemens accessory holders. Unfortunately, in a few Siemens installations, the top plate of the IMF does not fit the width or thickness of the slots in the accessory holder. If this occurs in your installation, refer to Bulletin 5-07, Document 1175991, for a complete description of the problem and recommendations for correcting the fit. 2 If the fit is loose, unscrew the two stop screws (Figure 9-3) outward an equal dimension until a tight fit is achieved. 178 Section 9. PROFILER 2 Accessories
- 191. Thumb- Stop screw screw Detent notch Figure 9-3. Adjusting screws at back of Siemens block tray 3 Screw in the two thumbscrews (Figure 9-3) at the rear of the assembly until they contact the accessory tray above the tray block. Tighten firmly by hand without tools. These screws help support the IMF and prevent sag due to shortness of some accessory holder slots. Note: Loosen thumbscrews before removing IMF. 4 Remove the leveling feet from the instrument. 5 Insert the instrument into the IMF (Figure 9-2) and align the four outer threaded holes in the bottom of the instrument with the matching holes in the bottom plate of the IMF. CAUTION: Insert the instrument as shown (Figure 9-2) to keep the center detector ! aligned with the beam axis. 6 Secure the instrument to the bottom plate with the four, 1/4-20, plastic cap screws (Figure 9- 2) furnished with the IMF. Do not use the three leveling screws. Note: You can also install the instrument on the IMF first, then place the entire assem- bly in the block accessory tray. Elekta 1 Remove the coded Perspex sliding tray (Figure 9-4). 2 Remove the four knurled releasing screws that hold the removable Perspex tray at the top of the shadow block assembly. 3 Place the green block tray of the IMF into the shadow block assembly in place of the remov- able Perspex tray and secure in place with the knurled screws that you removed previously. Note: This step may be easier if the gantry is rotated with the head near the floor. Isocentric Mounting Fixture (IMF) 179
- 192. Figure 9-4. Elekta shadow tray mounting details CAUTION: Insert the instrument as shown (Figure 9-2) to keep the center detector ! aligned with the beam axis. 4 Insert the instrument into the IMF (Figure 9-2) and align the four outer threaded holes in the bottom of the instrument with the matching holes in the bottom plate. 5 Secure the instrument to the bottom plate with the four, 1/4-20, plastic cap screws (Figure 9- 2) furnished with the IMF. Do not use the three leveling screws. Operation If properly installed, the instrument detector plane will now be at 100 cm from the radiation source, and the center detector will be aligned with the beam axis. The optical distance indicator (ODI) will measure the distance to the top surface of PROFILER 2 to be 99 cm (without buildup), since the detectors are 1.0 cm below the surface. CAUTION: Pull the couch away to avoid interference with the IMF. Before using the IMF, rotate the gantry while observing it to be sure that the movement is unob- ! structed. Verify that the top plate fits snugly in the accessory holder and does not shift during gantry rotation. ! WARNING: Stay clear of IMF and instrument while rotating to prevent injury. Operate the instrument normally while rotating the gantry. Refer to the instrument User’s Guide for details. The fixture accommodates standard 30 x 30 cm buildup blocks, for up to 8 cm of additional buildup. If buildup is required, place it on top of the instrument top surface and secure it in place with the large plastic nuts on the threaded rods. Note: Use only 30 x 30 cm buildup blocks. Do not use the buildup plates furnished with the instrument since they are too narrow to be properly secured by the plastic nuts. 180 Section 9. PROFILER 2 Accessories
- 193. 10 Profiler 2 with ATLAS QA About ATLAS QA Note: This section provides a brief description of ATLAS QA and abbreviated steps for setting up a new test plan with a PROFILER 2. For complete information about ATLAS QA, please see the ATLAS QA Reference Guide, P/N 1140011. This manual can be downloaded from the Sun Nuclear web site, http://www.sunnuclear.com. ATLAS QA is an application that is used to: • measure, store, and track Quality Assurance measurements of radiation • perform mechanical, safety, and accessory checks ATLAS QA can be used with multiple Sun Nuclear Corporation instruments: Daily QA3, Daily QA2, PROFILER 2, and TomoDose. ATLAS QA is the primary software for the Daily QA3, but it is a secondary application when used with PROFILER or TomoDose. The PROFILER 2 application is used to collect profile data and the ATLAS QA application is used to collect and trend QA measurements. ATLAS QA operates in a client/server environment. QA measurements are stored in a centralized database, usually on a remote server. The ATLAS QA client software resides on multiple comput- ers, such as the control room computers, the physicists’ desktops, and other computers on the network that may need to access the trend data. Note: PROFILER 2 can be used with ATLAS QA version 2.0 and higher. PROFILER 2 Display in ATLAS QA The two main views in ATLAS QA are QA view and Trend view (Figure 10-1). Toggle buttons at the top of the screen are used to switch views. Both views show the ‘scheme tree’, a graphical rep- resentation of planned measurements, dates, and data for the current measurement. When ATLAS QA is connected to a PROFILER 2, the QA view displays a graphic of the PROFILER 2 as well as the specific PROFILER 2 detectors used for QA. • QA view shows the tests to be performed, the dates that they are scheduled, the machine to be tested, the instrument setup, and the test results. • Trend view shows a graph of all measurements in the database for the test selected on the scheme tree. You can see at a glance how a specific test is trending over time. About ATLAS QA 181
- 194. QA view Trend view Figure 10-1. ATLAS Views - QA View and Trend View Detector Layout and Geometry When the PROFILER 2 is used with ATLAS QA software, the following detectors are used to col- lect QA measurements (80% of a 20 x 20 cm field): • CAX: Central axis detector (X = 29; Y = 42) • X-Axis: 9 and 49 • Y-Axis: 22 and 62 • light-field detectors (penumbra detection) • Top: 66, 67, 68 • Bottom: 16, 17, 18 • Left: 3, 4, 5 • Right: 53, 54, 55 For QA measurements, set the SSD (source-to-surface distance) to 100 cm. Since beam diver- gence for SDD (source-to-detector distance), which is 101 cm at 100 cm SSD, is already compensated in software, you do not need to apply additional compensation. ATLAS QA Test Plan The ATLAS QA test plan includes all the details of the QA tests, such as the sites, rooms, machines, and the specific tests to be performed. A medical physicist sets up the ATLAS QA test plan and radiation therapists perform the periodic tests. The physicist creates a ‘scheme tree’ in the ATLAS QA software that contains all the test details. The scheme tree lists the sites, rooms, machines, and tests. It is also linked to a calendar so that recurring tests appear on the days scheduled. Tests can be performed daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. To execute the test plan, the therapist connects the unit, places it on the treatment couch, aligns the instrument with the beam, opens the ATLAS QA software, and begins the tests scheduled for that day for the selected machine. As each test is completed, measurement data is stored in the central database, and the software advances to the next test. When finished with the first machine, the therapist carries the instrument to another treatment room to test the second machine, and so on until all the machines are tested for that day. With two or more devices, machines can be tested simultaneously. In setting up the test plan, the medical physicist decides what machines are to be tested, what types of tests are required, and the frequency of the tests. The test plan created depends on the characteristics of machines, how they are used, the QA requirements of the facility, and the phys- icist’s experience with the equipment. Each measurement is stored in the database and is accessible to the physicist from any computer on the network. 182 Section 10. Profiler 2 with ATLAS QA
- 195. Starting from a known good exposure, data is accumulated in the database. The data can be dis- played as individual measurements or shown as consecutive data points in a trend graph. The trend graph shows if a machine is drifting out of specified performance so that maintenance can be performed before it reaches a limit. To create a test plan using a PROFILER 2, the physicist performs the following steps: • Import the appropriate array calibration file • Define the sites, rooms, machines, tests, and schedule (setup the Scheme Tree) • Set up the test templates • Calibrate each test template to produce a known good exposure Importing a PROFILER 2 Array Calibration File The existing PROFILER 2 array calibration files may be used with ATLAS QA. You do not need to create new files. The PROFILER 2 array calibration files are stored in the directory C:SNCPROFILER2Fac- tors<serial number> on the computer that was used for array calibration. To use them with ATLAS QA, they must be imported and stored in the ATLAS QA database as follows: 1 Connect the PROFILER 2 to the ATLAS QA computer. Note: Connect the instrument first since it needs to be registered in the database. 2 Launch the ATLAS QA software and log in as a physicist. 3 Click Calibration > Calibration Management. A dialog box (Figure 10-2) opens. Figure 10-2. Calibration Management Dialog Box 4 Scroll up and down the list to find your instrument and serial number. Calibration names are shown beneath each model number and serial number. Model and serial numbers without any files listed beneath it have no calibration files stored in the database. 5 If you need to import a new file, click the Import button. A dialog box (Figure 10-3) opens. Figure 10-3. Import Array Calibration Dialog 6 Click Select File, navigate to the array calibration file you want to use, and click OK. ATLAS QA Test Plan 183
- 196. 7 Enter a calibration name. This name will be displayed in the ATLAS QA software. 8 Select the device type you are using. 9 Click Import. This stores the calibration file to the database and makes it available for QA tem- plate use. Setting up the Scheme Tree In the ATLAS QA software, the ‘Scheme Tree’ is a list of sites, rooms, machines, and tests. Select any day on the calendar to display the tests for that day. Test templates are indented under each machine. If desired, ATLAS QA can be set up to show only the tests to be performed on a single machine. 1 Select Setup > Scheme Tree… from the ATLAS QA menu. This menu option is only available when the user is logged in as a physicist. 2 Click New then enter all relevant information for the site. Figure 10-4. Entering Site Information in the Scheme Tree Note: The active checkbox is used to show whether this site, room, machine, or test is active or inactive. Only items marked ‘active’ are displayed in the Scheme Tree. Items marked ‘inactive’ can be set up but will not appear on the schedule until they are changed to ‘active’. 3 Click the Save button. The site appears on the scheme tree and the room fields become edit- able. Rooms can now be set up for the site. 4 Type a name for the room and click the green +Add button (Figure 10-5). The name appears in the list below the room box and also on the scheme tree. Rooms are saved to the database when the +Add button is pressed. Figure 10-5. Setting up Rooms 184 Section 10. Profiler 2 with ATLAS QA
- 197. Note: The ‘Add Room QA’ checkbox will add Room QA to this room. Room QA is an optional module that collects, stores, and displays QA information for each treatment room. The Room QA module is part of ATLAS Full (sold separately). 5 If desired, add additional rooms in the same way. When all the rooms are set up, you can set up machines for the rooms. Machine setup lets you select the accelerator that you want to test. The information is only entered once for each machine, although many tests may be per- formed on the same machine. Built-in settings make it easier to create measurement templates. 6 In the Scheme Tree, highlight the Room to which you want to add a machine. 7 From the pull-down menus, select the manufacturer and model of the machine in the selected room. This will cause all the available energies for that model machine to show in the box below. Figure 10-6. Setting up Machines and Selecting Tests Note: If your manufacturer and model is not listed, type the name of the manufacturer and model directly into the edit boxes and enter the energies directly. 8 Select the serial number of the PROFILER 2. 9 Select the array calibration file that will be used for this test. ! CAUTION: You must have a valid array calibration file to proceed. 10 Click the energies to be tested. The selected energies are marked with a check mark, and a test template is produced for each selected energy. 11 Click +Add to add the changes to the Scheme Tree and save the changes to the database. 12 The tests for this room now appear on the scheme tree in the dialog box. Now you can modify and calibrate each test as described next. Setting Up the Template for Beam Tracking Each test requires a specific measurement template to define the test setup. A template is spe- cific to a machine and energy, and it specifies the exact conditions for making the measurement. When a therapist selects a measurement for one of these templates, the exact machine setup is displayed on screen, providing complete instructions for setting up the accelerator. For a single machine, you may decide to take several measurements at different beam energies, distances, buildup, angles, and orientations. You can even specify fixed and moving wedges. ATLAS QA Test Plan 185
- 198. 1 In the Scheme Tree, highlight the test that will be set up to display the template information. This information is pre-populated based on the typical settings for the machine and energies that you selected. Figure 10-7. Template Information for Highlighted Test 2 Click Edit, enter all relevant information for this measurement (including the calibration file), set up the test schedule, and then click Save. Note: See the ATLAS QA Reference Guide for template field descriptions. Calibrating the QA Template Before using a QA template, it must be calibrated to create a QA measurement standard for each setup condition (machine, energy, dose, etc.). All trend graphs are compared with this data set. Each time the QA template is calibrated, a new standard is set. All subsequent data is compared to the new standard, while all previous data is compared to the previous standard. 1 From the menu, select Calibration > Calibrate QA Template. The on-screen instructions appear (Figure 10-8). Figure 10-8. QA Template Calibration Instructions 186 Section 10. Profiler 2 with ATLAS QA
- 199. 2 Highlight the template that was just added to the scheme tree. Calibrated tests are indicated by a check mark. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. 4 In step 5 of the on-screen instructions, enter the dose, in cGy, that was delivered. This value should be determined from prior calibration measurements. There is a 1 cm buildup over the CAX detector. 5 Click the Show Results button. The results are displayed in the Results panel. These values are the initial, or gold standard QA template values for this template and machine. 6 A comment can be entered about the standard condition just measured. Click in the Mea- surement Notes box to enter a statement up to 80 characters in length. This comment will be saved with the data. 7 Note that the ‘Dose’ item under Results displays the dose value just entered. Click the Print button to make a hard copy of this information. 8 Review the values to verify that your setup was correct. Click the appropriate button(s): a. Record—If the values are OK, the button says ‘Record/PASS’ and the Results heading bar is green. Click the button to save the values in the database. b. Re-Do—If you want to repeat the calibration, click Re-Do. c. Cancel—If you want to exit without storing the calibration, click Cancel. 9 After completing QA template calibration, select another template to calibrate or click the Return to QA button. Measurement with ATLAS QA CAUTION: Keep the electronics section of the PROFILER 2 of the beam. Do not allow ! the direct beam to fall outside of the detector area or you could damage the instru- ment. Exposure of the electronics to direct radiation could void the warranty! Preparing for Measurement If the PROFILER 2 is powered off, power on and allow it to warm up 2 minutes before use. The PROFILER 2 may remain plugged in to the P/DI at all times, if desired. The ATLAS QA program can be left on, or it can be closed at the end of each testing session and relaunched at the start of each new session, creating a new background measurement and requir- ing the next user to login. A background measurement is automatically collected when the ATLAS QA program is launched with a device connected. Note: If the PROFILER 2 is connected and ATLAS QA software is left on (greater than 1 hour between measurements), it is recommended to take a manual background read- ing before collecting a measurement. An automatic background reading is only taken at the time the software is launched. Perform the following steps to take a manual background reading: 1) Click the Background box on the toolbar. 2) Enter the number of seconds for the background reading (minimum 30 seconds). 3) Click Start. 4) When the background measurement is complete, click the Background box again to close it. Measurement with ATLAS QA 187
- 200. C E A drop-down handle B D e-Energy and X-Energy parameters not supported with PROFILER 2 Figure 10-9. Steps to Make an Exposure To perform the QA measurements for a Linac: 1 In the Scheme tree, select the machine or template, (A). 2 Position the PROFILER 2 as described under the heading ‘PROFILER 2 Setup’ on the screen (click the drop-down handle to display). 3 Set up the exposure parameters on the machine to match the values under Machine Setup (below the illustration), (B). 4 Observe any special instructions from the physicist displayed in the ‘Template Notes’ box. 5 Ensure that the background box on the toolbar displays ‘Yes’. 6 Click Start (C), and deliver the prescribed dose for the template. While the beam is on, data is acquired and the status box displays ‘Acquiring Data’. 7 When the beam turns off, the results are displayed at the bottom of the screen. A quantity which exceeds the limit will be highlighted in red. If desired, a comment can be entered about the test. Note: All Results items will be calculated except x-Energy and e-Energy. The PROFILER 2 does not have any e-Energy detectors, and it does not measure photon energy via flatness. 8 Click Record, Re-Do, or Cancel for this measurement, (D). • Record—If the data is acceptable, click Record to save the results in the database. • ReDo—If the data is not acceptable and it is necessary to start again, click Re-Do. The data may be saved to the database, depending on the program preferences. • Print—Prints a copy of the measurement details. • Cancel—Cancels the measurement. The auto advance function is exited. Any measurements saved with Record prior to pressing Stop will be saved. Re-entry into 188 Section 10. Profiler 2 with ATLAS QA
- 201. auto QA measurement with Start button will start at the beginning, but it is possible to manually select where measurements will begin. 9 Once Record has been selected, the software automatically advances to the next template for this machine and initiates data collection for the template. Continue delivering the pre- scribed dose for the current template and record the results until all templates for the day have been taken. 10 To view trends for all templates, click Trend (E) in the top center of the screen. Measurement with ATLAS QA 189
- 202. This page is intentionally left blank. 190 Section 10. Profiler 2 with ATLAS QA
- 203. 11 Maintaining Your System Maintaining Hardware Parts and Repairs Accessories and replacement parts can be ordered as listed in “Parts and Accessories” on page 3. Contact the Sales department: E-Mail: contactus@sunnuclear.com; telephone: 321-259-6862; fax: 321-259-7979. There are no user-serviceable parts inside the PROFILER 2 instrument or the P/DI. If there are prob- lems with the devices, please contact the Client Solutions department. See “Contacting Client Solutions” on page 194. If the device cannot be calibrated to match the readings of a known standard, return it to the man- ufacturer for repair. The device has reached the end of life when it can no longer be calibrated. Additional service information is available on the SNC web site: http://www.sunnuclear.com/ Storage Store the instrument in an indoor, protected environment where it will not be irradiated by the direct beam. Cleaning Clean the instrument with a soft dry cloth. Do not use liquid cleaners, solvents, or abrasives. Disposal and Recycling Do not discard the instrument or P/DI unit as waste. Small amounts of lead are contained in PC boards. Recycle in accordance with local regulations. Maintaining Software and Firmware Although the distribution CD contains the latest released software version when the unit was shipped, upgrades or patches may be available later. These changes to the software add features, improve operation, fix problems, or adapt to operating system changes. These upgrades can be downloaded from the Sun Nuclear web site, http://www.sunnuclear.com. Navigate to “Support,” then either “Download” or “Software Upgrades.” Please take a moment to visit the site for the latest upgrade. Verify Software Version Number The PROFILER 2 instrument incorporates two main software applications, the Windows applica- tion which runs on the PC, and the embedded firmware which runs in the PROFILER 2 microprocessor. Your version of each of these applications may be verified as follows: 1 Launch the PROFILER 2 application. 2 Select Help > About from the menu. The ‘About PROFILER 2’ dialog box is displayed. 3 The first line (Application Version) contains the Windows PC version. The second line contains the embedded firmware version. Maintaining Hardware 191
- 204. Updating Software and Firmware The PROFILER 2 instrument includes firmware which is installed in the flash memory of the instru- ment. This firmware is separate from the PROFILER 2 application ‘software’ installed on the computer. During operation, the firmware in the instrument is executed by the on-board micropro- cessor to control the instrument and communicate with the PROFILER 2 application program on the computer. Either the firmware or the application software can be updated when a new release of firmware or software are available. Generally, new releases are posted on the SNC web site. Installing Firmware To install new firmware: 1 Download the new firmware installation file (.hex) from the web site and place it in the PRO- FILER 2 directory. Make a note of the name of the new file. 2 With the PROFILER 2 connected, open the PROFILER 2 application program on the PC. 3 Select Tools > Download Code from the PROFILER 2 menu. The ‘Download Code to the PROFILER 2’ dialog box (Figure 11-1) opens. For a detailed description of the options in this dialog box, see “Tools > Download Code” on page 40. Figure 11-1. Download Code to the PROFILER 2 Dialog Box 4 Click the File/Open button. The ‘Open a Hex File’ dialog box is displayed. 5 Select the firmware file (.hex) to be downloaded and then click Open. 6 With the firmware file name showing at the top of the ‘Download Code to the PROFILER 2’ dialog box, click the Download to PROFILER 2 button. A progress bar appears. The progress bar advances to show the status of the download. 7 Upon completion, the message “Profiler File Downloaded successfully” is displayed. Click OK. Note: If the download stops due to a rare communications time-out, the following mes- sage is displayed: “Packet Failed to Transmit with Error: No Response, Try Again?.” If this happens, click the Yes button on the warning dialog box to restart the download or click No to abort the download. If you abort, the old firmware is unaffected. 8 Wait for the green status lights (LEDs on the end of the instrument) to turn on before resum- ing normal operation. 192 Section 11. Maintaining Your System
- 205. Troubleshooting LED Indications The following table shows LED indications for various conditions. The first three lines show the normal conditions. The last item, ‘Device Fault,’ shows the pattern if firmware detects a fault in the instrument. If a ‘Device Fault’ is indicated, contact Sun Nuclear Corporation technical support. Table 11-1. PROFILER 2 LED Indications Device Action LED A B C D Power On (default state after power up) ON OFF OFF OFF Sending data to PC - - Rapid Toggle - Acquiring Measurements Extremely - - ON Rapid Toggle (appears ON solid) Device Fault - ON (5 sec) + toggle pattern PROFILER 2 Troubleshooting The following table provides solutions to several common setup or usage errors. Table 11-2. PROFILER 2 Troubleshooting Indication Probable Cause Solution PC unable to connect to instru- Not properly connected to USB port See “USB Connection” on page 14. ment via USB port Wrong operating system Must be Windows Visa (32-bit), XP (32-bit) or 2000. USB drivers not set up See “Setting Up the USB Port” on page 15. PC unable to connect to instru- Not properly connected See “Serial Connection” on page 14. ment via serial port Wrong serial port connected See “Find Device” on page 20. Serial ports not properly configured Set up and configure PC’s serial in PC port. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions. Profiles appear incorrect Wrong calibration files used Select the correct calibration file using the Dose Calibration toolbar and the Array Calibration toolbar. Improperly calibrated Recalibrate. See “Calibrating the System” on page 81. Wrong data mode selected Change the data mode using the toolbar. The data mode options are Total Dose, Avg. Rate, and Inst. Rate. Wrong data type selected Change the data type using the Data toolbar. The data type options are: Background, Calibration, Raw, Cor- rected, Dose, and Normalized. Minimizing Radiation Damage Although the detectors are designed to be exposed directly to the beam, the electronic process- ing circuits of PROFILER 2 can be damaged by direct exposure to ionizing radiation. Consequently, the electronic circuits are located in the large end of the instrument, out of the beam. To minimize damage to the electronics: • Keep all direct radiation inside the 20 by 30 cm field area of the top of PROFILER 2. • Never allow any direct radiation beyond the “KEEP DIRECT BEAM ABOVE THIS LINE” on the top surface of PROFILER 2. • Never expose the electronics portion of the instrument to the direct beam. • Never leave the unit on the couch during warm-up. Troubleshooting 193
- 206. • Never store the unit where it can accidentally be irradiated by the direct beam, such as a shelf in the treatment room that is irradiated by the direct beam when the accelerator is rotated. • Avoid frequent use of thick buildup, which may cause scattered radiation that will damage the electronics. • Keep the electronics out of the beam during concatenation, rotation, and offset. CAUTION: This device contains optichromic radiation dosimeters in the electronics area. To maintain warranty, direct irradiation of the electronics must be avoided. The ! dosimeters will be read if this device is returned for service. An indication of direct irradiation to the electronics will VOID the warranty. Contacting Client Solutions For customer service or technical support, contact: Sun Nuclear Corporation 425A Pineda Court Melbourne, Florida 32940-7508 telephone +1 321-259-6862 ext. 392, fax + 1 321-259-7979 e-mail techsupport@sunnuclear.com http://www.sunnuclear.com 194 Section 11. Maintaining Your System
- 207. Index Symbols asymmetric collimators (header) 34 alignment marks 84 %difference graph 67 ATLAS QA 181 concepts 157 .cal 159, 160 calibrating QA template 186 dose 94 .cat 160 import array calibration file 183 file name 52 .jca 160 measurement 187 file toolbar 52 .jmv 160 preparation for use 187 files 157 .jpr 160 PROFILER 2 detector layout 182 fixture 81 .mvi 160 PROFILER 2 display 181 interval 97 .prc 113, 159 scheme tree 184 setup 83 .prm 113, 159 template, beam tracking 185 steps 84 .pro 160 test plan 182 calibration, array 83, 157 .prs 113, 159 auto select configuration 45, 76 cancel 187, 188 .snb 159 automatic background 82 capture multi-frame 25 .txt 160 autosave collected data 42 capture, multiple frame 103 axis 118 cautions, use of vi Numerics CAX 163 3D image 38 B base intensity point 73 90% position 168 background 97 dose 72 background measurements 82 point difference (CPD) symmetry A background, manual 187 75, 165 about command 25 base intensity point 44, 73 ratio 72 about dose maps 121 beam CAX base intensity point 44 accelerator adjustments 174 center 163 CAX point difference (CPD), symmetry accessories 3 energy 36 44 accurate measurements 157 is pulsed 106 CAX, to offset 143 AccuSoft XL, export data 124 is pulsed command 25 center detector 161 acquisition toolbar 51 mode 41 centimeter scale 59 actual field size (header) 34 on indicator 38 change color command 56 alignment grid 6 strength, calibration 38 channel value display 62 alignment of field (header) 34 type 36, 39 chart color 42 alignment template 5 type (header) 34 chart line thickness 43 analysis beam center 71 cleaning 191 command 25 beam interpolated flatness & symmetry clear command 56 of a profile 160 45 close all command 24 analysis panel 70 beam interpolated flatness and close command 24, 56 display 72, 73 symmetry 168 CMS Focus or XIO grid 122 values 70 beam tuning 110 CMS, export data 127 analysis panel, configuring 43 beam tuning tab 66 collect background 35 angle of rotation (header) 34 beam tuning view 57 collect background command 25 annual recalibration 97 blue lines 84 collect background dialog box 35 applications 2 BrainLAB Brain Scan, export data 127 collecting multi-frame data 103 apply offsets to data 30 bubble level 6 collection interval - continuous 43 area average symmetry 75, 166 buildup collection interval - pulsed 43 area average, symmetry 44 SSD, alignment data (header) 34 collection time 35 area symmetry 75, 167 thickness (header) 34 collector information (header) 33 area, symmetry 44 collimator angle (header) 34 array calibration 81, 157 C color bar for gain overrange 53 dialog box 36 cables 8 colors, changing 114 fixture 81 CadPlan file, export data 137 com port list 49 loading file 99 cal file (header) 33 comment 118 loading saved file 91 calculate comments 39 overview 84 calibrated detectors 93 comments, QA calibration 187 procedure 83 detector range 36 compare 170 save file 89 calculating calibrated detectors 169 in accelerator QA 174 save to flash 89 calibrate index 170 toolbar 51 button 37 index cutoff 45 viewing saved file 92 calibrate array command 25 compare command 56 with saved files 90 calibrate dose command 25 comparing profiles 115 array calibration results, viewing 88 calibrated dose 39 comparison 170 array diagram for calibration 36 calibrating the system 81 concatenate command 25 array section 5 calibration 157 concatenated and double profiles 172 Index 195
- 208. concatenated file, legend panel 56 disposal 191 data mode 30 concatenating two measurements 103 distance markings 59 from menu 153 concidence, light/radiation field 163 dose 39 range 30 configuration 72 (header) 34 to DQA 154 configure analysis file name 52 to DQA measurement 30 dialog box 43 file toolbar 52 to SNC ASCII 29 connecting to software 20 map color code 27 export data 152 context menu 64 measurement 94 export DQA measurement context menu, graph view 62 mode 171 command 24 context menu, header view 63 of wedge 48 export filename 29 context menus 50 rate of detector j 161 export Pinnacle ASCII continuous radiation 106 dose calibraiton command 24 control loading value 100 export SNC ASCII menu 25 dose calibration 94 command 24 coordinate units keyword, SunCOM file dialog box 39 export to 140 factor 96 clipboard 29 copy remove 96 file 29 a file 79 save to flash 96 export to Pinnacle 154 command 24 set as default 96 export to Pinnacle ASCII 31 indexes with data 42 toolbar 51 extension blocks 81 copy command 56 dose map import 121 create a file from a measurement 79 dose maps, about 121 F crosshair location (header) 34 dose scalar quantity keyword, SunCOM faults, reporting 157 custom configuration 45, 77 file 140 features 2 customer service 194 dose units keyword, SunCOM file 140 field descriptions 186 download code command 25 field region 161 D download code dialog box 40 field region (flatness) 44, 75 data DQA measurement 24 field region (symmetry) 44, 75 format for export 30 drag and drop positioning 78 field size 36, 37, 71, 162 mode for export 30 draw points on graph 42, 59 file points 59 dynamic (virtual) wedge QA 175 format 159 toolbar 51, 53 dynamic wedge 34 information (header) 33 type 171 menu 24 view 64 E file icons, legend panel 56 data correction 43 Eclipse file, export data 138 files of type, TPS import 141 data correction - rate mode avg. 43 edit files, opening plan 149 data export 152 data offset 24 find device data plot tab 68 header 24, 32 command 25 data plot view 57 menu 24 find serial port button 49 data smoothing factor 43 profile selection 24 finding additional information 8 data tab 64 Electa analysis configuration 45, 77 finding the port 20 data view 57 electron energy finish button, calibration 37 date (header) 33 analysis setup 45, 76 firmware download 40 date/time 40 analysis setup parameters 45, 76 firmware version number (header) 33 Decimal utility 128 analysis style 45, 76 firmware, installing 192 default light field size 45 electron energy wedge fixed wedge QA 175 degrees of wedge angle (header) 34 analysis 172 fixture,calibration 81 depth (PDD) 45, 76 calibration command 25 flatness 44, 72, 75, 163 depth of radiation 48 electronics in beam message 42 flatness & symmetry description 1 electronics section 5 beam interpolated 45 description (header) 33 Elekta IMF installation 179 flatness calculation by ratio 164 description of IMF 177 Elekta Precise Plan, export data 129 flatness calculation by variance 163 description PROFILER 2 1 end panel 7 flatness/symmetry configuration 44 descriptor 40 energy 39, 40 Focus and XIO files, export data 127 detector energy (header) 34 fonts, large 42 location marks 6 energy calculated by intercept analysis frame number 54 numbers 59 172 pop-up box 64 energy calculated by slope analysis 172 G detector, reference 7 EPID files 122 gain 33 detectors calibrated 37 error messages 149 gain selection 52 device file 56 example SunCOM file 141 gain, checking 101 device type 41 exit command 24 gantry angle (header) 34 DICOM files, about 122 export gantry setup (header) 34 DICOM format, export data 138 ASCII data 153 graph 118 dimensions 10 by copying 153 view 58 diode aging 97 command 24 graph tab 58 display toolbar 51, 52 data component format 30 graph view 57, 58 196 Index
- 209. graphical interface 23 light-field concidence 71 command 24 load open command 56 H default cal file 42 opening files 113 header items list 118 load calibration file command 25 opening plan files 149 header tab 62 local point difference (LPD) symmetry operating conventions vi header view 57, 62 75, 165 operating system 10 header, edit 32 local point difference (LPD), symmetry operation of IMF 180 help 44 operator 40 button for serial port 49 orientation graphic (header) 34 menu 25 M other analysis parameters 45 topics 9 machine information (header) 33 overlay 170 help, online 8 machine ISO center 37 hide profile graph 60 machine setup (header) 34 P hiding items 78 magnifying glass P/DI 7 hints 8 array calibration 36 panel, legend 55 holes, alignment 6 main view 23 Panther, Prowess 134 home button (header) 34 maintaining system 191 parameters horn %dif 72 manual background 82, 187 command 25 horn values 167 maximum base intensity point 44, 73 part numbers 3 MDS Nordion Helax, export data 130 parts 3 I measure an equivalent profile 144 parts and repairs 191 IEC configuration 45, 77 measuring a single profile 101 penumbra 71, 163 import measuring radiation 99 penumbra bottom 44, 74 a treatment plan dose map 141 Memorial Sloan Kettering, export data penumbra interpolation command 24 129 use linear 45 display 145 menu bar 24 penumbra top 44, 74 planned dose 26, 121 messages, error 149 percent slice or volume file 148 mode difference 170 watertank files 28 button 52 dose depth (PDD) 48 import planned dose display 52 PerMedics Odyssey, export data 133 command 24 selection 171 photon energy wedge analysis 173 import TPS file model of machine (header) 33 photon wedge analysis parameters 45 filters 148 move analysis panel position 78 photon wedge measurements 109 import watertank measured movie Pinnacle ASCII 24, 31 command 24 playback 116 Pinnacle, export to 154 include field labels 30 toolbar 51, 54 Pinnacle3, export data 124 include frame data 30 moving wedge QA 175 Pinnacle3, Philips 124 information, sources of 8 multi-frame capture 103 pivot point list 41 installation, IMF 178 multi-frame file, legend panel 56 plan files, opening 149 installing multi-frame files 113 planned dose, importing 24 firmware 192 multiple installations 13 PLATO, export data 131 software 13 multiple instruments 21 playback controls 116 institution (header) 33 playback, movie 116 instruction box 39 N player, toolbar 54 instruction box, array calibration 37, 38 next frame button 54 plot device data command 25 integer detector index 162 NIST 39, 94, 95 point ratio symmetry 165 intensity cutoff precent 44, 73 NOMOS CORVUS, export data 131 positioning PROFILER 2 99 intercept 48 normalization power/data interface (P/DI) 7 intercept analysis 172 to calculated center 43 preview button 118 intercept method of electron energy to maximum value detector 43 previous frame button 54 analysis 45, 76 to physical center 43 print 188 invert button 52 to user defined detectors 43 command 24 invert command 25 type 43 options 117 invert imported files 146 normalization params - axis 43 tabular data 118 inverted profile 66 normalization params - position 43 printing isocentric mounting fixture (IMF) 177 normalize and zoom button 53 reports 119 normalize the graph 61 screens 119 K normalize to this channel command 62 profile keywords, SunCOM required 140 Nucletron Oncentra TP, export data 132 acquisition 175 Nucletron PLATO grid 123 comparison and overlay 170 L Nucletron, export data 131 storage and data format 159 large analysis fonts 42 profile analysis 160 lasers for calibration 36 O Profiler 1 launching software 20 on graph display toolbar 51, 54 file formats 160 legend panel 55 online help 8 Profiler 1 file 56 legend panel context menu 56 open Profiler 1 files 114 light-field coincidence 163 a file 113 PROFILER 2 Index 197
- 210. file formats 159 measured data 114 smooth data 25 help 25 to file 37 smoothing 169 PROFILER 2 file 56 to flash 37, 39 smoothing factor 43 PROFILER2 save as command 24 snb files 114 file formats 159 save calibration to flash command 25 SNC ASCII 24 progress bar 35 saving software Prowess Panther, export data 134 a profile 159 maintenance 191 pulse count 54 files 113, 114 new features iii purpose of IMF 177 the profile 102 version number 191 scale of graphs 59 version number (header) 33 Q scale, vertical 59 software, setup 13 QA template calibration 186 scroll bar, movie 54 software, using 23 QA template calibration comments 187 scroll bars 64 sources of information 8 quick set (header) 34 select specification, SunCOM file 139 quick start guide 8 a specific serial port 20 SRS PROFILER all 118 file formats 159 R file to import 26, 146 SSD 37, 41 radiation select both axes 54 SSD (header) 34 dosimeters 5, 194 select field size for calibration 93 SSD and field size dialog box 37 type 53 select field size using profile shape 93 start button 35, 39, 51 radiation damage to electronics 187 select slice 27 (calibration) 38 radiation damage, minimizing 193 select x axis 54 start button, movie 54 Radionics XKnife, export data 134 select x or y axis 54 start command 25 RAHD Alpha 3D Pro, export data 136 selected configuration 45, 77 starting the profile measurement 101 rate (header) 34 selected electron energy analysis setup static wedge 34 rate mode averaging 43 45, 76 status bar 53 ratio 164 selected file, legend panel 56 status toolbar 51 ratio (IEC) flatness 75 selecting file type 113 status, calibration 38 ratio (IEC) symmetry 75 serial number step A, array calibration 84 ratio (IEC), flatness 44 of instrument (header) 33 step B, array calibration 85 ratio (IEC), symmetry 44 of machine (header) 33 step C, array calibration 86 read manual before using vi serial port step D, array calibration 87 real time studies 174 alternatives 15 step indicator 38 rearrange analysis items 79 command 25 stop button 39, 52 rearrange files 79 connection 14 stop button, movie 54 recalibration interval 97 setup 20 stop command 25 record 187, 188 set as default 39 storage 191 recycling 191 setup storage and data format 159 re-do 187, 188 menu 25 subtract background 97 reference detector 7 setup parameters subtract background command 25 reference guide 8 dialog box 42 SunCOM file specification 139 removing software 21 setup printer button 118 SunCOM file, example 141 re-open shading for area symmetry 58, 59 SunCOM format, export data 139 command 24 shift amount 34 SunCOM optional header information re-open command 56 shift arrows (header) 34 140 repair 191 shift increment (header 34 SunCOM required keywords 140 reporting hardware or software faults shift PROFILER 2 central axis 26, 146 symmetric collimators (header) 34 157 shift PROFILER 2 down 27, 146 symmetry 72, 164 reports 117 shift PROFILER 2 left 27, 146 detector 61 reports, printing 119 shift PROFILER 2 right 27, 146 markers (goal posts) 58, 59 reset button 38 shift PROFILER 2 up 27, 146 symmetry, reset to home 26, 146 show area 167 results, viewing and printing 113 tips on startup 42 area average 166 room (header) 33 shutdown 21 CAX point difference 165 rotate clockwise 27, 146 Siemens configuration 45, 77 local point difference 165 rotate counterclockwise 27, 146 Siemens IMF installation 178 point ratio 165 rotate measured file 143 Siemens KonRad, export data 136 type of 44, 75 rotate PROFILER 2 overlay 26, 146 single frame files 113 system requirements 10 rotation (header) 34 single installation 13 rotation arrows (header) 34 slice in imported file 148 T r-squared coefficient value 48 slope 48 TGM ARTP (Topslane), export data 137 slope analysis 172 theory of calibration using wide fields S slope method of electron energy 158 safety vii analysis 45, 76 theta increment (header) 34 save slot 40 time (header) 33 calibration files to flash 89 small field calibration 169 time, elapsed 53 copied files 114 small fields 93 tip of the day 8 198 Index
- 211. tip of the day command 25 V warning to offset plan file, beam center 143 Varian file inversion on import 146 tool tip hints 8 2100 configuration 77 treatment plan modification 112 toolbar area 51 configuration 77 validate Pinnacle export data be- tools IMF installation 178 fore using 155 menu 25 Varian 2100 configuration 45 warranty 201 tray mount (header 34 Varian CadPlan grid 122 water tank file, legend panel 56 treatment planning system (TPS) 26, 121 Varian configuration 45 watertank measurement, importing 24 troubleshooting 193 Varian flatness 75 watertank measurements import 28, LED indications 193 varian point difference symmetry 75 150 two or more computers 14 varian point difference, symmetry 44 wedge type Varian, export data 137 (header) 34 machine (header) 33 varian, flatness 44 angle 72 of buildup (header) 34 variance 163 wedge configuration command 25 of file 53 variance flatness 75 wedge for electron energy 106 of Profiler (header) 33 variance, flatness 44 wedge, version keyword, SunCOM file 140 photon 109 U view weight 10 understanding results 157 dosemap 27, 146 wide fields, calibration using 158 uniform axis scale 42 orientation instructions 27, 146 uninstalling software 21 panel 57 X updating software and code files 192 treatment plan header 27, 146 X field size 41 USB view calibration 53, 88 XIO files, export data 127 connection 14 view calibration command 25 X-Y keyword, SunCOM file 140 drivers, removing 19 view tabs 57 drivers, verifying installation 19 viewing and printing results 113 Y drivers, Windows XP & 2000 18 virtual detector location 162 Y field size 41 port setup 15 virtual wedge 34 use linear penumbra position 45 Z use only within laboratory conditions vi W zoom 59 user service 191 warmup cycle 41 to crosshairs (header) 34 user’s guide 8 warmup milliseconds 36 zoom horizontal and vertical 42 Index 199
- 212. 200 Index
- 213. Warranty 1 INSTRUMENTATION a. This instrument and its accessories, excluding those listed in 1.D. below, are warranted by SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION, against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of orig- inal purchase from SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION. During the warranty period, SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION will repair, or at its option, replace an instrument found to have such defect, at no charge to the customer. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OF FITNESS, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. THIS EXPRESSED WARRANTY EXCLUDES COVERAGE OF AND DOES NOT PRO- VIDE RELIEF FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF SALES OR INCONVENIENCE. THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE PURCHASER IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, RECALIBRATION OR REPLACEMENT OF THE INSTRUMENT AT THE OPTION OF SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION. b. This warranty does not apply if the product, as determined by SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION, is defective due to either abuse, misuse, or modification or service performed by someone other than a SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION authorized repair and calibration facility. Misuse and abuse include, but are not limited to, subjecting the instrument to environmental conditions outside the specified limits or allowing the instrument to become contaminated by radioactive materials. c. In order to obtain warranty repair service, the instrument must be returned, freight prepaid, to the facility cited in 3.B. below. The purchase date, vendor invoice or customer purchase order should be included, along with a statement of the problem. Instruments will be returned transportation prepaid to points within the United States. d. Because the original manufacturer’s warranty applies, the following items are specifically excluded from this warranty: photomultiplier, Geiger-Mueller, and proportional tubes; batteries; ancillary devices, including, but not limited to, printers, computers, display devices, etc.; and other components as may be specified in this manual. 2 CALIBRATION a. This instrument is warranted to be within its specified accuracy at the time of shipment. If a question arises and SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION determines that the initial calibration is in error, the instrument will be re-calibrated by SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION at no charge. SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION is not respon- sible for calibrations performed by independent laboratories, nor any calibration fees incurred prior to or subsequent to SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION warranty service. b. The return policy is as stated in 1.C. above. 3 NON-WARRANTY SERVICE a. Repairs and/or replacements not covered by this warranty may be performed by SUN NUCLEAR CORPORA- TION or a factory authorized service location. Estimates of repair charges may be requested; however, a charge for estimate preparation may apply if the repair is later not authorized by the customer. b. The cost of transportation into and out of the service location will be the responsibility of the customer. The instrument should be shipped to: SUN NUCLEAR CORPORATION 425A Pineda Court Melbourne, FL 32940 U.S.A Phone +1 321-259-6862 Fax +1 321-259-7979
- 214. Corporate Headquarters 425A Pineda Court Melbourne, Florida 32940-7508 tel: +1 321 259-6862 web: www.sunnuclear.com